Home

Owners Manual - ESD

1. If the message Oil service required is shown visit a workshop The oil level may be too high IMPORTANT In the event of the message Oil level low Refill 0 5 litre only fill with 0 5 litres The oil level is only detected by the system during driving The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct Do not fill more oil if filling level 3 or 4 appears as shown in the illustration below The level must never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage Q 09 Maintenance and service 09 Engine compartment Wel wile LRNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani fold due to the risk of fire Measuring the oil level If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below 1 Activate key position Il see page 81 2 Rotate the thumbwheel on the left hand stalk switch to position Oil level gt You will then see information displayed about the engine oil level G046429 The figures 1 4 represent filling level Do not fill more oil if filling level 3 or 4 is shown The rec ommended filling level is 4 Message and graph in the display The left hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the right hand the analogue A Coolant can be ve
2. ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road The voice recognition system allows the driver to voice activate certain functions of a Bluetooth connected mobile phone and in Volvo s navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System while the driver can keep his her hands on the wheel at the same time The input data are in dialogue form with spoken commands from the user and verbal replies from the system The voice recognition system uses the same micro phone as the Bluetooth handsfree system see illustration on page 276 and the voice recognition system s replies come via the car s speakers 1 Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo s navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System The driver always holds overall responsibil Select language Language list Voice recognition is not possible for all lan guages Languages available for voice recog nition are marked with an icon in the lan guage list O Changing the language is per formed in the menu system MY CAR see page 209 g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 285 06 Infotainment system Voice recognition mobile phone Remember G043875 Steering wheel keypad Button for voice recognition To activate the system Before voice commands to a mobile phone can be used the mobile phon
3. nN io 10 o oO Air distribution defroster windscreen Air distribution air vent instrument panel Air distribution ventilation floor The figure consists of three buttons When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure is illuminated in the display screen see figure below and an arrow in front of each part of the figure shows the air distribution that is selected For more information on air distribu tion see page 224 1 Only applies to ECC TOUS uii Merapu The selected air distribution is shown in the cen tre console display screen AUTO The Auto function automati cally regulates temperature air conditioning fan speed y recirculation and air distribu tion If you select one or more manual functions the other functions continue to be controlled automatically All manual settings are disen gaged when AUTO is pressed The display screen shows AUTO CLIMATE Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Climate settings gt Automatic blower adjust Choose between Low Normal or High e Low Automatic fan control Low airflow is prioritised e Normal Automatic fan control e High Automatic fan control A more intense airflow is prioritised For a description of the menu system see page 208 Temperature control When the car is started the most recent set ting is resumed Heating or co
4. DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements In order to increase your enjoyment of the car we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment instructions and maintenance infor mation contained in this owner s manual der Gi Table of contents 01 Safety Scale corra coc eee 16 A Sic axcate scores E e eee ne 19 Activating deactivating the airbag 22 Side airbags SIPS bags ccccccccccccnnnnn 24 Inflatable Curtain 10 MM M0 25 YS A AA O 26 When the systems deploy ccooccccooo 28 Sale ela Se 29 Pedestrian airbag Pedestrian Airbag 30 iia roty A E ES 32 2 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction O OS O O 00 Introduction Important information essensen Volvo and the environment ccc0ceee 02 Locks and alarm Remote control key key blade 44 Battery replacement remote control A eats mete ratte eet cannes 50 KiSVWiGSS a a 52 ocam UNIOCKING SEE EE 56 ema afety locks WA cono E 62 Jo ian Sao E 63 MS O O O O 03 Your driving envi
5. 01 Safety S Pedestrian airbag Pedestrian Airbag 01 po gt o Press the rolled up portion of the airbag into the airbag housing 2 Repeat steps 1 3 for the passenger side It may be necessary to fold the gathered fabric twice on this side in order to wind the Velcro strap around it The airbag housing cover will be open slightly This is completely normal 01 Child safety Children should sit comfortably and safely In the event of questions when fitting child Do not secure the straps of the child seat Volvo recommends that children travel in safety products contact the manufacturer to the seat s horizontal adjustment bar rear facing child seats until as late an age as for clearer instructions springs or the rails and beams under the possible at least until 3 4 years of age and then front facing booster cushions child seats until up to 10 years of age Child seats seat Sharp edges may damage the straps Look in the installation instructions for the The position of a child in the car and the child seat for the correct fitting choice of equipment are dictated by the child s weight and size for more information see page 34 Location of child seats You may place e achild seat booster cushion on the pas senger seat provided the passenger air Regulations regarding the placement of bag is not activated children in cars vary from country to coun try Check what does apply e
6. To select the theme press the left hand stalk switch s OK button and then select the Themes menu option by turning the thumb wheel on the lever Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button For more information on menus see page 204 o oO fee 10 t o 0 Gauges and indicators theme Elegance 1 Fuel gauge When the indicator lowers to only one white marking the yellow indi cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated See also Trip computer page 232 and Refuelling page 299 Temperature gauge for engine coolant 03 Your driving environment Speedometer Tachometer The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm O Gear shift indicator Gear position indi cator See also gearboxes page 118 G046369 Gauges and indicators theme Eco aly Fuel gauge When the indicator lowers to only one white marking the yellow indi cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated See also Trip computer page 232 and Refuelling page 299 2 Eco guide See also page 73 5 Manual gearbox 6 Automatic gearbox Speedometer Tachometer The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm O Gear shift indicator Gear position indi cator See also gearboxes page 118 G047605 Gauges and indicators theme Performance amp Fuel gauge When the indicator lowers to only one white marking
7. occccccc c mmm 242 prake glesa 94 mounting POIS ias 305 City Safety cccococococononccononnocnnnocnnnnss 164 Drake SS Mission 131 parcel Snell enmriiaap ia 308 Emergency Brake Assistance EBA 131 ARANNA CaruUpholSte esmerada 370 automatic car washes 368 emergency brake lights 94 sas Gar WaS einander eaen 368 Gal WAS csikot aiias ainas 368 filling brake TlUld caoicoiiosarnirsaiai s 343 369 ele plo ol 133 OPEP o 133 Catalytic converter sssssssrssseserssseeretsssen 301 a e ements e symbols in the combined instrument RECOV CI inician be 316 aa poa VEU TE lap stieeminpalesvaliitdaidamnduncaleaslscatanetieomntats 132 E 1 IO PON IIA 266 p e Z Interior Package CZIP Bulbs see Lightino ccococcccccnccnonnnnns 346 Centre CONSOl8 oocccccccccnccccccnnnncccnnnnnonanos 207 pal Aone IMENor PACKAJENGAIR ble Climate CONTO sunsrirnar ra ie 215 e e COANE ete SCN A sorsra 215 Checking the engine oil level 339 SONS Sida 215 Children cs cd oa aa 32 Clock setting ee ERT A EES 79 child safety loCksS oooccccocnccconncnno 36 PE COs emissions nvcvicaricani o civic dedicaran 7 child seats and side airbags 24 AROS dd COSIO esenee R EENE 29 2 11 Alphabetical Index Collision WarninQ cccccconcoccnnncnnnoa o 170 171 Collision warning system radar Sensor 157 165 170 Collision Warning System with Auto RE C EE I
8. Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key it is then not possible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls For more information see page 60 Deadlocks Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking all are locked again automatically This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintention ally For cars with alarm see page 63 Manual locking In certain situations the car must be lockable manually e g in the event of power failure The left hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the remote control key s detachable key blade see page 54 Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each ri 7 a A Option accessory for more information see Introduction door which must be depressed using the key blade they are then mechanically locked blocked to prevent them being opened from outside The doors can still be opened from the inside Manual locking of the door Not to be mixed up with child safety locks see page 62 Remove the removable key blade from the remote control key see page 49 Insert the key blade into the hole for the lock switch and press in the key until it reaches the bottom approx 12 mm The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside The door is
9. Knob for daytime running lights and park ing lamps Main beam flash can be used O Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling 1 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Daytime running lights and position parking lamps side marker lamps during the day when the car s electrical sys tem is in key position Il or the engine is running Automatic switching to dipped beam and position parking lamps side marker lamps in poor light conditions or when the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated The Tunnel detection func tion is activated see page 91 The Active high beam func tion can be used see page 92 Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on Main beam flash can be used 03 Your driving environment EN EA 03 gt gt 89 UY 03 Your driving environment Lighting A z _ Dipped beam and position parking lamps side marker lamps 03 Main beam can be activated Main beam flash can be used A Fitted in or under the front bumper Volvo recommends that mode is used when the car is being driven as long as traffic situations or weather conditions are unfavour able for the Active high beam function Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position see page 81 The display lighting is auto
10. Operation Selection of level Sport mode The DSTC system is always activated it cannot be deactivated However the driver can select the Sport mode which allows for a more active driving experience In Sport mode the system detects whether the accelerator pedal steer ing wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabil ises the car If the driver stops a controlled skid by releas ing the accelerator pedal then the DSTC sys tem intervenes and stabilises the car 04 Driver UN DSTC Stability and traction control system With Sport mode maximum traction is 2 Uncheck the box and back out of the obtained if the car has become stuck or menu system with EXIT when driving ona loose surface e g sand or gt The system then allows a more sporty deep snow driving style Proceed as follows to select Sport mode The Sport mode is active until the driver and locate My V40 gt DSTC For infor DSTC system is back in its normal mode mation on the menu system see Aga page 207 04 Symbols and text messages DSTC Temporarily OFF DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature The function is reacti vated automatically when the brakes have cooled DSTC Service required DSTC system disengaged e Stop the car in a safe place switch off the engine and start
11. The car must only be washed by hand over the first few months This is because the paint is more delicate when it is new High pressure washing When using high pressure washing use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car the distance applies to all exterior parts Do not spray directly onto the locks Testing the brakes Always test the brakes after washing the car including the parking brake to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per formance Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush The heat from the friction causes the brake linings to warm up and dry Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather Exterior plastic rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts rubber and trim components such as glossy trim mouldings When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber When using degreasant on plastic and rubber only rub with light pressure if it is necessary Use a soft washing sponge Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used
12. o ooooooocmomo 90 Headlamp pattern adjusting 97 Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights 98 PE AGIAN Susini dais 346 head restraint ont SAN vetuieta sine ritics ec ertucasedeunieadeatacses 83 Head restraint Centre Seat FOAM cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeess 85 OMS ta 86 PP PE T 221 rearview and door MirrorS 107 Ae 107 21 CPP E E A T EN E 219 Heat reflecting WINASCreeN 6ccceceeeee 104 High engine temperature cccconccnnnno 309 High pressure headlamp washing 102 A 134 Home safe lighting o ccccoonccnonionom 97 e AP ee ee 88 IAQS Interior Air Quality System 216 IC Inflatable Curtain 25 Ignition KEYS cs ceccsssantecsinetncstenctesasossdesiwaracess 81 TUT NS arcano 45 Indicator lamps PCC ccccseeeeeeeeeeees 47 Inflatable Curtain cece se ees eseeeeeeeeveees 25 Information button PCC ooconccccccncccncnnnncns 47 Information display viciosa cir 71 Infotainment system ccccoooccccnnnnccnnnnnnnnnos 248 A tec beatanieonsmvareuiateaeevteds 251 OVEIVICW ou ccceccccceeseeseeseeeeueceeeuseusaneueues 248 source DUTIONS sicccecccctssussutectecncavcanevesi 249 VOICE CONTIOL cccccc esse eseeseeseseneveeees 285 Inlaid MS ciones 243 Instrument lighting see Lighting 90 Instrument overview left hand drive 68 right hand AV O ricino 70 Instruments and controls
13. stop the driver has opened the seatbelt s M buckle A the capacity of the battery is below M the minimum permissible level A the engine does not have normal M operating temperature A outside temperature is below freez M ing point or above approx 30 C A the windscreen s electric heating is M activated A the environment in the passenger M compartment differs from the preset A values indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed Conditions M Conditions M AA AA the car is reversed M A the starter battery s temperature is M below freezing point or too high A the driver makes greater steering M wheel movements A the exhaust system s particulate fil M ter is full the temporarily disen A gaged Start Stop function is reacti vated once an automatic cleaning cycle has been performed see page 303 the road is very steep M A a trailer is connected electrically to M the car s electrical system A the atmospheric air pressure is less M than equivalent to A 1500 2400 metres above sea level the current air pressure varies with the prevailing weather conditions adaptive cruise control Queue Assist A is activated the driver s door has been opened A with the gear selector in D position the gear selector is moved out ofthe A D position to S position or A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox B Car with ECC C Sport mode The engine auto sta
14. 205 Tyre width mm 50 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width R Radial ply 17 Rim diameter in inches 93 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load tyre load index LI W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed speed rating SS In this case 270 km h 08 Wheels and tyres Load index Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load a load index LI The car s weight deter mines the load capacity required of the tyres Minimum permitted index is specified in the table see page 391 Speed ratings Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed a speed rating Speed Symbol SS Tyre speed class must at least correspond with the car s top speed Minimum permitted speed rating is specified in the table see page 391 The only exception to these conditions is win ter tyres both those with metal studs and those without where a lower speed rating may be used If such a tyre is chosen the car must not be driven faster than the speed rat ing of the tyre for example class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km h Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven not the speed rating of the tyres ORC The maximum permitted speed is speci fied in the table 160 km h used only on winter tyres 190 km h 210 km h 240 km h 270 km h lt NN lt HN 4 ES 300 km h WARNING The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index LI and speed
15. 3 C When gearing up down as recommended the upper one is illuminated at or the lower at marked red in the illustration P Parking position Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked Automatic gearbox e In order to be able to move the gear selector from P position the brake pedal must first be depressed firmly The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged Apply the parking brake as well as a precaution see D Automatic gear positions Manual gear page 133 positions S Sport mode ORE The combined instrument panel shows the position of the gear selector using the follow The gear selector must be in P position to shift indicator ing indications P R N D S 1 2 3 etc allow the car to be locked and alarmed 1 The gear lever s gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 119 03 Your driving environment 03 Gearboxes IMPORTANT The car must be stationary when posi tion P is selected WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope the automatic trans mission in P is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations R Reverse The car must be stationary when position R is selected N Neutral No gear is engaged and the engine can be started Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary w
16. A Part of message shown together with information on where the problem has arisen B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended C For more messages concerning automatic transmission see page 123 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Menu source MY CAR phone call is rejected Operation General information on MY CAR current function is interrupted Many of the car s functions are han dled in this menu source such as set ting the clock door mirrors and locks Centre console controls input characters are deleted most recent selections are undone leads up in the menu system Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons on the centre console or with the steering wheel s right hand keypad Short and long presses can also produce varying results A long press leads to the highest menu level Parent view from where all of the car s func tions menu sources can be accessed see page 251 Certain functions are standard others are optional the range also varies depending on the market Centre console controls for menu navigation 05 ab Press MY CAR to open the menus under MY CAR Press OK MENU to select tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up down among the menu options O EXIT EXIT functions Depending on the function the cursor is on when EXIT is pressed and on the menu level one of
17. Refitting the components in the foam block G047535 08 a Version 1 The components are fitted in the foam block in the following order Torx wrench 1 Towing eye socket wrench 2 Bottle pressed in from the side 3 TMK kit 4 Funnel 5 Jack 6 7 Towbar G047536 Version 2 The components are fitted in the foam block in the following order ls 2 3 4 Socket wrench Towing eye Bottle TMK kit 334 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 5 Jack Replacing the sealing fluid canister Replace the bottle when the expiration date has passed Treat the old bottle as environ mentally hazardous waste WARNING The bottle contains 1 2 Ethanol and natu ral rubber latex Harmful if ingested Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact Avoid contact with the skin and eyes Store out of the reach of children 08 Wheels and tyres 336 EGF OE A PP 338 Lamp E E ReMi NEM ts 52 cd baad tuncata daatodatuea emateatiavdeatvaceaeeatec oes 345 WIDER blades end washer MiiGe neninn nnana nanana nannaa 352 SAA A ro seass ae 399 A A a A 359 CAM CANS e ee ae eee eae TTT eer at re te eat 368 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE T INS e O Q 09 Maintenance and service 09 Engine compartment General WARNING Volvo service programme Remember that the radiator fan located at To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi the front of
18. Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome plated aluminium rims Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old However the car can be waxed during this time Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing Clean off asphalt 09 Maintenance and service D Car care 09 and tar stains using tar remover or white spi rit More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully Many preparations contain both polish and wax IMPORTANT Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used Other treatment such as preserving sealing protection lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty Water repellent coating AS Never use products such as car wax degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water repellent properties Take care when cleaning so as not to dam age the glass surface To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice onl
19. SA Volvo recommends Castrol Llit SHIM ML A Ce LTD Volvo recommande Castrol MADE IN JAPAN Volvo recomienda Castrol TF 80SC Osan VYV1L S550N2000327 Volvo pexomeHpyer Castrol SERIAL NO a T 100001 3 77 VOLVO G048054 376 10 Specifications Type designations Knowing the car s type designation vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories It is not intended that the decals illustrated 10 in the owner s manual should be exact replicas of those in the car They are included to show their approximate Type designation vehicle identification appearance and location in the car The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car number maximum permissible weights codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number The label is visible when the right rear door is opened Label for A C system Label for parking heater Engine code and engine serial number Label for engine oil O Gearbox type designation and serial num ber QO Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox Car s identification number VIN Vehicle Identification Number Further information on the car is presented in the registration document 10 Specifications 01 10 00 111 Dimens
20. car s functions e g cruise control and trip computer as well as messages The informa tion is shown with symbols and text There are further descriptions under the func tions that use the display Gauges and indicators analogue instrument panel o isp ics 10 a o O Fuel gauge When the indicator lowers to only one white marking the yellow indi cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated See also Trip computer page 232 and Refuelling page 299 Eco meter The meter provides an indica tion of how economically the car is being driven The higher the reading on the scale the more economical it is Speedometer Tachometer The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm O Gear shift indicator Gear position indi cator See also gearboxes page 118 Gauges and indicators digital instrument panel Various themes can be selected for the digital combined instrument panel Possible themes are Elegance Eco and Performance The setting for the theme can be stored in the remote control key s memory when locking the car see pages 44 and 209 A theme can only be selected when the engine is running 1 When the display s message Distance to empty fuel tank starts to show the marking becomes red 2 Manual gearbox 3 Automatic gearbox 4 When the display s message Distance to empty fuel tank starts to show the marking becomes red
21. e ECO pressure NOTE Temperature differences change the tyre pressure 1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy Fuel economy ECO pressure In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at speeds below 160 km h an ECO pressure is recommended applies to both full and light load see page 391 Checking the tyre pressure The tyre pressures must be checked every month Check tyre pressures on cold tyres Cold tyres means the tyres are the same tempera ture as the ambient temperature After several few kilometres of driving the tyres warm up and the pressure increases Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con sumption shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car s roadholding Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort road noise and steering characteristics Tyre pressure decreases over time this is a natural phenomenon Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature Warning triangle and first aid kit Warning triangle Lift the floor hatch or push the rear part F of the luggage compartment floor for wards in models with a jointed floor and then lift the lower floor and remove the warning triangle 22 Take the warning triangle from the case fold out and assemble the two loose sides G046414 i Fold out the warning triangle s support legs Follow the regulatio
22. gt gt 401 01 10 00 111 10 Specifications Type approval CA 10 The United Arab Emi TRA TRA rap EMI REGISTERED No REGISTERED No rates ER0071020 11 ER0071017 11 DEALER No DEALER No DA0042125 10 DA0042125 10 South Africa TA 2011 1072 TA 2011 1073 APPROVED Jamaica Approved for use in Jamaica SMA El IAM2 1 Thailand This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement Oman Licenses Sensus software This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real time OS Source Copyright c 1982 1986 1991 1993 1994 and Quercus Robusta Copyright c 1990 1993 The Regents of the University of California All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co or Unix System Laboratories Inc and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories Inc Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the nam
23. Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox Start assistance HSA M M A The foot brake can also be released on an uphill gradient to start the engine automati cally the Hill Start Assist function means that the car does not roll backwards HSA means that the pressure in the brake system remains temporarily available while the driver s foot is moved from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off with the engine having stopped automatically The temporary braking effect releases after a couple of seconds or when the driver acceler ates There is more information available on HSA on page 118 Deactivating the Start Stop function In certain situations it may advisable to temporarily MITA switch off the automatic Start Stop function this is carried out with a push of this button Disengaged function is indicated by A the combined instrument panel s Start Stop symbols and the button s lamp extinguishing START STOP The Start Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key a gt a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Limitations The engine does not auto stop Even if the Start Stop function is activated the engine does not stop automatically if AA the car has not achieved M approx 5 km h fast walking pace A first after a key start or the last auto
24. On aA Y A ioo 20 10 iso 77 10 180 A When one of the timers is activated the sym bol for activated timer illuminates in the dis play at the same time as the set time is shown next to the symbol Symbol for activated timer in ana logue combined instrument panel Information displays digital combined instrument panel and controls for menu navigation Information display analogue combined instru O Symbol for activated timer in digital ment panel and controls for menu navigation 1 OK button combined instrument panel i 05 Thumbwheel RESET The table shows symbols and display texts For more information on display and OK see matappear pages 71 and 204 gt gt y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 227 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Engine and passenger compartment heater Symbol Display Specification The heater is switched on and running The heater s timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and leaving the car the engine and passenger compartment are heated at the set time Fuel operated heater The heater has been stopped by the car s electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine stopped Battery saving mode Fuel operated heater Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low this is in order to facilitate starting stopped Low fuel level the engine as well as
25. also below 30 km h and at standstill e Change of target e Automatic braking ceases when station ary Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km h even though the cruise control is capable of follow ing another vehicle down to a standstill a lower speed cannot be selected 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 155 Y 04 Driver support 04 156 Adaptive cruise control Extended speed range In order to activate the cruise control the driver s door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt With an automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle within the range 0 200 km h Activation of the cruise control below 30 km h requires a vehicle in front within a reasonable distance For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed approx 3 seconds if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic braking The driver must then reactivate it in one of the following ways e Press the steering wheel button D or e Depress the accelerator pedal gt The cruise control will then resume fol lowing the vehicle in front Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes then
26. ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 310 ES 102 eo E Eo A 394 de ES SER Hi washer fluid filliMg o 353 Type designatiON ccoocccccccnccnonnncannconanons 376 E WIIG SCS nesoisciriirasiooctsani reenaircrseias 102 Ties Volvo SenSUS conccccccccononnnnnncnonannanoncnnnannnnnnns 80 Water and dirt repellent coating 104 direction Of rota lO msi 320 Water repellent surface cleaning 369 driving CharacteristiCs ccccsseceee 320 NY AXING A o O E E tastes 369 WIAINMS NAN CS scsvesenccsesntnccedenens sarexscecabes 320 W ta A 328 391 Weights puncture repai 339 Warning amp kerb WeIQNt cccccccsscsesseecssescseseesesees 379 SpecificatiONSiseincmoscios iodo 322 391 acapte Kai MNO tnisenitiakeasictet me Wheels Speed TaN Suicidio 323 colisi n Ada Sic ee Me CANO Orsai 324 tread wear indicators 321 stability and traction control system 140 INStalla OM across 326 Winter tYlOS ocoococccconnnoncnnnnnanonanoncnnnanos 322 Warning lamps A IIA 321 al bags SIRS semis 77 SHOW CHAINS vovccisisinerinsendiscvecsinenderinevdate 322 alternator NOt charging 11 spare Mens 324 fault in brake SysteM ocoonccicconccnnnnonos 17 CD 11 Alphabetical Index Wheels and tyr8S ooocccconocccccononnoconannonnns 320 Whiplash injury WHIPS oooococooooo 26 WHIPS child seat booster Cushi0N 26 whiplash IAJU accteiriacar aan 26 Windows rearview a
27. nents must be checked regularly shop is recommended Contact a workshop for information about If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the procedure or engage a workshop to the brake fluid reservoir do not drive fur carry out the inspection an authorised ther before topping up the brake fluid a recommended The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated Symbols in the combined instrument panel Symbol Specification Constant glow Check the brake fluid level If the level is low fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started automatic function check General WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope leaving the car in gear or in P if it has automatic transmis sion is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations Bi The combined instrument panel s warning sym bol The lever is located between the front seats Applying the parking brake 1 Press the foot brake pedal down firmly 2 Pull the lever firmly gt The combined instrument panel s warning symbol illuminates The combined instrument panel s warning symbol illuminates regardless of whether the parking brake is applied slightly or fully 3 Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position 4 Ifthe vehicle moves then the parking brake lever must b
28. son Seatbelts and pregnancy Never modify or repair the seatbelts your self Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load such as in conjunction with a collision the entire seatbelt must be replaced Some of the seatbelt s protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage The new seatbelt must be type approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt G020998 The seatbelt should always be worn during pregnancy But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen It must never be allowed to ride upward Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos sible In addition check that there are no twists in the seatbelt As the pregnancy progresses pregnant dri vers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain con trol of the vehicle as they drive which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abd
29. 3 2 Car care Touching up minor paintwork damage Paint is an important part of the car s rust proofing and should therefore be checked regularly To avoid the onset of rust dam aged paintwork should be rectified immedi ately The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips scratches and marks on the edges of wings doors and bumpers Materials e primer a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e g plastic coated bumpers e basecoat and clearcoat available in spray cans or as touch up pens sticks e masking tape e fine sand paper 1 If required Colour code VOLVO CAR CORPORATION G044980 1 Car colour code It is important that the correct colour is used For product decal location see page 376 2 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch up pen stick Repair minor paintwork damage such as stone chips and scratches G021832 Before work is begun the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C 1 Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint If the damage is down to the metal use of a primer is appropriate In the event of damage to a plastic surface an adhesive primer should be used to give better results spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly 09 Maintenance and service Car care 09 2 Before painting ge
30. 4 shows battery sta influence of alcohol Before the engine can be tus started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he she is not under the influence of alcohol Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market s limit value in force for driving legally Indicator Battery status 03 EAG Green flash Charging in progress in WARNING The Alcolock is an aid and does not 5 E IS exempt the driver from responsibility It is a always the responsibility of the driver to be ap Nozzle for breath test eo SS sober and to drive the car safely Os Red Discharged fit the charger SER in the holder or connect the Transmission button power supply cable from the glovebox O Lamp for battery status E Lamp for result of breath test Store the Alcolock in its holder This will indi f th test a ready tor predites keep the built in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened 1 Also called Alcoguard Option accessory for more information see Introduction el E 03 Your driving environment 03 112 unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch 2 3 Fold up the nozzle 1 take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a click is heard after approx 5 seconds The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath test Result after breath test Indicator lamp
31. 5 Specification Display text Green lamp Alcoguard Approved test Start the engine no alcohol content meas ured 4 If no message is shown then the trans mission to the car may have failed in Yellow lamp Engine starting possi which case press the button 3 to trans Alcoguard ble measured alcohol a mit the result to the car manually Approved test content Is above Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alco 0 1 promille but below Handheld unit storage and charging station lock in its holder the mi value in n force e The handheld alcolock unit is released by Start the engine following an approved pel depressing it slightly in its holder and breath test within 5 minutes otherwise it Red lamp Dis Engine starting not releasing it it then springs out and can be removed from the holder e Replace the handheld unit in the holder by pushing it in until it engages e Store the handheld unit in the holder this provides it with the best protection and keeps its batteries fully charged must be repeated possible measured alcohol content is above the limit value in force approved test Wait 1 minute A Limits vary between countries so find out what limits apply See also the section entitled General information on the Alcolock on page 111 Before starting the engine The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened After a completed period
32. 68 Interior lighting see Lighting 95 Interior rearview MirTOF oocoonccnccncccccnncnnca 108 automatic din rotar aaa 108 Intermittent WipiNQ oooccccccnnccnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnos 101 iPod CONNECtION coocccnccccccnccnnncnannnnnnnss 270 J Journey StALISTICS s ccccccnicsenccnsesesseneecncnnseens 238 Kerb Well visas aio iios das 379 e 44 a Lo AO 5 PA 48 Keyless UliVE oooccccononncccononnononannonnnnons 52 115 Keyless start keyless drive 52 115 Keypad in the steering WhWBlaocoooonccnnccnnnnoccnncnnnnnos 88 148 208 249 Key POSITION S esemsaidimeta tina iso nia 81 L OS A eo E T 376 Laminated las sacs ceeseccwnsidianseesentzetenncnats 104 Lamps see Light Queoiconsiaiacas 345 Lane keeping assistant LKA 182 Laser SENSO nostros 167 Leather upholstery washing instructions 370 Ereann A o EE T 345 Active Xenon headlaMpS cccccnccccnocco 93 approach light duration 46 97 automatic lighting passenger com ers pag y y iiir 96 bulbs specificatiOnS ccconnncccnnnncn 350 CONTO Sucia ccoo 95 daytime running lightS 91 display lo MO ciuccasaarraanias 90 headlamp levelling o ooocooooo 90 home safe lighting ccccconcninno 97 in passenger compartment 00 95 instrument lighting occocononiono 90 main dipped bDeaM ccccconccncccnccn
33. 81 UY 03 Your driving environment Key positions Choosing key position level Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting switching off the engine see page 115 Key position O e Unlock the car this means that the car s electrical system is at level 0 Towing Key position For important information about the remote 03 e With the remote control key fully inserted control key during towing see page 315 into the ignition switch Briefly press START STOP ENGINE To reach level I or Il without starting the engine do not depress the brake clutch pedal when these key positions are due to be selected Key position II e With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch Give a long press on START STOP ENGINE Back to key position 0 e To return to key position O from position Il and I Briefly press on START STOP ENGINE Audio system For information on the audio system s func tions with remote control key removed see page 248 1 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless function 2 Approx 2 seconds 82 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Front seats G046007 To adjust lumbar support turn the wheel 2 Forward backward lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and pedals Check that the seat is locked after changing position To raise lower the front edge of seat cushion pump u
34. ANAITA2El2 KAI TI2 AOINES 2XETIKE2 AIATA EIZ TH OAHTIAZ 1999 5 EK Par la pr sente Alpine Electronics Inc d clare que l appareil Bluetooth Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Con la presente Alpine Electronics Inc dichiara che questo Bluetooth Module conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Ar o Alpine Electronics Inc deklar ka Bluetooth Module atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK b tiskaj m pras b m un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem Siuo Alpine Electronics Inc deklaruoja kad Sis Bluetooth Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics Inc dat het toestel Bluetooth Module in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Hawnhekk Alpine Electronics Inc jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth Module jikkonforma mal htigijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC Alul rott Alpine Electronics Inc nyilatkozom hogy a Bluetooth Module megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet k vetelm nyeknek s az 1999 5 EC ir nyelv egy b eloirasainak gt gt 01 10 OO 11 10 Specifications Type approval coumis Poland Portugal Slovenia Slovakia Finland Sweden Iceland Norway Niniejszym Alpine
35. AUX input under the armrest Includes cup holder for driver and pas senger If ashtray and cigarette lighter ri a a A Option accessory for more information see Introduction are specified then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket for the front seat see page 244 and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder Armrest When closed the armrest can be adjusted longitudinally Cigarette lighter and ashtray The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached by lifting the tray straight up Activate the lighter by pushing in the button The button pops out when the lighter is hot Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Comfort inside the passenger compartment Cooling is active when the climate control Vanity mirror system is active i e when the key is in posi tion Il or the engine is running Inlay mats Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats WARNING Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid get ting caught adjacent to and under the ped The owner s manual and maps can be kept als n here for example There are also holders for The light illuminates automatically when the 05 pens on the inside of the lid The glovebox cover is lifted can be locked using the key blade see pages 48 and 58 Cooling The glovebox can also be used as
36. LKA see page 182 A switched on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km h The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km h The functions use a camera which is depend ent on the lane having side markings painted on each side Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a sup plementary aid The driver always bears ultimate responsi bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely Driver aid status Support systems Collision Warning Unavailable Lane Keeping Aid EWEN El9 C Driver Alert Unavailable The current status for all driver aids can be checked in MY CAR see page 209 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction G017332 The DAC Driver Alert Control function is intended to attract the driver s attention when he she starts to drive less consistently e g if he she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver s steering wheel movements The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly NOTE The camera sensor has certain limitations see page 175 The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads The function is not intended for city
37. The function can be activated deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu gt Advanced settings DAB linking Wavelength DAB can be transmitted on two wave lengths 6 Not all areas countries use both wavelengths e Band III covers most areas e LBand available only in a few areas By selecting for example Band III on its own channel programming takes place more quickly than if both Band II and LBand have been selected It is not certain that all channel groups will be found Wavelength selection does not affect the stored memories Wavelengths can be deactivated activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings DAB band Subchannel Secondary components are usually named subchannels These are temporary and can contain e g translations of the main pro gramme into other languages If one or more subchannels are broadcast then the VV symbol is shown to the left of the channel name in the TV screen A subchannel is indicated by the symbol appearing to the left of the channel name in the TV screen Press cS to access the subchannels Subchannels can only be accessed on the selected main channel and not on any other channel without selecting it 06 Infotainment system Display of subchannels can be deactivated activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings Sub channels Programme type text Some radio stations broadcast information about programme type and programme cate go
38. Trip meter T2 or Average speed shown in the combined instrument panel e Give along press on RESET RESET selected heading is zeroed Each heading must be zeroed individually Resetting with Digital Trip meter Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading combination containing the trip meter to be reset e Give along press on RESET RESET selected trip meter is zeroed Average speed amp Average consumption 1 Select function Trip computer reset and activate with OK 2 Select one of the following options with the thumbwheel and activate with OK 1 100 km km h Reset both 238 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 3 Finish with RESET Change unit To change unit km miles for distance and speed go to MY CAR gt Settings gt System options gt Distance and fuel units see page 207 In addition to the trip computer these units are also changed at the same time in Volvo s GPS navigator RTI Journey statistics Information is stored about completed trips containing average fuel consumption and average speed which can be viewed in the centre console s screen as a bar chart Function ee Trip statistics y H 1 a iil Trip statistics Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven distance depending on the scale selected the bar at the far right shows the value for the current kilometre or 10 km The TUNE knob can be used to change the scale f
39. ao MPG US km l 1 100km Temperature unit Celsius Fahrenheit Selects the unit for the display of outside temperature and setting of the climate control system Volume levels Voice output volume Front park assist volume Rear park assist volume Phone ringing volume Reset system options All menus in System options are given original factory settings Voice settings Only in cars with Volvo GPS navi gator RTI see separate manual Voice tutorial This menu option OK provides spoken information about how the system works Voice command list Phone commands Phone Phone call contact Phone dial number Navigation commands Navigation Navigation repeat ins Navigation go to add General commands Help Cancel Voice tutorial The menu options under Phone commands show several exam ples of available voice commands only with a Bluetooth enabled mobile phone installed For more and detailed information see page 276 The menu options under Naviga tion commands show several examples of available voice com mands in the navigation system Voice user setting Default setting User 1 User 2 Here there is the option to create a second user profile an advantage if more than one person shall use the car system regularly Default setting resets to factory settings Voice training User 1 User 2 With Voice training the voice rec ognition system is taught to recog nise the driver s voice and pro
40. arrow Speed signs linked to this type of additional sign are displayed only if the driver is using the direction indicator Some speeds are applicable only after a specific distance or at a certain time of day O m for example The driver s attention is drawn to the sit uation by means of a symbol for an additional sign under the symbol showing speed Display of additional information A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the combined instrument panel s speed symbol means that the RSI has detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed limit Ji There are options for RSI in the MY CAR menu system see page 209 A mhh ow Cra RAY MA a rT ri nm re ma NY fl A f D GELUI I IWE E AJAN i ww Road sign information On Off The combined instrument panel s speed sym bol display can be disabled To deactivate the RSI function Uncheck the option Road Sign Information at Settings gt Car settings Road Sign Information and go back out by pressing EXIT 1 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market dependent the illustrations in the manual only show a few examples Option accessory for more information see Introduction Speed warning The driver can opt to receive a warning when the applicable speed limit is exceeded by 5 km h or more This warning is given by the symbol showing the app
41. disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after a short time The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Side mirror settings gt Tilt left mirror or Tilt right mirror For a descrip tion of the menu system see page 208 Automatic retraction when locking When the car is locked unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto matically retracted extended The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Side mirror settings Fold mirrors For a description of the menu sys tem see page 208 1 Only in combination with power seat with memory see page 84 Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting extending to work correctly 1 Retract the mirrors with the L and R but tons 2 Fold them out again with the L and R but tons 3 Repeat the above procedure as neces sary The mirrors are now reset in neutral position Retractable power door mirrors The mirrors can be retracted for parking driv ing in narrow spaces 1 Depress the L and R buttons simultane ously key position must be at least I 2 Release them after approximately 1 second The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position Fold out the mirrors
42. ers see page 107 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 219 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Climate control Front seats o TONS uti Merapol Current heat level is shown in the centre console display screen 05 Press the button repeatedly in order to acti vate the function e Highest heat level three orange fields illuminate in the centre console s screen see figure above e Lower heat level two orange fields illu minate in the screen e Lowest heat level one orange field illu minates in the screen 220 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Switch off the heat no field illuminates Rear seat G045770 Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton s lamps Press the button repeatedly in order to acti vate the function Highest heat level three lamps illumi nate Lower heat level two lamps illuminate Lowest heat level one lamp illuminates Switch off the heat no lamp illuminates If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged which can cause a risk of misting on the windows Fan knob for ECC Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed AUTO is disengaged If AUTO is selected the fan speed is regulated automatically the fan speed previously set is disengaged Fan knob for ETC Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed
43. ice and snow covering sensors can reduce functionality and make it impossi ble to provide warnings BLIS and CTA are unable to detect hazards if covered e Do not affix any objects tape or labels in the area of the sensors e BLIS and CTA are deactivated when a trailer is connected to the car s electrical system IMPORTANT Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions components must only be performed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Maintenance G046430 Location of BLIS and CTA sensors The BLIS and CTA sensors are located inside the rear wing bumper on each side of the car e To ensure optimal functionality the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean Messages In situations where the BLIS and CTA func tions fail or are interrupted the combined instrument panel may show a symbol sup plemented by an explanatory message Fol low any recommendation given Message examples CTA OFF CTA has been deactivated manually BLIS is active BLIS and BLIS and CTA are tempo CTA OFF rarily disabled because a Trailer trailer is connected to the attached car s electrical system BLIS and BLIS and CTA are not CTA Serv working ice required visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo work shop is recommended A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direc tion indicator stalk i Option accessory for more in
44. raised on the jack Park the car such that passengers have the car or ideally a crash barrier between themselves and the roadway The car s regular jack is designed only for use occasionally and for a short time such as when changing a wheel with a punc tured tyre switching between summer tyres and winter tyres etc Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car If the car is to be jacked up more often or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel use of a garage jack is recommended In this instance follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment Installation 1 Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub 2 Put on the wheel Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate N is o 5 t 2 oO I Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise It is important that the wheel bolts are tight ened properly see page 321 for tighten ing torques Check the torque with a tor que wrench Changing wheels G046622 The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be positioned over the valve on the wheel rim during fitting Replacing the spare wheel and jack in the cargo area The tools and jack must be returned to their correct places in the foam block after use 1 Unscrew the towing eye from the wheel bolt wrench Put back any tools that have been used in the relevant compartments in
45. see page 274 Remove the connected device 1 Press Bluetooth mode on OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth device and confirm with OK MENU 3 Select the device to be removed by turn ing TUNE and confirm with OK MENU gt A prompt asking whether or not you want to remove the connection is shown in the TV screen 4 Press OK MENU to confirm EXIT cancels Random This function plays back the audio files on the external device in random order Activate deactivate the random function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Random Change audio file by pressing ERI on the centre console or the steering wheel key pad Scanning of audio files in external device This function play backs the first ten seconds of each audio file Activate deactivate the function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Scan Cancel scanning with EXIT Version information Bluetooth The car s current Bluetooth version can be seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Bluetooth software version in car 2 Not supported by all mobile phones i a A Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system J Media Bluetooth 06 275 06 Infotainment system 06 21 6 Bluetooth handsfree General A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the Infotain ment system The infotainment system then works handsfree
46. the current speed limit a sign showing that overtaking is prohibited may also be End of restriction or motorway A corresponding road sign is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx 10 seconds in situations where RSI detects a sign that involves the end of a speed limit or other speed related informa tion e g end of a motorway Examples of such signs are End of all restrictions End of motorway 1 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market dependent the illustrations in the manual only show a few examples n p a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction displayed where appropriate 04 Driver support 4 04 143 Y 04 Driver support 04 144 Road sign information RSI Following which the sign information is hid den until the next speed related sign is detected Additional signs WW G045222 Examples of additional signs Sometimes different speed limits are signpos ted for the same road an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and or fog for example An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use The speed applicable on an exit is indicated in certain markets by means of an additional sign containing an
47. this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the informa tion display The message text is cleared with the OK button see page 204 or it disap pears automatically after a time time depending on which function is indicated The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols When a service message is shown the symbol and message are cleared using the OK button or disappear automatically after a time Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash Left right hand direction indicators Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used Start Stop The symbol shines when the engine is auto stopped Instruments and controls Warning symbols Low oil pressure Symbol Parking brake applied Parking brake applied alterna tive symbol Airbags SRS Seatbelt reminder Alternator not charging Fault in brake system Warning A For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used Warnings are made via display text see pages 339 and 341 Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine s oil pressure is too low Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level top up if necessary If the symbol illumi nates and the oil level is normal contact a workshop Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work shop
48. 1 984 Com pression ratio 10 0 1 10 0 1 10 0 1 10 5 1 10451 951 SLST 16 0 1 16 5 1 16 571 Adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor mally high oil temperature or oil consumption Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys e towing a caravan or trailer e in mountainous regions e at high speeds O in temperatures colder than 30 C or hotter than 40 C The above also apply to shorter driving dis tances at low temperatures Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions It provides extra protection for the engine Volvo recommends Castrol oil products IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine s service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter vals can be applied Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change otherwise you will risk affecting service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used Volvo recomm
49. 25 cm water could enter the transmission This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems In the event of the engine stalling in water do not try restart tow the car from the water to a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Risk of engine breakdown Engine gearbox and cooling system Under special conditions for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load For information about overheating when driv ing with a trailer see page 310 e Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates e If the temperature in the engine s cooling system is too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and a text message High engine temp Stop safely is shown in the combined instrument panel s information display stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes in order to cool down e lf the text message High engine temp Stop engine or Coolant level low Stop engine is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car e Inthe event of overheating in the gearbox a built in protection function is activated which is indicated by the combined instrument panel with a warning symbol and the text message Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely follow the re
50. 90 km h if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed e g too far back In order for snaking to occur there must be a triggering factor e g e Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind e Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole e Sweeping steering wheel movements Operation If snaking has started it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress This makes the car trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could for example end up in the wrong lane or leave the car riageway TSA system continually monitors car move ments particularly lateral movements If snaking is detected the front wheels are indi vidually braked This serves to stabilise the car trailer combination This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA system comes into action the car trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car trailer combination is once again stable the TSA system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car 314 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Miscellaneous The TSA system can engage within the speed interval 65 to 160 km h ORE TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode see page 140 TSA
51. ABL fault oe ellie au UO m Emissions system ABS fault Indicator and warning symbols digital instrument l I Indicator and warning symbols analogue instru pa o ment panel 1 Indicator symbols Rear fog lamp on Indicator symbols aD y 2 Indicator and warning symbols Stability system 2 Indicator and warning symbols Warning symbols warning symbols Stability system sport mode Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols illuminate Engine preheater diesel in key position Il or when the engine is started When the engine has started all the SR symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol which only goes out when the brake is disengaged IN Information read display text If the engine does not start or if the function ality check is carried out in key position Il EN Main beam On then all symbols go out within 5 seconds 8 For certain engine variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used Warnings are made via display text For information on checking the oil level see page 339 gt gt a UY 03 Your driving environment 03 a Instruments and controls Left hand direction indicator Right hand direction indicator Start Stop the engine auto stopped see page 125 ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function Active Bending Lights Emissions system If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to a fault in the car s emissions syst
52. DAB mode under DAB menu gt Reset all FM settings supports DAB DAB and DMB Ensemble learn Programming can also take place as follows 06 Volume control programme types NEWS or TP are heard at the volume Coverage for DAB is not available in all gt Ensemble learn is shown in the list of locations If there is no coverage then the selected for each respective programme message No reception is shown in the available channel groups type If the volume level is adjusted during the display screen 2 Press OK MENU programme interruption the new level is saved until the next programme interruption gt New programming is started Programming can be cancelled with EXIT Scan wavelength The function automatically searches for avail able channels and takes into account any programme type filtering When a station is Option accessory for more information see Introduction 263 06 Infotainment system 06 Navigation in channel group list Ensemble To navigate in and access the channel group list turn TUNE The name of the Ensemble is shown in the upper part of the TV screen When switching to the new Ensemble the name changes to the new one e Service Shows channels irrespective of the channel group to which they are allo cated The list can also be filtered using the selection of programme type PTY filtering see below Scanning The function automatically searches the cur rent wavelength for st
53. IMPORTANT Important texts appear if there is a risk of damage NOTE texts give advice or tips that facili tate the use of features and functions for example Footnote There is footnote information in the owner s manual that is located at the bottom of the page This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number If the foot note refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral Message texts Text messages can be shown in the com bined instrument panel and in the screen Option accessory for more information see Introduction These text messages are highlighted in the owner s manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey Examples of this are in menu texts and message texts in the screen e g Audio settings Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner The decals in the car have the following descend ing degree of importance for the warning information Warning for personal injury A G031590 Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field white text image on black message field Used to indicate the presence of danger Introduction Important information which if the warning is ignored may result in serious personal injury or fatality Risk of property damage O A D re co o 0 White ISO symbols and white t
54. Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The auto function is activated when the lamp in the AUTO button is lit Option accessory for more information see Introduction The passenger compartment lighting is then switched on and off as indicated below The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if e the caris unlocked with the remote con trol key or key blade see pages 46 or 49 e the engine has been switched off and the car s electrical system is in key position 0 Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when e the engine is started e the car is locked The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed It remains switched on for two minutes if one of the doors is open If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after two minutes Mood lights When the normal passenger compartment lighting is switched off and the engine is run ning an LED illuminates in the front and rear roof console respectively in order to provide a low light and enhance the ambience while 03 Your driving environment E Lighting driving The light also makes it easier to see objects in the storage compartments etc when
55. PTY is activated Deactivation of the PTY function is performed in FM mode under FM menu gt Advanced settings gt PTY settings Receive traffic bulletins from other networks Selected programme types PTY are not reset Resetting and removing PTY are performed under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings gt Select PTY gt Clear all PTY search This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type 1 In FM mode select one or more PTY under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings Select PTY 2 Go to FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings Seek PTY To finish searching press EXIT To continue searching for another broad cast of the selected programme types press on ERI or ESS Display of programme type The programme type of the current station can be shown on the TV screen Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Advanced settings gt PTY settings Show PTY text Radio text Some RDS stations transmit information on programme content artists etc This informa tion can be shown on the TV screen Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu Show radio text Automatic frequency update AF The function selects the strongest transmitter for the set station In order to find a strong transmitter the function may in exceptional cases need to search the entire FM wave length 06 Infotainment system Activate deactivat
56. Phone book gt New contact There is no text wheel for High Perform ance so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters only the digit and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this 06 Infotainment system Bluetooth handsfree 1 When the Name row is selected press When all details have been filled in select Speed dial numbers OK MENU to reach the input mode illus Save contact in the menu to save the con tration above tact 2 Turn TUNE to the desired letter press OK MENU to confirm The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used More 3 Continue with the next letter and so on The name entered is shown in the input field 2 in the TV screen OK 4 To change the input mode to numbers 123 ABC Change between letters and numbers with OK MENU Change to special characters with OK MENU Save and go back to Add contact with OK MENU Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers under Phone menu Phone book gt Speed dial Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per formed in phone mode using the number keys on the keypad in the centre console by pressing a number key and then pressing OK MENU If there is no contact stored on the speed dial number then an option is shown to save a contact to the selected speed dial number special characters change between alA Change between uppercase uppercase lowercas
57. QD Infotainment Seat heating rear left 15 E Internal relay coil 5 Aa Trailer socket 1 40 m 12 Audio control unit amplifier 5 27 Rear window defroster 30 43 14 Telematics Bluetooth 5 As BLIS 5 45 15 Audio Infotainment control unit 15 30 Parking assistance 5 46 16 Digital radio TV 10 31 Parking camera 5 17 12 V socket cargo area 15 32 19 34 Seat heating driver s side 15 20 35 Seat heating passenger side 15 zB T a PE Trailer socket 2 20 38 24 Primary fuse for fuses 12 16 40 39 Seat heating rear right 15 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 367 Q 09 Maintenance and service 09 Car care Washing the car Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator Use car shampoo e Remove bird droppings from the paint work as soon as possible Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discol our paintwork very quickly An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration e Hose down the underbody e Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing Do not spray directly onto the locks e f necessary use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces Note that in this case the surfaces must not be hot from the sun e Wash using a sponge car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water
58. Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans fers power from the driving wheel that is spin ning to the one that is not Engine drag control EDC EDC Engine Drag Control prevents involun tary wheel locking e g after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gears on slippery road surfaces Involuntary wheel locking while driving can amongst other things impair the driver s abil ity to steer the car Corner Traction Control CTC CTC compensates for understeer and allows higher than normal acceleration in a bend without wheelspin on the inner wheel e g on an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed Driver Steering Recommendation DSR DSR Driver Steering Recommendation helps the driver steer the car in the right direction when there is reduced traction or when the ABS system engages The primary role of the DSR function is to help the driver steer in the right direction when the car is skidding DSR engages by applying slight torque to the steering wheel in the direction in which the y Option accessory for more information see Introduction car should be steered to maintain achieve maximum possible traction and stabilise the car Trailer Stability Assist TSA The function serves to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake see page 309 ORCE The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode
59. a potentially imminent collision The collision warning system detects pedes trians stationary vehicles as well as vehicles driving in the same direction in front of the Car If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or a vehicle the driver s attention is attracted with a flashing red warning signal no 1 in the illustration on page 170 and an acoustic signal 2 Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake sup port is activated This means that the brake system is prepared for fast braking by applying the brakes gently which may be experienced as a slight jerk If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is imple mented 2 With system Level 2 only Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection Brake support also reinforces the driver s braking if the system considers that the brak ing is not sufficient to avoid a collision 3 Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic brak ing function is deployed this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision The collision warning s
60. air quality system For a l tion is always deactivated oo Orire ed ae ment has its function temporarily reduced page 208 e g Climate control air conditioning and fan Air quality system speed For more information see page 125 The air quality system IAQS separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and contaminants in the passenger compart The air quality sensor must always be ena ment If the outside air is contaminated then bled to ensure the best air in the passen the air intake is closed and the air is recircula ger compartment ted In acold climate automatic recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting Air distribution table gt A large amount of hot air to remove ice and Air to the floor and win to ensure comfortable flows to the windows misting quickly dows Some air flows conditions and good from the dashboard air demisting in cold or vents humid weather Air to windscreen via to prevent misting and Air to floor and from in sunny weather with defroster vent and side icing in a cold and dashboard air vents cool outside tempera windows Some air flows humid climate not at tures from the air vents too low fan speed to enable this 2 a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Climate control 05 Comfort and driving pleasure O E ritos ue Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents Airflow to the head and chest fr
61. area when you turn TUNE see the sec tion Station list page 259 When the sta tion list is shown press the yiyfo button in the centre console to change to manual tun ing This allows you to select a frequency from the list of all available radio frequencies in the selected wavelength In other words if turn TUNE one step in a manual search the frequency is changed from e g 93 3 to 93 4 MHz etc To manually select a station 1 Press the RADIO button turn TUNE until the required frequency band AM FM1 etc is displayed press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to select a frequency The preset from the factory is that the radio automatically searches for the sta tions in the area where you are driving see previous section Station list above But if you have changed over to manual tuning by pressing the info button in the centre console when the station list was shown then the radio remains set in the function for manual tuning the next time you switch on the radio To change back to the function for Station list turn TUNE one step to show the complete list of sta tions and press the button ineo Note that if you press fo when the sta tion list is not shown then INFO is acti vated For more information on this func tion see page 249 Preset 10 presets can be stored per wavelength AM FM1 etc The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons il Tune into a station see T
62. automatic gearbox 2 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position 3 The battery for starting is described in detail on page 356 1 Starter battery 2 Support battery The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal battery that is used for starting A workshop should be con tacted in the event of questions or problems an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended 09 Maintenance and service QD Q 09 Maintenance and service Battery 09 IMPORTANT If the following instruction is not observed then the Start Stop function may tempo rarily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger e The negative battery terminal on the car s main battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point See the section Start assistance for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached If the battery has become so discharged that everything is black and in principle the car does not have all the normal elec trical functions and the engine is subse quently started using an external battery or battery charger then the Start Stop func tion will be activated It will then be possi ble for the engine to be auto stopped but in the event of an auto stop the Start Stop function may fail to auto start the engine due to inadequate capacity
63. behind the foam block not above Version 2 The belt must be in the fork on the rear part of the foam block Overview Sealing punctured tyres G047539 ab Label maximum permitted speed Switch Cable O Bottle holder orange cap G047540 E Protective cap O Pressure reducing valve For information on the function of the parts see preceding illustration zZ Air hose l 1 Detach the label for maximum permitted 8 Sealing fluid bottle speed which is fitted on one side of the compressor and affix it to the steering Pressure gauge wheel 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres Emergency puncture repair TMK 08 331 08 Wheels and tyres 08 332 Emergency puncture repair TMK You should not drive faster than 80 km h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for Do not unscrew the bottle it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage inspection of the sealed tyre maximum 5 Unscrew the wheel s dust cap and screw driving distance is 200 km The staff there in the air hose valve connection to the can determine whether or not the tyre can bottom of the thread on the tyre s air be repaired or if it needs to be replaced valve 6 Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and start the car Do not leave children in the car without supervision w
64. blocked against opening from the outside To return to position A the inner door handle must be opened 02 Locks and alarm The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock button on the remote control key or with the central locking button on the driver s door A door s lock reset only locks that par ticular door not all doors simultane ously A manually locked rear door with an activated manual child safety lock can not be opened from either the outside or the inside see page 62 A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button From the inside Central locking Central locking All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or unlocked simultaneously using the central locking button on the driver s door Press one side of the button to lock the other side to unlock Lamp in lock button When the lamp in the central locking button for the driver s door is illuminated it means that all doors are locked Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways Press the central locking button Tall Locking unlocking Press and hold at least 4 seconds to also open all the side windows simultaneously e Pull the door handle and open the door the door is unlocked and opened in one operation Locking e Both front doors must be closed for the central locking to be activated Press the central lo
65. can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1 5 horizontal lines the more lines the longer the time interval One line corre sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front 5 lines approximately 3 seconds To set change the time interval e Turn the steering wheel button set s thumbwheel or use the gt buttons for cars without Speed limiters At low speed when the distances are short the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support fA Adaptive cruise control 04 153 Y 04 Driver support Adaptive cruise control The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise The same symbol is also shown when Dis tance Warning is activated see page 161 04 Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations If Cruise Control does not appear to react when activated this may be because the time distance to the car in front is prevent ing an increase in speed The higher the speed the longer the calcu lated distance in metres for a given time interval Temporary deactivation s
66. car is driven at low speed the consumption is shown per time unit at a higher speed it is shown related to mileage There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel driven heater has been used i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 237 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Trip computer Different units km miles can be selected for the display see the heading Change unit page 238 Range distance to empty tank The trip computer shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank No guaranteed range remains when the head ing Distance to empty shows e In which case refuel as soon as possible The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity OLA There may be a slight error in the reading if the driving style has been changed An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance For more informa tion on how fuel consumption can be influ enced see page 10 05 Digital speed display The speed is shown in the opposite unit kmh mph in relation to the main instrument If it is calibrated in mph then the trip com 2 Only for combined instrument panel Digital puter shows the corresponding speed in km h and vice versa Resetting with Analog Trip meter and Average speed With current trip computer heading Trip meter T1
67. carried out at an authorised Volvo work shop Volvo uses different systems for warning of low high oil level or low high oil pressure Certain variants have an oil pressure sensor Q 09 Maintenance and service 09 Engine compartment and then the combined instrument panel s warning symbol for low oil pressure is used Other variants have an oil level sensor when the driver is informed via the instrument s warning symbol Al and display texts Certain variants have both systems Contact a Volvo dealer for more information Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord ance with the intervals specified in the Serv ice and Warranty Booklet N o N e A o 0 Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted If the car is driven in adverse con The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX ditions Volvo recommends using an oil of a Dipstick and filler pipe marks dd Checking the oil level in a new car is espe Measurement and filling if required For capacities see page 384 and onwards cially important before the first scheduled oil 1 Ensure that the car is level After switch change ing off the engine it is important to wait 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back Volvo recommends checking the oil level to the sump every 2 500 km The most accurate measure ments are made on a cold engine before star 2 Pull up and wipe the dipstick ting The measurement will be inaccurate if 3 Re insert
68. control panel in the centre console can be used to find a filename in the current folder The search function is accessed either by turning TUNE to access the folder structure or by pressing one of the letter keys As a let ter or character in a search string is entered you get closer to your search target Start playback of a file by pressing OK MENU 3 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 4 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place 5 Only applies to USB 6 Does not apply to iPod Repeat folder See page 268 Pause When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE is pressed the media player is paused When the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed again the media player starts It is also possi ble to pause via the menu system press OK MENU select Play Pause Audio sources USB memory To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick only store music files on it It takes a lot longer for the system to load storage media that contains anything other than compatible music files g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system External audio source via AUX USB input 06 gt gt 201 06 Infotainment system External audio source via AUX USB input 06 212 The system supports mobile media com pliant with USB 2 0 and the FAT32 file sys tem and can handle 1000 folders with a maximum of 254 subfolders fi
69. detachable attachment mm 312 detachable removal ascese 313 Towbar see Towing equipment 310 PONING a 315 TOWING CY SA 316 TOWING Capac vaccesssenescsansdnocessseguamncstancas 379 TOWING GQUIPMCM wicvsicersiiiasicdonimmmecivntiasion 310 SDECHICAUONS ies sasceatiescunaisaxcecetanccevcedee 311 TOWING CY 6 esioaiccincaniicinn csi 316 TANG AAPP IEA E A A AN 309 ela Ae a 309 driving with a trailer 309 SHAKIN PA En 314 Trailer stability assist o ccninnccnnnnn 140 Trailer Stability ASSiSt oooccoononnccnnnciconocos 314 11 Alphabetical Index TRAN SHUS SIOM sacan 118 U low oil Press O saccianacinscdiids 17 Mc A 104 parking brake appli8d o ooooooooo0 11 Unlocking seatbelt reminder oocccconnncccnoncnncconannos T7 i eii n aateatelstemrardaazeat ia from the inSid6 ccccconnncccononnonccnnnonnnnons 57 WENO eee eee ee calco T7 Trip meter a a a a 78 from the outside o e ed 56 Warning sound Trip meter resetting 234 237 238 USB CONNec HO Nisicncaiad acido 270 collision warning SySteM 172 11 Troubleshooting Warning symbol airbag system 19 ae ini ias ne Warning SYIMDONS sica cccorccinacsaicmeninds enanas 75 ARI a il V Warning Hand Bacorsicanccar inicie 329 OO ee ceca ee a 96 243 Washer fluid filling ccccscccccsseccccsececosseceeee 353 WW APP A A 289 Ventana 216 Washers T t trol k i ER E E E Vibration CAMPEL
70. detected obstacle The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle in front of or behind the car Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically 04 Driver support UN Park assist syst When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is Rear parking assistance Front parking assistance constant and the active sensor s field nearest the car is filled in If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both behind and in front of the car then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers IMPORTANT Objects e g chains thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the signal shadow and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors the pulsating tone may then i Eii I I I I I I unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone 04 CARRELLI F G046147 G046148 The distance covered to the rear of the car is The distance covered in front of the car is The sensors cannot detect high objects about 1 5 metres The acoustic signal for about 0 8 metres The acoustic signal for such as projecting loading docks obstacles behind comes from one of the rear obstacles in front comes from one of the front e In such situations pay extra attention loudspeakers loudspeakers and manoeuvre reposition the car par Rear parking assistance is activated when Front park assist is active up to ticularly slowly or stop the current reverse gear is engage
71. device To change to another device 1 Check that the external device is search able visible via Bluetooth see the man ual for the external device 2 Press TEL and then select Change phone gt The car searches for previously con nected devices The external devices detected are specified with their respective Bluetooth name in the TV screen 3 Select the device to be connected by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU 278 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction gt Connection of the external device takes place To call 1 Make sure that the Fa symbol appears at the top of the TV screen and that the handsfree function is in phone mode 2 Dial either the desired number or speed dial number see page 283 Or in normal view turn TUNE to the right to access the phone book and to the left for the call register for all calls For information on the phone book see page 280 3 Press OK MENU The call is interrupted with EXIT Disconnecting the mobile phone Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio sys tem s range The connection to the mobile phone can be manually broken in phone mode under Phone menu Disconnect phone For more information on connection see page 277 The handsfree function is deactivated when the engine is switched off and the door is opened When the mobile phone has been discon nected an ongoing call can be cont
72. e Acknowledge the message by briefly pressing the indicator stalk OK button Group menus The trip computer has two different group menus 1 For information on key positions see page 81 e Functions e Heading in combined instrument panel The trip computer s functions or headings are each listed in an infinite loop Combined instrument panel Analog a 00 0 140 6977 i BO Bo A r 200 2207 2405 260 gt a Information display and controls OK Opens the loop with the trip com puter s functions Activates the selected option 2 Thumbwheel Opens the loop with the trip computer s headings Scrolls through the options RESET Undoes zeroes or backs out of a function after making a selection Functions Proceed as follows to open and check adjust functions 1 To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence Reset them first with 2 presses on RESET Press OK the loop with all functions opens 3 Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select confirm with OK 4 Finish by pressing RESET twice after completed checking adjustment The different functions of the trip computer are listed in the following table 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Trip computer Digital speed Shows the car s speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel km h e Open with OK select with the thumbwheel confirm with OK and back out with ENTER
73. e Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo e Dry the car using a clean soft chamois or a water scraper If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out WARNING Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot IMPORTANT Dirty headlamps have impaired functional ity Clean them regularly when refuelling for example Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non scratching sponge instead Outside lighting such as headlamps fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens This is normal all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time Cleaning the wiper blades Asphalt dust and salt residue on wiper blades as well as insects ice etc on the windscreen impair the service life of wiper blades For cleaning Set the wiper blades in service position see page 352 Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo Do not use any strong solvents Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car but it cannot reach everywhere Handwashing the car is recom mended for achieving optimum results
74. favourable conditions it may also be able to detect smaller objects such as cyclists and pedestrians CTA is only active during reversing and is activated automatically when reverse is selected at the gearbox e f CTA detects something approaching from the side an acoustic warning signal sounds The signal comes from either the left or the right speaker depending on which direction the approaching object is coming from e CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS lamps e An additional warning is provided in the form of an illuminated icon in the screen s PAS graphics see page 186 Limitations CTA does not perform optimally in all situa tions but has a certain limitation for exam ple the CTA sensors cannot see through other parked vehicles or obstructing objects Here are some examples of when CTA s field of vision may be limited from the beginning and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close y Option accessory for more information see Introduction G047829 The car is parked deep inside a parking slot ap Blind CTA sector 2 Sector where CTA can detect see G047830 In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely blind on one side However when the driver is slowly reversing the car the angle is changed in relation to the vehicle object that is blocking at which the blind sector rapidly decreases Examples of further limitations e Dirt
75. for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo For information on the use of Volvo s recommended temporary emergency puncture repair TMK see page 330 Electrical socket in cargo area For more information see page 306 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure PT N General information A 5 cccceenccecssccsescaeasaedaacecsenvesntonsonwawe 248 AO cd ecm A 259 METE E EA AA AA 266 External audio source via AUX USB iNpPUt occccccccccccccccncnocccononcncnnnnnnnns 270 MESE ci E cc ccsccccceccseseusnecuaesessneceseavsncereveuansoutseeesesesseas 23 a A A 276 VOICE recognition mobile phone rn 285 AA e a a A 289 FRREMOLE coniro reg Pieler a r aoe eet get oat 292 246 Option accessory for more information see Introduction INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM O 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment is to avoid discharging the battery unnec essarily General The Infotainment system consists of a radio Remove the remote control key from the media player TV and the option to commu ignition switch if the infotainment system is nicate with a mobile phone Information is used when the engine is switched off This AUDYSSEY presented on a 5 or 7 inch screen in the upper section of the centre console Func tions can be controlled via buttons in the steering wheel the centre console below the D
76. gear selector to another posi tion Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position P To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position Il see page 81 Shiftlock Neutral N If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 sec onds irrespective of whether the engine is running then the gear selector is locked 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment E 03 gt gt 121 E 03 Your driving environment 03 122 Gearboxes To be able to move the gear selector from N to other gear positions the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position Il see page 81 Move the gear selector from the P posi tion and release the button 4 Refit the storage compartment insert Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor Automatic gearbox Powershift r E a a positions S Sport mode If the car cannot be driven e g due to a flat battery the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits the motive force from the engine to the drive wheels with double mechanical clutch discs as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses a conventional hydraulic torque converter Lift out the contoure
77. glass around the selected speed for a second or so and its marking 6 changes from WHITE to GREEN Cal When this symbol changes colour from WHITE to GREEN the cruise control is active and the car main tains the stored speed Only when the symbol shows a picture of another vehicle is the distance to the vehicle in front controlled by the cruise control At the same time a speed range is marked e the higher speed with GREEN marking 6 is the preprogrammed speed e the lower speed is the speed of the car in front Changing the speed To change the stored speed Adjust with short presses on or every press gives 5 km h The last presses made are stored in the memory If speed is increased using the accelera tor pedal prior to pressing the but ton then it is the car s current speed when the button is pressed that is stored in the cruise control To adjust 1 km h e Hold down the button and release it at the required speed If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated To be able to reactivate Cruise Control the car must be stopped and the engine restarted In certain situations cruise control cannot be activated In this case the combined instrument panel shows Cruise control Unavailable see page 159 Set time interval Different time intervals to the vehicle in front
78. h without a vehicle in front within the activation distance approx 30 metres Option accessory for more information see Introduction General Distance Warning Distance Alert is a func tion that informs the driver about the time interval to vehicles in front Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km h and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car in the same direction No dis tance information is provided for oncoming slow or stationary vehicles G046141 An orange warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the dis tance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval NOTE Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active WARNING Distance warning only reacts if the dis tance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value the speed of the driver s vehicle is not affected Operation Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model Distance Warning Some combinations of the selected equip ment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console in which case the func tion is handled by the car s menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings gt Distance Alert For a description of the menu s
79. handle a Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis Light conditions played for the driver O IMPORTANT The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions Because of this the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality Poor light condi tions can result in a slightly reduced image quality The lines on the screen are projected as if Remember that the display only shows the area behind the car so pay attention to they were at ground level behind the car and the sides and front of the car when turning are directly related to steering wheel move the steering while reversing ment which shows the driver the path the car will take when it turns Keep the camera lens clear of dirt snow and ice to ensure optimum function This is particularly important in poor light 190 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Boundary lines G046314 Different lines in the system ap Boundary line free reversing zone Wheel tracks The dashed line 1 frames in a zone up to about 1 5 m back from the bumper It is also the limit of the car s most protruding parts such as door mirrors and corners also dur ing turning The wide wheel tracks 2 between the side lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can extend about 3 2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way Cars with reversing sensors Y Coloured areas x 4 one per s
80. handsfree function has integrated ring signals that can be selected in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone settings gt Sounds and volume Ring signals Ring signal 1 etc For some mobile phones the ringtone on the phone connected will not be switched off when one of the inbuilt signals for the handsfree system is used In order to select the connected phone s ring signal go in phone mode to Phone menu gt Phone settings Sounds and volume 3 Not supported by all mobile phones gt Ring signals gt Mobile phone ring signal Phone book There are two phone books These are merged into one in the car and are displayed as a single phone book in the car e The car downloads the mobile phone s phone book and only displays this phone book when the mobile phone from which this phone book was downloaded is con nected e The car also has a built in phone book This contains all the contacts stored in the car irrespective of which phone was connected when saving them These con tacts are visible for all users regardless of the mobile phone that is connected to the car If a contact is saved in the car then the symbol PJ is shown in front of the contact in the phone book y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Changes made from the car to a record in the mobile phone s telephone book will result in a new record in the car s tele phone book i e changes will not be saved to the
81. if the car was driven from Germany to France A new selection of country and a new search may then need to be carried out Searching TV channels Preset list 1 Press TV mode on OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to Select country and press OK MENU gt If one or more countries have previ ously been selected then they are shown in a list 4 Turn TUNE to either Other countries or one of the previously selected countries Press OK MENU gt A list of all available countries is shown 5 Turn TUNE to the desired country e g Sweden and press OK MENU gt An automatic scan for available TV channels starts this scan takes a little while During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a preset is shown When the scan is complete a message is shown and the picture is shown A preset list max 30 presets has now been created and is available To change channel see page 289 The scan and preset storage can be cancel led with EXIT 290 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Channel management The preset list can be edited You can change the order of the channels that are shown in the preset list A TV channel can have more than one place in the preset list The TV chan nel positions can also vary in the preset list To change the order in the preset list go in TV mode to TV menu Reorganise presets 1 Turn TUNE to the channe
82. ih without first deactivating the deadlocks in the deadlocks function can be temporarily gt e NER Ime the engine IS Startea the order to avoid the risk of anyone being switched off This is carried out as follows Ar zero are e COM locked in bined instrument panel shows the 1 Access the menu system MY CAR under message Locks and alarm Full Settings gt Car settings gt Reduced guard at which the deadlocks function Guard for a detailed description of the and the alarm s movement and tilt menu system see page 207 detectors are re engaged 1 Only in combination with alarm 2 a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm Locking unlocking If the locking system shall not be changed Press EXIT and lock the car 02 Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered 02 Locks and alarm Child safety locks 1 Start the engine or choose a key position higher than 0 2 Press the button in the driver s door con Manual blocking of the rear doors The child safety locks prevent children from a e Adoor s knob control only blocks that opening a rear door from the inside particular door not both rear doors simultaneously trol panel gt The information display shows the 02 Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock mess
83. in the combined instrument panel and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown in the information display Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating temperature preferably on a main road or motorway The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more The following may arise during regenera tion a smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily fuel consumption may increase tem porarily a smell of burning may arise When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Use the parking heater in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly IMPORTANT If the filter is completely filled with parti cles it may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non functional Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced Fuel consumption and emissions of carbon dioxide Fuel consumption figures may change if the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects the car s weight See information on weights page 379 and table page 387 The manner in which the car is driven and other non technical factors can also affect fuel consumption Consumption is higher and power output lower for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON Extreme weather conditions driving with a traile
84. it is dark outside Light intensity can be changed in the MY CAR menu system under Settings gt Car settings gt Light settings gt Interior light gt Ambient light Select from Off Low and High This lighting extin guishes when the engine is switched off The colour of the light can be also set in the MY CAR menu system under Settings gt Car settings Light settings Interior light Ambient light colours If you select Temperature the colour shifts between warm white and cold white depending on the temperature in the car or you can choose between different colour themes The availa ble colour themes are Frosty White Toscana White Ember Gold Red Sunset Rainforest Glacier Blue and Violet Purple For more information on the MY CAR menu system see page 209 Home safe light duration Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked 1 Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch 2 Move the left hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash see page 91 3 Get out of the car and lock the door When the function is activated dipped beam parking lamps door mirror lamps number plate lighting interior roof lighting and floor lighting are switched on The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on c
85. just watched continues to be shown Scan ning does not affect the preset list Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu Scan Teletext It is possible to read Teletext Follow these steps 1 Press the button on the remote control 2 Enter the page number 3 digits with the number keys 0 9 to select page gt The page is shown automatically Enter new page number or press the remote control buttons 4 P to go to the next page Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing the button on the remote control It is also possible to control the teletext with the coloured buttons on the remote control Information about the current programme Press the INFO button in order to display the information about the current programme the next programme and its start time If the INFO button is pressed once more then addi tional information on the current programme can sometimes be displayed such as start and end times and a brief description of the current programme For more information on the INFO button see page 249 TV To return to the TV picture wait several sec onds or press EXIT Picture settings The settings for brightness and contrast can be adjusted For more information see page 269 The reception is lost If the reception for the TV channel that is being shown disappears then the picture will freeze Shortly after this a message appears informing that the reception has been lost
86. longer periods Pay attention to local regula tions Drive economically think ahead Perform service and maintenance in accordance with the owner s manual s instructions follow the Service and War ranty Booklet s recommended intervals e If the car is equipped with an engine block heater use it before starting from cold it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating tem perature more quickly which lowers con sumption and reduces emissions e High speed increases consumption con siderably due to increased wind resis tance a doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times e Always dispose of environmentally hazar dous waste such as batteries and oils in an environmentally safe manner Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded an authorised Volvo work shop is recommended Following this advice can save money the planet s resources are saved and the car s durability is extended For more information and further advice see the pages 296 and 387 Recycling As a part of Volvo s environmental work it is important that the car is recycled in an envi ronmentally sound manner Almost all of the car can be recycled The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified approved recycling facility The owner s manual and the environment The For
87. making a further attempt Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car and make sure that the key position is O in particular if there are children in the car For information on how this works see page 81 1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START STOP ENGINE button to start the car The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal oper ating temperature as quickly as possible which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment Keyless drive Follow steps 2 3 for starting petrol and diesel engines For more information on Keyless drive see page 52 A prerequisite for the engine to start is that one of the car s remote control keys with the Keyless drive function is in the passen ger compartment or cargo area WARNING Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing Stop the engine To switch off the engine 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment E Starting the engine 03 1S UY 03 Your driving environment Starting the engine e Press START STOP ENGINE the engine stops e If the car has an automatic gearbox and the gear selector is not i
88. may fail to engage if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa tion the TSA system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking The DSTC symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes when the TSA system is working 07 During your journey Towing and recovery Towing WARNING Automatic gearbox Powershift Find out the statutory maximum speed limit E Da Oe The model with Powershift transmission pr ea nna workmen theetgre wanes ststhe o not be towed Ls dependent on h 1 Unlock the steering lock by inserting the brake pedal needs to be depressed 9 9 remate conirol key mine ioniiion switch about 5 times more heavily and the steer lubrication If towing still has to take place and giving a long press on the START ing is considerably heavier than normal the route must be as short as possible and th ith l STOP ENGINE button key position II is en with very low speed activated see page 81 for more informa Manual gearbox In the event of uncertainty as to whether or tion on key positions Prior to towing not the car is equipped with Powershift trans e mission this can be verified by checking the 2 The remote control key must remain in Move gear lever into neutral and release designation on the transmission s label under the ignition switch while the car is being the parking brake the bonnet see page 376 The designa ro
89. may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision Do not expose the remote control to direct sunlight e g on the instrument panel otherwise problems may arise with the batteries 292 Option accessory for more information see Introduction R F Front TV screen NAV Change to navigation Change to radio source AM RADIO FM1 etc MEDIA Change to media source Disc TV etc TEL Change to Bluetooth hands free 144 Scroll fast rewind change track song Pi Play pause e Stop gt gt Scroll fast forward change track song DVD Menu MENU EXIT To previous cancels function Ne deletes input characters 06 Infotainment system Remote control Navigate up down O Subtitles selection of language gt for text a Navigate rightleft E Teletext On Off OK Confirm selection or go to the FEW Se Som Ys slats Replacing the battery in the remote es control s q Volume decrease Volume increase Battery life is normally 1 4 years and 1 Push down the catch on the battery cover depends on how much the remote control and slide the battery cover in the direc is used i i 0 9 Preset channels number and ae ton Or Me mirarea tens letter input 2 Remove the used batteries turn the new The remote control is powered by four batter batteries in accordance with the symbols FAV Shortcuts for favourite setting ies of the AA LR6 type in the battery compartment an
90. next to the desired maximum speed Temporary deactivation standby mode To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode Press 0 gt The combined instrument panel s mark 5 changes colour from GREEN to WHITE Digital or from WHITE to GREY Analogue and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed The speed limiter is reactivated with one press on D The mark 5 then changes colour from WHITE to GREEN Digital or GREY to WHITE Analogue and the car s maximum speed is lim ited again Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be set in standby mode with the accelerator pedal e g for rap idly accelerating the car out of a situation Depress the accelerator pedal fully gt The combined instrument panel shows the stored maximum speed with a col oured mark 5 and the driver can tem porarily exceed the set maximum speed the mark 5 changes colour from GREEN to WHITE Digital or WHITE to GREY Analogue during that time The speed limiter is automatically reac tivated after the accelerator pedal is released and the car s speed is slowed down to below the selected stored maximum speed the mark 5 changes colour from WHITE to GREEN Digital or GREY to WHITE Analogue and the car s maximum speed is again limited Alarm for speed exceeded On steep roads the engine braking effect may be inadequate
91. not play with the controls Check that there are no objects in front of behind or under the seat during adjustment Ensure that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped Heated seats For heated seats see page 219 Rear seats Head restraint centre seat rear a da as o E Ko o 10 03 Your driving environment E 03 85 UY 03 Your driving environment 03 86 Adjust the head restraint according to pas senger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible Slide it up as required To lower the head restraint again the button see illustration must be pressed while the restraint is carefully moved down The head restraint can be adjusted in five dif ferent positions NOTE Do not sit in the centre seat with the head restraint in fully lowered position Manual lowering of the outer head restraints rear seat Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward The head restraint is moved back manually The head restraint must be in locked posi tion after being folded up Lowering the rear seat backrest IMPORTANT When the backrest is to be folded the rear seat cup holder must not be open and there must be no objects in the rear seat Nor may the seat belts be connected Oth erwise there is a risk of damage to the rear seat upholstery The two section backrest can be fold
92. of driving the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes 1 When the indicator lamp 6 is green the without a new breath test Alcolock is ready for use 2 Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction To bear in mind Before the breath test In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible e Avoid eating or drinking approx 5 minutes before the breath test e Avoid excess windscreen washing the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result Change of driver In order to ensure that a new breath test is carried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch 2 and the send button 8 simultaneously for approx 3 seconds At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine Calibration and service The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop every 12 months 30 days before recalibration is necessary the combined instrument panel shows the mes sage Alcoguard Calibr required If calibra tion is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked only starting with the Bypass function will 2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended then be possible see page 113 section Emergency situation The me
93. of the sound may deteriorate The audio quality may also be impaired if the player is charged while the infotainment system is in AUX mode In which case avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is pre calibrated for opti mum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing This calibration takes into account loud speakers amplifiers passenger compartment acoustics listener position etc for each com bination of car model and audio system There is a alSo a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control radio reception and vehicle speed The controls explained in these operating instructions e g Bass Treble and Equalizer are only intended for the user to be able to adapt the sound reproduction according to personal taste Menu overview The main sources RADIO MEDIA and TEL contain the following menus For information about menu navigation see page 251 Menus RADIO Main menu AM Show presets 0 260 See footnote Scan 0 263 Audio settings p 253 See footnote Sound stage paoe See footnote Equalizer p 299 See footnote P Volume compensation paoe p 253 Reset all audio settings A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre mium Sound Multimedia B The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources C Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia D Does not apply to Perform
94. on menu navi gation see page 251 and menu overview see page 254 1 Applies to High Performance High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 06 Infotainment system Centre console control panel ap VOL volume MEDIA button Last active source e g iPod is activated automatically If a source is activated and you press MEDIA then a shortcut menu is shown with com monly used menu options Confirm your selection or go to the menu by pressing OK MENU Ed Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 273 06 Infotainment system Media Bluetooth EXIT leads up in the menu system stops the function in progress Short presses are used to scroll between audio files Long presses are used to fast forward and rewind audio files If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 249 For a description of the remote control see page 292 Getting started Connect an external Bluetooth device A maximum of ten external devices can be registered The connection is made in the same way as for the phone see Connect an external Bluetooth device page 277 06 Automatic connection When the Bluetooth function is active and the last e
95. prevent the tailgate from disengag ing from the lock When the boot lid tailgate is unlocked with 2 presses or from the car interior automatic relocking does not take place because the boot lid tailgate is open it must be closed manually After the boot lid tailgate has been closed it is unlocked and the alarm is not armed relock it and re arm the alarm with the remote control key s lock button Opening the car from inside to oO 10 oO To open the tailgate Press the lighting panel button gt The lock releases and the tailgate opens by a few centimetres Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key s button for locking Al see page 46 gt The lock indicator on the instrument panel starts flashing which means that the car is locked and the alarm has been activated Fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is unlocked using the remote control key button The fuel filler flap remains unlocked until the car is locked with the remote control key button If the car is locked during travel or with the interior buttons the fuel filler flap will remain unlocked The fuel filler flap locking logic also follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless drive and the central locking system Fuel filler flap locking always occurs after a 10 minute delay y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 Locks and alarm 8 Locking unlockin
96. rating SS than specified If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rat ing is used it may overheat Spare wheel The spare wheel Temporary spare is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possible The car s handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel The car s ground clearance is affected accord ingly Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle you cannot use snow chains at the same time On all wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be discon nected The spare wheel must not be repaired The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table see page 391 IMPORTANT e Never drive faster than 80 km h with a spare wheel on the car e The car must never be driven fitted with more than one Temporary Spare wheel 08 a Re e tu Taking out the spare wheel The spare wheel plus jack and wheel wrench are stored under the floor in the cargo area 1 Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart ment floor or on models with a jointed luggage compartment floor take hold of the luggage compartment floor handle lift and move the rear part of the floor for wards 2 Lift out the storage compartment optional extra models with a jointed luggage compartment floor only 3 Lift o
97. rewound at one speed while video files are Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 267 06 Infotainment system 06 268 Media player fast forwarded rewound at several speeds Repeatedly press the buttons to increase the fast forward rewind speed for video files Release the button to return to viewing at normal speed Scan This function plays the first ten seconds of each disc track audio file To scan 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Scan gt The first 10 seconds of each disc track or audio file are played 3 Cancel the scan with EXIT the disc track or audio file being played back will con tinue playing Random This function plays the tracks in random order To listen to the tracks in random order 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Random 3 Press OK MENU to activate deactivate the function 5 Does not apply to DVD video discs 6 Only applies to audio video files on burned discs or USB Disc tracks audio files can be changed by pressing on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Repeat folder This function makes it possible to play files in a folder over and over again When the last file has been played out playback of the first file starts again 1 Press OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to Repeat folder 3 Press OK MENU to activate deactivate the function Playback of DVD video discs Playback When playing back a DVD video disc a disc
98. right hand door mirror The light in the button illumi nates 2 Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre 3 Press the L or R button again The light should no longer be illuminated WARNING The mirror on the driver s side is the wide angle type to provide optimal vision Objects may appear further away than they actually are Storing the position The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the car has been locked with the remote control key When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the mirrors and the driver s seat adopt the stored positions when the driver s door is opened The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Car key memory gt Personal settings in key memory For a description of the menu system see page 208 Angling the door mirror when parking The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when park ing for example Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after about 10 seconds or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for example When reverse gear is
99. s side Starter battery Relay and fuse box Air filter AR The ignition system has very high voltage and output The voltage in the ignition sys tem is highly dangerous The car s electri cal system must always be in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment see page 81 Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car s electrical system is in key position Il or when the engine is hot Checking the engine oil 1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick 5 cyl diesel ol co lo o y x og o bl Volvo recommends Castrol oil products When driving under adverse conditions see page 383 IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine s service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter vals can be applied Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change otherwise you will risk affecting service life starting characteristics fuel consumption and environmental impact Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used Volvo recommends that oil changes are
100. see page 208 The compass is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated When the heated windscreen is deactivated the compass is reactivated Interior rearview mirror G045915 Control for dimming Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting 1 Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment 2 Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen Automatic dimming Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror The control for manual dimming is not available on mir rors with automatic dimming 108 MOI A information see Introduction The rearview mirror contains two sensors one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light The forward facing sensor detects ambient light while the rearward fac ing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind If the sensors are obscured by e g parking permits transponders sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors then the rearview mirror s dimming function is reduced The compass can only be specified for a rearview mirror with automatic dimming see page 110 Glass roof The glass roof is fixed bu
101. see page 249 For a description of the remote control see page 292 An iPod or MP3 player with rechargeable batteries is recharged when the ignition is on or the engine is running if the device is plug ged into the USB connection To connect the audio source 1 Press MEDIA turn TUNE to the required sound source USB iPod or AUX press OK MENU gt If USB is selected then Connect USB is shown in the TV screen 2 Connect your audio source to one of the connections in the centre console s stor age compartment see previous illustra tion The text Reading USB is shown in the TV screen when the system is loading the stor age media s file structure Depending on the file structure and number of files there may be some delay before loading is finished ORE The system supports most iPod models produced in 2005 or later To prevent damage to the USB connec tion this is shut off if the USB connection is short circuited or if a connected USB unit is taking too much power this may happen if the unit connected does not meet the USB standard The USB con nection is reactivated automatically the next time the ignition is turned on unless the fault persists Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu navi gation see page 251 and menu overview see page 254 1 Only applies to the media source connected via the
102. slippery surfaces with a lot of water or slush on the road in heavy rain snow in poor visibility on winding roads or on slip roads The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehicles in front is reduced significantly e if the radar sensor becomes blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e g in heavy rain or slush or if other objects have col lected in front of the radar sensor OL Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean see the Maintenance page 173 e if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi cantly different from your own speed Examples where the cruise control does not work optimally The radar sensor has a limited field of vision In some situations another vehicle is not detected or the detection is made later than expected G044032 ACC field of vision 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detecting vehicles at close distances e g a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front Small vehicles such as motorcycles or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view Fault tracing and action If the combined instrument panel shows the message Radar blocked See manual this means that the radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked and that vehicles in front of
103. support UN Adaptive cruise control WARNING The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter vene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suita ble distance This means that the brakes are released and the car will start to roll the driver must there fore intervene and brake the car himself in order to maintain its position IMPORTANT Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes then the brakes release The driver s attention is drawn to this over several stages with increasing intensity 1 Acoustic alarm pinging and text mes sage 2 A warning lamp in the windscreen also starts to flash 3 Stabbing braking occurs Queue Assist releases the foot brake and is set to standby mode in these situations as well e the driver puts his her foot on the brake pedal e the gear selector is moved to P N or R position e the driver sets the cruise control in standby mode e the parking brake is applied The radar sensor and its limitations The radar sensor is used apart from by Adaptive cruise control by the following functions as well e Collision Warning with Auto Brake see page 170 e Distance Warning see page 161 The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction in the same lane Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to
104. the engine see page 376 T4 B4164T AL na fl A PA adas aa i Tira ca yr 1 E AN C Arn d LAaArFINMANATO Other fluids and lubricants Manual gearbox Volume litres Prescribed transmission fluid B6 1 6 BOT 350M3 M66 1 9 Automatic gearbox Volume litres Prescribed transmission fluid TF 80SD 7 0 AW1 MPS6 ES BOT 341 1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285 1 gt gt 01 10 00 111 10 Specifications Fluids and lubricants Under normal driving conditions the gear box oil does not need to be changed dur ing its service life However it may be nec essary under adverse driving conditions see page 383 Brake fluid Brake system DOT 4 Washer fluid Cars with headlamp washing 55 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point Cars without headlamp washing 32 Fuel 4 cylinder petrol approx 62 Petrol see page 301 5 cylinder petrol 4 cylinder diesel approx 52 Diesel see page 302 5 cylinder diesel approx 60 Compressor oil Air conditioning 0 11 PAG oil Coolant Air conditioning 0 65 kg R134a WARNING The air conditioning system contains pres surised refrigerant R134a This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop 10 Specifications CO emissions and fuel consumption 2 B4164T4 T3 B4164T3 man 158 6 8 105 ARS 124 DS T4 B4164T 164 7 0 109 4 7 129 SS T4A B4164T man 191 8 2 117 5 0 144
105. the engine compartment behind the radiator may start automati cally some after the engine has been switched off ble follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Book let Volvo recommends engaging an author ised Volvo workshop to perform the service Always have the engine cleaned by a and maintenance work Volvo workshops workshop There is a risk of fire if the have the personnel special tools and service NG ls eL literature to guarantee the highest quality of Turn the handle about 20 25 degrees service clockwise You will hear when the catch releases 22 Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet The catch hook is located between the headlamp and grille see illustration WARNING Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed For the Volvo warranty to apply check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet Check regularly Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals e g when refuelling e Coolant The handle for bonnet opening is always on the e Engine oil left hand side e Washer fluid 09 Maintenance and service QD Engine compartment 09 Engine compartment overview The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine variant Coolant expansion tank Filling washer fluid Radiator Engine oil dipstick Filling engine oil Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid located on the driver
106. the foam block in the following order e towing eye funnel torx wrench socket for locking wheel bolts tool for wheel covers e Jack must be cranked to the correct height so that it fits into the foam block s compartment the handle above the foot and down in the groove in the foam block e Socket wrench above the jack If the spare wheel has been used then the punctured wheel can be placed in the plastic bag contained in the package with the gloves Place the foam block back in the storage compartment and tighten the mounting screw to the floor of the storage compartment If the spare wheel has not been used then place the foam block in the spare wheel and place the spare wheel back in the storage compartment and tighten the mounting screw to the floor of the storage compartment 4 Return the detachable towbar IMPORTANT The tools and jack must be stored in the intended location in the car s cargo area when not in use Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres 08 327 08 Tyre pressure Tyre pressure E rd a eT ne pa o Ez o y ES A o 0 The tyre pressure decal on the driver s side door pillar between frame and rear door shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions This is also specified in the tyre pressure table see page 391 e Tyre pressure for the car s recommended tyre dimension
107. the following occurs gt gt O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Menu source MY CAR Steering wheel keypad The keypad may vary depending on audio level see page 248 05 Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up down among the menu options Press the thumbwheel to select tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory EXIT see heading EXIT functions page 207 Search paths Current menu level is shown at the top right of the centre console s screen Search paths to the menu system functions are described in this manual in the following form Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings gt Doors unlock Driver door then all The following is an example of how a function can be accessed and adjusted using the steering wheel keypad 1 Press the centre console button MY CAR 2 Scroll to the desired menu e g Settings with the thumbwheel 1 and then press the thumbwheel a submenu opens 3 Scroll to the desired menu e g Car settings and press the thumbwheel a submenu opens 4 Scroll to Lock settings and press the thumbwheel a new submenu opens 5 Scroll to Doors unlock and press the thumbwheel a submenu of selectable functions opens 6 Choose between the options All doors and Driver door then all and press the thumbwheel a cross is marked in the option s empty box 7 Exit the programming by backing out of the menus incrementally
108. the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front and then switches from main beam to dipped beam The function can also take streetlights into account The lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front 2 When dipped beam is activated Activating deactivating AHB can be activated when the headlamp control s knob is in position EUA j 6 Ea Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO position The function can start while driving in the dark when the car s speed is 20 km h or higher Activate deactivate AHB by moving the left hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing Deac tivation when main beam is on means that the lights are reset directly to dipped beam Car with analogue combined instrument panel 92 Option accessory for more information see Introduction When AHB is activated the symbol illu minates in the instrument s information dis play When main beam has been switched on the D symbol also illuminates in the com bined instrument panel Car with digital combined instrument panel When AHB is activated the symbol turns white in the instrument s information display When main beam is activated the symbol shines blue Manual operation Keep the win
109. towbar is included when the function measures the parking space The camera shows what is behind the car The camera is active approx 5 seconds after WARNING and if something appears from the sides reverse gear has been disengaged or until the e The parking camera is an aid and can The camera shows a wide area behind the car s speed exceeds 10 km h forward or never replace the responsibilities of car and part of the bumper and any towbar 35 km h backward the driver when reversing Objects on the screen may appear to tilt e The camera has blind spots where slightly this is normal obstacles cannot be detected e Be aware of people and animals near the car Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen If another view is active the parking camera system takes over automatically and the Camera image is displayed on the screen Option accessory for more information see Introduction 189 Y 04 Driver support Park assist camera Park assist lines When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car the lines on the display show the route the car will take not the trailer The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car s electrical system The parking camera is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a 04 Volvo genuine trailer cable is used Camera location next to the opening
110. tyres dimensions and pressure OLA 10 All engines tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets Electrical system The car has a voltage regulated AC alterna tor The electrical system is single pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a con ductor Battery Petrol Diesel Petrol Diesel with Start Stop function 10 Specifications Electrical system The battery capacity is dependent upon the equipment level in the vehicle IMPORTANT If the battery is replaced take care to replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and reserve capacity as the original battery see the label on the battery Voltage V Cold start capacity Reserve capacity CCA Cold Cranking Amperes A minutes 12 520 800 100 160 12 700 800 135 160 12 760 185 A Battery type AGM Absorbed Glass Mat must be used in cars with the Start Stop function The battery s container size should be consistent with the original battery s dimensions The battery s height is different depending on size Start Stop For information on batteries in cars with Start Stop see page 356 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 01 10 00 111 393 10 Specifications 01 10 00 111 Type approval aida Er EXA Radar system 10 Lock system standard ening Coun TRC LPDISS 2006 08 EU China Continental een o
111. use IMPORTANT In the event of visible damage to the car s grille or if you suspect that the radar sen sor may be damaged e Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The function may completely or partially disappear or malfunction if the grille the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has loosened The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic weather and road conditions Read the whole of this section for informa tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise control The driver must be familiar 04 with this information before using the adaptive cruise control The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed even when the adaptive cruise con trol is being used Accessories or other objects such as auxil iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 157 ay 04 Driver support 04 158 Adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system The driver must inter vene if the system does not detect a vehi cle in front The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy cles Nor for oncoming slow or stationary vehicles and objects Do not use the adaptive cruise control for example in city traffic in dense traffic at junctions on
112. which spills out could be ignited Switch off the fuel driven auxiliary heater before starting to refuel Check in the combined instrument panel that the heater is switched off The heat symbol is shown when it is operating Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the fuel driven heater a gt a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low the heater will be switched off automatically and a message appears in the display Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator stalk OK button once see page 227 IMPORTANT Repeated use of the heater in combination with short driving distances may cause low charge level in the starter battery this can lead to the heater stopping or never star ting In the worst case engine starting will not be possible The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the starter battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis The heater is used for a maximum of 50 minutes each time 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Engine and passenger compartment heater Symbols and messages When the heater has been activated ttt the heat symbol illuminates in the display Operation
113. with short presses on EXIT 2 or with one long press The procedure is the same as with the centre console s buttons see page 207 OK MENU 2 EXIT 4 and the TUNE knob 8 208 Pe Option accessory for more information see Introduction NAVY PA R VI Y AF iv l VAI The following options are available in menu source MY CAR MY CAR My V40 Trip statistics DRIVe Support systems Settings My V40 Trip statistics DRIVe Support systems Settings Menu source MY CAR My V40 DSTC 2 City Safety 3 Driver Alert 4 Collision Warning 5 Reduced Guard 6 Active Bending Lights Deselect for sport mode Spin control off i G046254 MY CAR 3 My V40 The screen shows a grouping of all of the car s driver support systems these can be activated or deactivated here Trip statistics MY CAR Trip statistics The screen shows the history as a bar chart with average fuel consumption and average speed see page 238 DRIVe MY CAR 3 DRIVe An introduction of Volvo s Start Stop system is presented here as well as recommenda tions for energy saving driving techniques e Start Stop e Eco driving guide For more information see page 125 Driver support system Support systems Collision Warning MEVENEITE Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable Driver Alert Unavailable MY CAR gt Support systems The screen shows a summary of the current status of the car
114. with the option to control a range of the mobile phone s functions remotely The microphone used is located by the driver s sun visor 2 The mobile phone can be operated by its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is connected Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function Volvo recommends that you seek assis tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www volvocars com for information on compatible phones When a mobile phone is connected to the car it is also possible to stream audio files from the phone see page 273 Switch between the main sources TEL and MEDIA to operate each one s functions Menus The menus in TEL are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu navi gation see page 251 and menu overview see page 254 Overview G046370 d i l System overview Mobile phone 2 Microphone Steering wheel keypad O Centre console control panel 1 Applies to High Performance High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Centre console control panel Number and letter buttons Phone functions controls overview p z _ a TEL button activates searches last con nected phone If a phone is already con nected and TEL is pressed a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options for th
115. 000 ABS pump ABS valves Headlamp washers Ventilation fan Primary fuse for fuses 32 36 Electric windscreen right side Electric windscreen left side Parking heater Windscreen wipers Central electronic module refer ence voltage support battery Horn 09 Maintenance and service QD 30 20 40 30 40 40 20 20 ls GO CA 06 AAAA Brake light Headlamp control Internal relay coils 12 V socket tunnel console front Transmission control module Solenoid clutch A C petrol 4 cyl diesel 12 V socket tunnel console rear Climate sensor air intake throt tle motors Engine control module 5 cyl Power seat right 15 15 15 18 10 20 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 361 Q 09 Maintenance and service 362 32 Relay coil in cooling fan relay 10 4 cyl 5 cyl diesel Lambda sonds 4 cyl petrol Mass air flow meter diesel Bypass valve EGR cooling diesel Reg ulator valve fuel flow 5 cyl die sel Regulator valve fuel pres sure 5 cyl diesel Relay coil in cooling fan relay 20 5 cyl petrol Lambda sonds 5 cyl petrol Oil pump automatic gearbox 10 5 cyl Mass air flow sensor petrol EVAP valve 4 cyl pet rol Valves 5 cyl petrol Sole noids 5 cyl petrol Crankcase ventilation heater 5 cyl petrol Control motor turbo 4 cyl die sel Regulator valve fuel flow 4 cyl di
116. 1 06 Infotainment system Bluetooth handsfree Alternative 2 Search for the car with the Bluetooth function of the external device 1 Make the car searchable visible via Bluetooth Turn TUNE to Phone settings confirm with OK MENU select Discoverable and confirm with OK MENU 2 Select My Volvo Car on the screen of the external device and follow the instruc tions 3 Enter a PIN code in the external device and then select to connect 4 Press OK MENU and enter the same PIN code via the car keypad in the centre console Once the external device is connected its Bluetooth name appears on the car s TV 06 screen and the unit can be controlled from the car Automatic connection When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is connected automatically If the last con nected mobile phone is not available then the system will try to connect a mobile phone that was paired earlier When the audio sys 2 Only Keyless Drive tem searches for the last phone connected its name is shown in the TV screen Manual connection If you want to change the connected mobile phone go in phone mode to Phone menu gt Change phone Change to another external device It is possible to change a connected device with another device if there are several devi ces in the car However the device must first have been registered to the car see Connect an external Bluetooth
117. 3 Your driving environment Instruments and controls Right hand drive CO Instruments and controls Function Page 6660008060660 oof Wipers and washing Menu navigation audio control phone control Horn airbags Combined instrument panel Cruise control START STOP ENGINE button Ignition switch Screen for infotainment and display of menus Door handle Control panel Hazard warning flash ers Control panel for info tainment system and menu navigation Function Pace 101 102 207 249 251 276 88 19 71 148 150 115 81 248 249 207 5 62 104 106 94 249 251 207 eee el SS 00 Control panel for cli mate control Gear selector Parking brake Menus and messages direction indicators main dipped beam trip computer Steering wheel adjust ment Bonnet opener Light switch opener for tailgate Seat adjustment 218 118 133 204 95 91 232 88 338 89758 84 03 Your driving environment EN The combined instrument panel s information display G045836 Information display analogue instrument panel G047821 Information display digital instrument panel The combined instrument panel s information display shows information on some of the 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 gt gt 71 03 Your driving environment 03 Instruments and controls
118. 4 see Messages and symbols 159 Error messages in BLIS cccccsseeeeeees 201 Error messages in Distance Alert 163 ETC electronic temperature control 219 Expectant mothers seatbelt 17 External GiIMeENSIONS 2 0ceceeeeeeeeees 378 Fault tracing for the camera sensor 166 175 First aid equipment Fluids capacities Fluids and oils head restraint fuel CONSUMPTION ccccceeeeeeeseeseees fuel filler flap locking FSS AAA EE OE 359 OS aN oso setae tena P 359 engine CompartMent cccceseeceeees 360 general ages cxecnicdeamectcscaaipmoctnnanseocvtenecsannes 359 under front right Seat ccceeeeeeeees 366 under glOVeDOX cooocccccooconocconconononnanons 363 6 CEL Ce 118 SS 119 Manual oocncnccncncncncncnnnnnnnnononononnnnnanannnnos 118 Gear selector inhibitor o occo nonnnc 121 Gear selector inhibitor mechanical disen A 122 E A 120 Glass laminated reinforced oocccccccccnncocno 104 Glass roof roller blind 108 Global GO SMING viana 215 MOVED o AMP 243 jojo UNG AAA o E 58 Gross vehicle Wweight occcccccionnncnnncco 379 GSI Gear selector assistance 118 11 Alphabetical Index 2 GD 11 Alphabetical Index HanabraKe morrison E 133 Hazard warning flasherS ooccccconncincncooo 94 Headlamp levelling
119. 5 Manual gear positions Geartronic 120 Max roof GAG sico pis 379 Media Bluetooth ceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 273 media player cea dect castes ceweaceastarcasatmceees 266 Memory function in S ats ceeeseeeeeeeees 84 Menu navigation Infotainment 251 MGMUS TUNCUONMS cascara aaa 209 11 Alphabetical Index 2 2 11 Alphabetical Index Menus and Messages cccooccccccnoconinnncononns 204 Menu system MY CAR cccccsseeeeeeeeees 207 Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control 159 Collision Warning with Auto Drake cra 168 176 Distance Ale ucraniana 163 Driver Alert Control cccccsssseeeees 181 TUU PS 184 Messages in BllS ooocccononnccnnccccnacncnnncnnnnos 201 Messages in the information display 141 Meters fuel CAC AA mA 72 SPCCCOMETENM 0ccccceececeseeeteeeeeneeeeees 72 TACHOIMGISN cdacsncivinsuecussseccsasnareciumennenedas 72 MIS TIONING on sede ciseaps eee teencceeieceeedenstene 276 PUN sra 222 attending to the windowS 215 condensation in headlamps 368 remove with the air ventS 224 timer TUCU paxsinssuss traci datensivavedisatiesnaascanean 223 Mobile phone COMME T nscoacosneaneteuisiecentontmnnatesietcensies 211 DANOS TOO oocoocccnccnancnnccanonaninanonnconnonanos 276 register PNONG ic sccicnsicdeccsesseccnssdsacwousees 277 VOICES COMO M iciiicisicaninsiaatancannciasaendc
120. 59 Y 04 Driver support Adaptive cruise control Cruise control Unavailable 04 160 Radar blocked See man ual Cruise control Service required Press Brake To hold acoustic alarm warning light in windscreen pull ing brakes Only with Queue Assistant Below 30 km h Only fol lowing Only with Queue Assistant A The symbols are schematic The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated This could be due to e brake temperature is high e the radar sensor is blocked by e g wet snow or rain The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged e The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles For example in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor The driver can then choose to switch to ordinary Cruise control CC see page 155 a text message provides information on appropriate alternatives Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 157 The adaptive cruise control is disengaged e Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake which is why the car may start rolling soon e The driver must brake himself herself The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal Shown with attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at soeeds below 30 km
121. 6 2 T4 B4164T 184 7 9 120 5 1 143 6 1 ut T4A B4164T 192 8 3 125 5 4 149 6 4 ut T4 B5204T8 aut 243 10 4 135 5 8 174 TAS T5 B5204T9 243 10 4 185 5 8 174 7 5 ut T5 B5254T12 aut 263 ES 140 6 0 185 7 9 aut gt gt 10 Specifications T5A B5254T12 aut D28 D4162T 100 3 8 82 en 88 3 4 D2C D4162T man 107 4 1 90 3 4 96 3 7 D2B D41627 115 4 4 95 3 6 102 3 9 D2C D4162T 116 4 4 99 3 8 105 4 0 D3 D5204T6 man 139 5 3 100 3 8 114 4 3 D34 D5204T6 165 6 3 108 4 1 129 4 9 D3 D5204T6 179 6 9 e 4 3 136 5 2 D34 D5204T6 aut 179 6 8 122 4 6 143 5 4 D4 D5204T4 man 139 5 3 100 3 8 114 4 3 10 Specifications 01 10 OO 11 D44 D5204T4 D4 D5204T4 179 6 9 112 4 3 136 5 2 ut D44 D5204T4 179 6 8 122 4 6 143 5 4 A Only applies to cars equipped with 19 inch wheels B Only applies to the low emission variant C Does not apply to the low emission variant Explanation Extra urban driving Fuel consumption and emissions of gram km carbon dioxide CO z Fuel consumption and emission values in the Combined driving table above are based on specific EU cycles on litre 100 km that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment The car s weight may increase depending on If the consumption and emission data is equipment This as well as how heavily the missing then it is included in the enclosed car is loaded increases fuel consumption and supplement carbon dioxide e
122. 60 668 7 515 710 7 519 274 01 10 00 111 406 10 Specifications Symbols in the display General There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car The symbols are divided into warning indicator and information sym bols Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found For more information on sym bols and text messages see pages 75 and 205 A Red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and or driveability of the car An explanatory text is shown in the combined instrument panel at the same time D Information symbol illuminates in combination with text in the combined instru ment panel when a deviation in any of the car s systems has occurred The yellow sym bol information can also illuminate in combi nation with other symbols Symbols in the display Warning symbols in the combined instrument panel 112 lt ey 2 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Low oil pressure Parking brake applied Parking brake applied alterna tive symbol Airbags SRS Seatbelt reminder Alternator not charging Fault in the brake system Warning safety mode CO Tit 77 133 el 197 16 77 KU Mer 12 28 Tg WSS Control symbols in the combined instrument panel SPORT 7 g Ey E l
123. 9 Ro A N o 0 Czech Alpine Electronics Inc t mto prohla uje Ze tento Bluetooth Module je ve shod se z kladn mi po adavky a dal mi p slu n mi Republic ustanovenimi sm rnice 1999 5 ES Denmark Undertegnede Alpine Electronics Inc erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr Bluetooth Module overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Germany Hiermit erklart Alpine Electronics Inc dass sich das Gerat Bluetooth Module in Ubereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den Ubrigen einschlagigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet 10 Specifications Type approval CA Estonia UK Spain Greece France Italy Latvia Lithuania Nether lands Malta Hungary K esolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics Inc seadme Bluetooth Module vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU p hin uetele ja 10 nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele satetele Hereby Alpine Electronics Inc declares that this Bluetooth Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics Inc declara que el Bluetooth Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE ME THN MAPOY2A Alpine Electronics Inc AHAQNEI OTI Bluetooth Module 2 YMMOPO0QNETAI MPO2 TIX OYZIOAEI gt
124. 95 G021497 Check that the towball section is secure EJ Safety cable Ed Push in the locking wheel K and turn it By PI A Cana DAGK anticlockwise gt until you hear a click WARNING Take care to secure the trailer s safety If the towball is not fitted correctly then it cable in the intended bracket must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions O IMPORTANT Removal of removable towbar o o Y A e o Only grease in the ball for the towball hitch the remainder of the towbar must be clean and dry Turn the locking wheel down fully until it comes to a stop Hold it in this position while pulling the towball rearward and upward WARNING Secure the detachable towbar safely if it is stored in the car see page 311 o o N e 0 Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position 07 During your journey Driving with a trailer 7 oO 0 SY o Go a Push the protective cover until it snaps tight Trailer Stability Assist TSA The TSA system Trailer Stability Assist serves to stabilise the car and trailer combi nation if it begins to snake The TSA function is part of the DSTC system Dynamic Stability and Traction Control see page 140 Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any 07 car trailer combination Snaking normally occurs at high speeds But there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds 70
125. Alert System Lane Keeping Aid may show a symbol along with an explana Message examples tory message If so follow the recommenda tion given Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable The Lane Keeping Aid is set to standby mode because the speed is lower than 65 km h at this speed Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable The lane does not have clear side lines or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged Read for current markings about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 175 04 Lane Keeping Aid Available The function scans the lane s side lines Windscreen sensors blocked The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged m See manual Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 175 Lane Keeping Aid Service The system is disengaged required e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Lane Keeping Aid Interrupted LKA has been set to standby mode The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again A The table symbols are schematic The symbols shown in the combined instrument panel may have a slightly different appearance g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 185 Y 04 Driver support Park assist syst General Parking assistance is used as an aid to park ing An acoustic signal as w
126. D4162T D5204T6 D5204T6 D5204T4 D5204T4 Manual B6 Manual B6 Manual B6 Automatic MPS6 Automatic TF 80SD Automatic TF 80SD Automatic TF 80SD Automatic TF 80SD Manual B6 Automatic MPS6 Manual M66 Automatic TF 80SD Manual M66 Automatic TF 80SD Max weight unbraked trailer kg 650 650 650 700 700 700 700 700 650 700 700 750 700 750 10 Specifications Max towball load kg 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 01 10 00 111 10 01 10 00 111 10 Specifications Engine specifications Engine specifications 1 OLD Not all engines are available in all markets 12 T3 T4 T4 iS T5 lis D2 D3 D4 B4164T4 B4164T3 B4164T B5204T8 B5204T9 B5254112 B5254114 D4162T D5204T6 D5204T4 88 4500 110 5700 132 5700 132 5000 157 6000 187 5400 183 5400 84 3600 110 3500 130 3500 120 4500 150 5700 180 5700 180 5000 213 6000 254 5400 249 5400 115 3600 150 3500 177 3500 Torque Nm rpm 240 1600 3000 240 1600 4000 240 1600 5000 300 2700 4000 300 2700 5000 360 1800 4200 360 1800 4200 270 1750 2500 350 1500 2750 400 1750 2750 A Engine code component and serial number can be read on the engine see page 376 No of cylinders aa A o a a a A A RAR 79 19 ug 81 0 81 0 83 83 75 81 0 81 0 81 4 81 4 81 4 T7 T7 92 3 92 3 88 3 ETE 1 596 1 596 1 596 1 984 1 984 2 497 2 497 1 560 1 984
127. DRE RFP TE E FHH 2 4 2 4835 GHz E EEH EIRP RRI lt 10dBi IM lt 100 mW lt 20 dBm MAA KER lt 10dBi MH lt 20 dBm MHz EIRP MARA E 20 ppm E o e J O 2 3 AUS GRE DIR OU DBE 2 5 RI wi LAA lt 36 dBm 100 kHz 30 1000 MHz lt 33 dBm 100 kHz 2 4 2 4835 GHz lt 40 dBm 1 MHz 3 4 3 53 GHz lt 40 dBm 1 MHz 5 725 5 85 GHz lt 30 dBm 1 MHz HE 1 12 75 GHz AH AED MARE CIMA A RIB a AM BC KR BO LE RIAs eee eee WAT EAE ARMATRMAIN DORIS IEE FREE RADO A HT 4 BEF HD TCA LB DIRA AA NS A TO PERE AAA SE 5 ME BAM BA A THEA gt gt 10 Specifications Type approval Taiwan EEE EY UE ES BS EES TR AR RS AU Sea ABIERTA gt OR EA A MH SAS MANERA et PE RE aT LER ETS EB EZ BE Ma BREE HB GE gt ARB RS gt EESHA gt Se RI AA gt HDR SMS TERRE A IES A Sa LR ARR SAE ai FE CCAB11LP4080T3 CCAB11LP407010 10 Specifications 01 10 00 111 Type approval oues South AS Ae 19 MOO Volvo Car Korea NEX BS KCC CMM N25 1AM21L3 KCC CMM N25 IAM21L2 and KCC CMM N25 IAM21L1 AS Y Bluetooth Audio Navigation Radio QY g AM2 1 Ar MH March 2010 Alpine Electronics Inc Made in Japan 17H HE Volvo Car Korea N sxX2010 MS A SA te2s 726 1713 SRL2Y 4 SE NsN DAael 1588 1777 http www volvocars com kr ol NSA FYAAFY Ko PALE AUEA OSHO VOSS agora Hae A Y S
128. E E E E uate E geste 170 Colour Code paliNt cccccccnnccccconcnncccnnnnos 372 Combined instrument panel 71 204 Messages moins 205 Comfort inside the passenger compart a 241 COMPS Siiri iniinis ia 110 calibrato sanek 110 Condensation in headlamps 368 controls centre CONSOLE cccoocccccnccccnoncccnonncnonocos 249 Controls centre CONS Bucni vicna caian 207 Controls OMS casonas aan 89 C ntrol SymDOlS srera 75 Cooling SYSlCMieciccnecpesanniantonisarinenereananan 296 Corner Traction Control cccccssssceeees 140 Crash see ColliSiON ooooononnnconicnnnnoncnas 29 Cruise CONTO iecrciinciaaicatriiiire 148 CZIP Clear Zone Interior Package 216 DAB Radissoni 263 Daytime running lightS o occccononno 91 Deadlock A 60 temporary deactivatiON coooncccinnnnnn o 60 DG AGIO CK S ssnin i AR 60 DSTO ST ania 222 y his eene 302 Diesel particle filter ooccconnnncnon 303 Dipstick electroniC cccconcccccnnccncnnnno 341 Direction IndicatorSuaminasnicn ranita 95 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 122 Display IO scooter 90 Distance WaMiNdiiaiiiononcsnaaiicnci 161 Dolby Surround Pro Logic 248 DOOF TITO S ooo cac go 106 Driver Alert ContrOl ooccccccccnnnncnncccnnnnacons 179 Driver Alert SySteM ococcoooocccncccccnnoccnnnnnnnas 178 E e OO e 296 cooling SS tMiisinicdins 296 with the tail
129. E a ea eee esses 164 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection 170 Di A IA E E couseastcdenteestaveces daate 178 E AAA 179 Driver Alert System Lane Keeping AiC ccccccscceccessseeeceessesensaees 182 PS IS a aaa 186 PARKS IS ICAA acc 189 Park Assist Pilots PA Pa a a PES nr reer fot 193 3 BS and CTA e 198 3 138 Option accessory for more information see Introduction DRIVER SUPPORT Y 04 Driver support 04 140 DSTC Stability and traction control system General information on DSTC The stability and traction control system DSTC Dynamic Stability amp Traction Control helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car s traction The activation of the system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed The stability and traction control system is a supplementary function it cannot han dle all situations in all road conditions The driver always bears responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed Active Yaw Control The function limits the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car Spin Control The function reduces engine power if the drive wheels slip against the underlying sur face in order to maintain stability and traction
130. Electronics Inc o wiadcza e Bluetooth Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozosta ymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Alpine Electronics Inc declara que este Bluetooth Module est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 CE Alpine Electronics Inc izjavlja da je ta Bluetooth Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolo ili direk tive 1999 5 ES Alpine Electronics Inc t mto vyhlasuje e Bluetooth Module sp a z kladn po iadavky a v etky pr slu n ustanovenia Smer nice 1999 5 ES Alpine Electronics Inc vakuuttaa t ten ett Bluetooth Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen H rmed intygar Alpine Electronics Inc att denna Bluetooth Module st r verensst mmelse med de v sentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta best mmelser som framg r av direktiv 1999 5 EG Alpine Electronics Inc hereby certifies that this Bluetooth Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999 5 EC Alpine Electronics Inc erkl rer herved at utstyret Bluetooth Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF 10 Specifications A Type approval approval CA 10 China RTZ SN IA NA AS AE LASA RE AS CN Sis hy A VEA RAR
131. GINE button before opening the bonnet The engine does not auto start In the following cases the engine does not auto start after having auto stopped AA A gear is engaged without M declutching a display text prompts the driver to set the gear lever in neutral position in order to enable automatic starting The driver is unrestrained the gear A selector is in P position and the driver s door is open a normal engine start must take place A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox Involuntary engine stop with manual gearbox In the event that a start up fails and the engine stops proceed as follows 1 Depress the clutch pedal again the engine starts automatically 2 In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position The combined instrument panel then shows the text Put gear in neutral More information and settings A My CAR Mace Trip statistics DRIVe Support systems Settings a q_ y Option accessory for more information see Introduction The car s MY CAR menu system under the heading DRIVe contains an introduction of Volvo s Start Stop system as well as recom mendations for energy saving driving techni ques see page 208 Symbols and messages In combination with this indicator lamp the Start Stop function may display text messages in the com bined instrument panel for certain situations For some of them there is a recommended action that shoul
132. Go back in the menu structure using RESET 10 Select the other time continue from step e 2 or exit the menu with RESET Start the timer 1 Press OK to access the menu 2 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK 3 Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and activate with OK 4 Exit the menu with RESET Deactivating the timer A timer started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed Proceed as follows 1 Press OK to access the menu 2 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK gt lfa timer is set but not activated a clock icon is shown next to the set time 3 Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK 4 Deactivate the timer as follows e long press on OK or short press on OK to continue in the menu Then select to stop the timer and confirm with OK 5 Exit the menu with RESET A timer started heater can be switched off as described in the instructions in the section Direct start and immediate stop see page 228 Clock timer The heater s time is connected to the car s clock OLE All timer programming will be cleared if the car s clock is reset 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Engine and passenger compartment heater 05 229 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 230 Additional h
133. ING sasvevsninastrmettninarieiniinataxtuenstel 59 299 9 fuel filler flap manual opening a 299 Rustproofing o e a ta calf fun ma a 370 A 299 R Relay fuse box see FUSES cccccccccccccncnnos 359 Bad pee Remote control csccscsscutsascectsxansscucessestanane 292 S adar SSMS Of uo battery replacement occcoonccccnocccnnnnnnn 293 liMitatiONS oononnnnnnnnononncnncnnncncnnans 157 eel dl re PAY MOOO sepa 29 IE CEES MO Seat see Sa cooocccccccionoccnncccnonnanoncnnnnnanons 83 PRACIO EET TE E E 259 DFOGFAMMADIE voiis 134 AMFI duriasiniae ronald 259 Seatbelt DAR iia 263 jets Apt OS 44 SSA AE E E 18 attery replaceMenNnt sess 50 seatbelt tensiONeT ocooccininnnnnnninnnnnnns 18 Ran SEIS Ob esinaine 101 detachable key Dlad cccssssscecesessseseee 48 Seatbelt reminde ccccccssseeeeseeeeeees 18 2 11 Alphabetical Index o A ono 16 E o A 83 head restraints reaf 85 A 219 lowering the front backrest 83 lowering the rear backresSt 86 DOW EIMSEAUS fancicscdeaiecretmpenetieaceateueeracte 84 Securing loads Loading ccccco 305 SGU eat E E ta lodos 80 Service POST OM visi caian acta 352 Service PFOGFAMME ccceeesceeeeeeeseeeeeees 338 Set time interval ccccccssssceeeeeeeeseeeeeees 161 SIGS AINDAG Sissi 24 Signal input external 248 270 ooo 24 SOOL Meri 303 SOOT filter TUN dbescusrnniinniiaancicios 303 Sp
134. Move the floor forwards to an appropriate socket position and place it in the adjustment groove e The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the igni 3 In service position the floor is moved all tion switch the way forwards towards the rear seat back and placed in the plastic support in O IMPORTANT the centre Max socket current is 10 A 120 W 07 Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car s battery 306 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo For information on the use of Volvo s recommended temporary emergency puncture repair TMK see page 330 07 During your journey Cargo area Cargo net Attaching 0 NOTE The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one of the rear doors WARNING It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller straps are secured properly Damaged nets must not ice N Re o o A yi AA ES be used i 4 Hook the cargo net s anchoring straps The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points into the eyes on the rear of the seat slide A cargo net prevents cargo from being 1 Unfold the cargo net and make sure that rails it is easier if the backrests are thrown forward in the p
135. N Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection Symbol Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 175 Radar blocked See Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles For example in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor 04 cm Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 157 Collision warn Serv Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged ice required e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended A Symbols are schematic may vary by market and car model Option accessory for more information see Introduction Irr Y 04 Driver support Driver Alert System 04 178 General information on Driver Alert System The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on The Driver Alert System consists of different functions which can either be switched on at the same time or individually e Driver Alert Control DAC see page 179 e Lane Keeping Aid
136. Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied The sym bol is illuminated during application For more information see page 133 Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illumi nates while driving it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle SRS SIPS or IC systems Drive immediately to a workshop to have the system checked Volvo recom mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop Seatbelt reminder This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system Visit a workshop Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates the brake fluid level may be too low Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reser voir see page 343 If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system 1 Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine 2 Restart the engine e f both symbols extinguish continue driving e If the symbols remain illuminated check the level in the brake fluid reser voir see page 343 If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are s
137. Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http oss sgi com projects FreeB shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS INC BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of Silicon Graphics Inc shall not be used in advertising or otherwise gt gt 10 10 Specifications 01 10 OO 1 Licenses to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written 10 authorization from Silicon Graphics Inc This software is base
138. Phone gt call from the call register or Phone call from the call register Continue by responding to the system s prompts Call a contact The following dialogue allows you to call your pre defined contacts in the mobile phone The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone gt call contact or Phone call contact Continue by responding to the system s prompts Consider the following when you call a con tact e lf there are several contacts with similar names they will be presented in the screen in the numbered rows and the system prompts you to select a row num ber e lf there are more rows in the list than can be displayed simultaneously saying Down allows you to scroll down in the list and saying Up allows you to scroll up in the list Calling voice mailbox The following dialogue allows you to call your voice mailbox to check if you have received any messages The phone number for your voice mailbox must be registered in the Bluetooth function see page 279 The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone gt call voice mailbox or Phone call voice mailbox Continue by responding to the system s prompts Option accessory for more information see Introduction General This system only supports TV broadcasts in the countries that broadcast in MPEG 2 format or MPEG 4 format and follow the DVB T standard The system does not support analogue broadcasts The TV picture is only shown w
139. Possible steering wheel positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth 1 Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel 2 Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you 3 Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place If the lever is stiff press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back WARNING Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted see page 240 Keypads 00 1 Y S og Cruise control see page 148 Adaptive cruise control see page 150 2 Audio and phone control see page 249 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Horn Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig nal Light switches Knob positions Eg Specification KoT Daytime running lights when the car s electrical system is in key position Il or the engine is running Main beam flash can be used ETS Daytime running lights and position parking lamps side marker lamps when the car s a 10 lt T o o Overview light switches electrical system is in key posi Thumbwheel for adjusting display and tion II or the engine is running instrument lighting and ambient lighting Automatic switching to posi Button for rear fog lamp tion parking lamps side marker lamps when the car is parked
140. Safety mode Driving after a collision G045795 Warning symbol in analogue combined instru ment panel N a R t o 10 Warning symbol in digital combined instrument panel If the car is involved in a collision the text Safety mode See manual may appear on the information display This means that the car has reduced functionality Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the collision may have damaged any of the car s vital functions such as the fuel lines sensors for one of the safety systems or the brake system Attempting to start the car First check that no fuel is leaking from the car There must be no smell of fuel either If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage you may attempt to start the car Remove the remote control key and open the driver s door If a message is now shown to the effect that the ignition is on press the start button Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key The car s electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode Then try to start the car If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service used instead Even if the car appears to be driveable hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset t
141. USB connection 270 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Playback and navigation Turn TUNE to access the playlist folder struc ture and navigate in the list structure Use OK MENU to either confirm selection of sub folder or start of playback of the selected audio video file Press EXIT to either stop and exit the playlist or go up back in the folder structure A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist s root level Audio video files can also be changed by pressing on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Audio files have the symbol amp a video files have the symbol MN and folders have the symbol Y When playback of a file is complete the play back of the other files of the same type in that particular folder continues Change of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back The system automatically detects and changes setting when a device containing only audio files or only video files is con nected to the USB port and then it plays back 2 Only applies to USB and iPod these files However the system does not change setting if a device containing a mix ture of audio and video files is connected to the USB port but instead the player contin ues to play back the previous file type Fast forward reverse2 See page 267 Scan See page 268 Random See page 268 Search function The keypad on the
142. a cooled area Start cooling by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment to the end position Switch off the cooling by moving the con trol forwards to the end position 3 Applicable only to cars with ECC gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 243 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 244 Comfort inside the passenger compartment 12 V socket G046316 k s 12 V socket in tunnel console front seat The electrical sockets can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V e g display screens music players and mobile phones For the sockets to supply current the remote control key must be in at least key position l see page 81 WARNING Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use Optional equipment and accessories e g display screens music players and mobile phones which are connected to one of the passenger compartment s 12V electri cal sockets could be activated by the cli mate control system even when the remote control key has been removed or when the car is locked for example when the parking heater is activated at a preset time For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence IMPORTANT Max power takeoff is 10 A 120 W in either socket The compressor
143. ack in its position 07 During your journey Towing and recovery Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper IMPORTANT The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch Call a recovery service for recovery assistance Recovery Call a recovery service for recovery assis tance IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be transpor ted with the wheels rolling forward 07 AA cei Won Brac iaecceccccssecesseenadeveatecesteuanresdacesaeeasteesacueuds 320 Chaleco na 324 LA RE nera cass ores 328 Warning triangleang firstraid KIt AA A 329 Emergency puncture reparar anar wen al hart 330 318 Option accessory for more information see Introduction WHEELS AND TYRES 08 08 Wheels and tyres Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car s driving characte ristics The type of tyre dimensions tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs Direction of rotation o N N x A o 0 The arrow shows the tyre s direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions never between left and right hand sides or vice versa If the tyres are fitted incorrect
144. age Rear child lock activated and the button s lamp illuminates the locks are active Electrical locking of the rear doors When the electric child safety lock is active and power windows then the rear e windows can only be opened with the driver s door control panel e doors cannot be opened from inside The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started With child safety locks Not to be mixed up with manual door locks see page 56 The child safety locks are located on the trail ing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open To activate deactivate the child safety locks Use the remote control key s detachable Control panel ae door key blade to turn the knob 49 ey Plage to iii TME shen SEE Pade The child safety locks can be activated deac The door is blocked against opening from tivated in all key positions higher than 0 see the inside page 81 Activation deactivation can be The door can be opened from both the performed up to 2 minutes after switching off outside and the inside the engine provided that no door is opened To activate the child safety locks 62 Option accessory for more information see Introduction General Activated alarm is triggered if e adoor the bonnet or the tailgate is o
145. al adjustment and or replacement of the laser sen sor s spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop we rec ommend an authorised Volvo work shop e To avoid exposure to harmful radia tion do not carry out any readjust ments or maintenance other than those specified here e The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor e Do not remove the laser sensor this includes removing the lenses A removed laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825 1 Laser class 3B is not eye safe and therefore entails a risk of injury e The laser sensor s connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen e The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor s connector is plugged in e The laser sensor transmits laser light when the remote control key is in posi tion Il and also with the engine switched off see page 81 on key posi tions Symbols and text messages In conjunction with automatic braking by the City Safety system one or more symbols may illuminate in the combined instrument panel and a text message may be shown A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direc tion indicator stalk A Auto braking by City Safety atm Windscreen sensors blocked uy See manual A City Safety Service required ey A The symbols are schematic City Safety is b
146. al speed 7 p p p SY SY The wipers sweep at high speed IMPORTANT Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in and that any snow or ice on the wind screen is scraped away IMPORTANT Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen The wind screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades see see page 352 and 368 Rain sensor The rain sensor automatically starts the wind screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen The sensitivity of 1 Replacing the wiper blades see page 352 service position wiper blade see page 352 and filling washer fluid see page 353 the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the button is illuminated and the rain sensor symbol is shown in the combined instrument panel Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor the car must be running or the remote control key in posi tion I or Il while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position O or in the position for a single sweep Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but ton KA The windscreen wipers make one sweep Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep Turn the thumbwheel upward for
147. all operations We also believe that our custom ers share our consideration for the environ ment Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manu factured in one of the cleanest and most resource efficient plants in the world Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certification which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units We also set requirements 10 for our partners so that they work systemati cally with environmental issues Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump tion in each of their respective classes Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas carbon diox ide It is possible for the driver to influence fuel consumption For more information read under the heading Reducing environmental impact Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept Clean inside and out a concept that encompasses a clean interior environ ment as well as highly efficient emission con trol In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com partment via the air intake Introduction Volvo and the environment A sophisticated air quality system lAQS Interior Air Quality System en
148. allation of child seats ce Front facing child seat 9 18 kg B X OK IUF B1 X OKA IUF A X OK IUF X The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and or size class IL Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model limited or semi universal catego ries IUF Suitable for front facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class A Volvo recommends rear facing child seats for this group A ise o RE oO a lt T o o The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front facing child seats These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front facing child seats Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear facing child seats to as late an age as possible Fold the head restraints in order to facili tate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats In cars with a cargo cover over the lug gage compartment this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points see the seat manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING The child seat s straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are ten
149. alt pneumatic brakes compared with when Park Assist uses the and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc sensors To bear in mind The driver should bear in mind that the Park Assist Pilot is an aid not an infallible fully automatic function The driver must therefore Limitations The PAP sequence is stopped e if the car is driven too quickly above be prepared to intervene There are also 7 km h details to bear in mind while parking e g e if the driver touches the steering wheel e PAP starts out from the current location e if the ABS or DSTC function is enabled of the parked vehicles if they are inap e g if a wheel loses grip on a slippery propriately parked then the car s tyres road 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support UN Park Assist Pilot PAP 04 195 Y 04 Driver support Park Assist Pilot PAP 04 196 and wheel rims may be damaged against kerbs PAP is designed for parking on straight streets not sharp curves or bends For this reason make sure the car is parallel to the parking space when PAP measures the space It is not always possible to find parking spaces on narrow streets since there is not enough space for manoeuvring In such parking situations it helps the sys tem to drive as close to the side of the road as possible where you intend to park Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traf
150. an also be accessed from normal view by pressing and holding the button on the centre console s keypad with the letter that the contact searched for starts with For example a long press on the button for 6 gives instant access to that part of the list where the contacts with the letter M are located Character table keypad in centre console AI o Ly e ABC 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKU 6 MNO 7 PQRS 8 TUV 9 WXYZ FAV Space 1 ABCAAAZAG2 DEFEE3 GHIl4 JKL5 MNOOS OG6 PQRSB7 TUVUU8 WXYZQ Shift between upper and lower case letter nro Searching for contacts Anders Andersson Ben Benjaminsson Carl Carlsson G046428 Search contacts using the text wheel 1 Character list 2 Changing the input mode see table below Phone book a gt a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system Bluetooth handsfree 06 gt gt 281 06 Infotainment system 06 282 Bluetooth handsfree To search for or edit a contact go in phone mode to Phone menu Phone book gt Search There is no text wheel for High Perform ance so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters only the digit and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this 1 Turn TUNE to the desired letter press OK MENU to confirm The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre co
151. an be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Light settings gt Home safe light duration For a description of the menu system see page 208 Approach light duration Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key see page 46 and is used to switch on the car s lighting at a distance When the function is activated with the remote control the parking lamps door mir ror lamps number plate lighting interior roof lighting and floor lighting are switched on The length of time for which the approach lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Light settings Approach light duration For a description of the menu sys tem see page 208 Adjusting headlamp pattern Headlamp pattern left hand traffic D 03 Your driving environment 98 Lighting Headlamp pattern right hand traffic The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be set for right or left hand traffic Active Xenon headlamps The light pattern does not need to be adjusted The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens The headlamp pattern may not be as good Masking the headlamps 1 Copy the A and B templates for left hand drive cars or the C and D templates
152. ance Main menu FM1 FM2 TP p 261 Show radio text p 262 Show presets p 260 See footnote Scan p 263 News settings p 262 06 Infotainment system Advanced settings REG p 263 Alternative frequency p 262 EON p 261 Set TP favourite p 261 PTY settings p 262 Reset all FM settings p 263 Audio settings p 253 See footnote B A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre mium Sound Multimedia B For submenus see Main menu AM Main menu DAB1 DAB2 Ensemble learn p 263 PTY filtering p 264 Turn off PTY filtering Show radio text Show presets See footnote Scan Advanced settings DAB linking DAB band Sub channels Show PTY text Reset all DAB settings Audio settings See footnote p 264 p 260 p 264 p 264 p 265 p 265 p 265 p 265 p 265 p 265 p 253 A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre mium Sound Multimedia B For submenus see Main menu AM 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction General information on infotainment Menus MEDIA Main menu CD Audio Disc menu Random p 268 Scan p 268 Audio settings p 253 See footnote A For submenus see Main menu AM Main menu CD DVD Data Disc menu Play p 267 Pause Stop p 267 Random p 268 Repeat folder p 268 Change subtitles p 267 Change audio track p 267 06 gt gt 253 06 Infotainment system General information on infotain
153. and it helps the driver by automati cally braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front should the driver not react in time by braking and or steering away City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his her driving style If the driver solely relies on City Safety to do the braking there will be a collision sooner or later The driver or passengers normally only notice City Safety if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision If the car is also equipped with a Collision Warning function with Auto Brake these two systems complement each other For more information on Collision Warning function with Auto Brake see page 170 IMPORTANT Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per formed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended y Option accessory for more information see Introduction City Safety does not engage in all driv ing situations or traffic weather or road conditions City Safety does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car to small vehicles and motorcycles or
154. and the selected maximum speed exceeded The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km h provided that none of the buttons or has been depressed during the last half minute Deactivate To deactivate the speed limiter Press the steering wheel button El gt The combined instrument panel s speed limiter symbol 6 and the set speed mark 5 are extinguished The selected and stored speed are thus deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the Y button 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction The driver can then use the accelerator pedal to choose a speed without limi tation 04 Driver support UN Speed limiter 04 147 Y 04 Driver support Cruise control General information on CC The cruise control CC Cruise Control helps the driver maintain an even speed resulting in more relaxing driving on motorways and long straight roads with regular traffic flows The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter vene when the cruise control is not main 04 taining a suitable speed and or suitable distance The driver always bears ultimate responsi bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
155. approx 50 km driving 05 Fuel operated heater Heater not working Contact a workshop for repair Volvo recommends that you contact an author Y Service required ised Volvo workshop A display text clears automatically after a time Direct start and immediate stop or after one press on the indicator stalk OK Following the direct start of the heater it will button be activated for 50 minutes Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature 228 MONA Ai Slater ALIAN ORU The car can be started and driven while the heater is running 1 Press OK to access the menu 2 Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK 3 Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct start Stop in order to activate deactivate the heater and select with OK 4 Exit the menu with RESET Timer The time when the car shall be used and heated is specified with the timer Setting the timer li A Press OK to access the menu Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours setting Select the required hour using the thumb wheel Briefly press OK to move to the lit minutes setting Select the required minute using the thumbwheel Press OK to confirm the setting 1 Press OK again to activate the timer 9
156. ar s electrical system is in key position 0 e the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D Lighting gt gt 95 UY 03 Your driving environment 03 96 Lighting Front reading lamps The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof console Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in Rear reading lamps G046416 Rear reading lamps The lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in Floor lighting as ambient light To make the interior brighter while driving the floor lighting can be activated at dimmed level Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the MY CAR menu system under Settings gt Car settings Light settings Interior light gt Floor lights Select from Off Low and High For more information on the MY CAR menu system see page 209 Lighting in the front door storage compartments Lighting in the front door storage compart ments comes on when the engine starts Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed Vanity mirror lighting The lighting for the vanity mirror see page 243 is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed
157. are WNEEI cccccsescccesseseeeseeseeeeseaees 324 Speed Mit uri dieran 146 SPIT CONTO luisana atacadas 140 Spin control MC soscioidaianiccianades 140 Stability and traction control system 140 Stability SYSTEM vesssesncuneassemrnceeeseinaysausenmces 140 SLAIN Sucia 370 EAN UO Drivers dales 125 Start assistance cda 117 Steering force speed related 240 Steering force level see Steering force 240 Steering Ok macacos ess 116 Steering Wheel ooocccicccoonoccnnccconaanoncnnnnnanos 88 Key coccccccnccccccnunnnnnnas 88 148 208 249 keypad adaptive cruise control 152 steering wheel adjustment 00 88 Stone chips and scratches c eeceee 3 2 Storage spaces in the passenger com PLUS TN ec perce A 241 o sarteernecnvils 248 253 o S en 141 indicator SYIMDO S comicios 75 warning SyMboOlS oooccccccnnccccconccncnnnanononas 75 Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control 159 Collision Warning with Auto SA 168 176 Distance Allert cccsscccssseesseeeeseeees 163 Driver Alert Control cccccconccccconnco 181 LAA actue cdantidctacdon coda eco 184 T Tailgate lOGKING UNIOEKING ssitsicnsicnavannserneceexneccnioans 58 Temperature actual temperature cccccssceceeeees 215 Temperature Control cccccsseeeseeeeeees 221 DR aps gene mene een nese E 223 Total airing TUNCUGM x scsscsecccenserzetecevess 57 215 Towbar
158. area to which the car was delivered The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones Proceed as follows 1 Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high voltage power lines 2 Start the car For the best calibration switch off all elec trical equipment climate control system wipers etc and makes sure that all doors are closed 3 Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed approx 3 seconds The number of the current magnetic zone is shown Option accessory for more information see Introduction Magnetic zones 4 Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone 1 15 is shown See the map of magnetic zones for the compass Wait until the display returns to showing the character C or hold the button on the bottom of the rearview mirror depressed for approx 6 seconds use e g a paper clip until the character C is shown Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km h until a compass direc tion is shown in the display indicating that calibration is complete Then drive a further 2 circles to fine tune calibration Repeat the above procedure as neces sary 03 Your driving environment ED General information on the alcolock Functions Operation The function of the Alcolock is to prevent the l anne Battery car from being driven by individuals under the Alcolock indicator lamp
159. asher fluid with antifreeze during the winter to avoid freezing in the pump reser voir and hoses For capacities see page 385 Operation The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts discharging driving style driving con ditions climatic conditions etc e Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running e Check that the cables to the battery are correctly connected and properly tight ened e The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas which is highly explosive A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con nected incorrectly and this can be enough for the battery to explode e The battery contains sulphuric acid which can cause serious burns e f sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes skin or clothing flush with large quantities of water If acid splashes into the eyes seek medical attention immediately The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly The life of the battery is affected by several factors including driving conditions and climate Battery starting capacity decrea ses gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances Extreme cold fur ther limits starting capacity To maintain the battery in good condition at least 15 minutes of driving week is rec ommended or that the battery is con nected to a
160. assenger compart the split upper rod is locked in the straightened and the seats are moved ment in the event of heavy braking For safety extended position forward slightly reasons the cargo net must always be cor 2 Hook one end of the rod into the roof Pay attention to make sure that you do rectly fastened and secured The mesh is mounting with the anchoring strap locks not press the seat backrest hard against made of a strong nylon fabric and secured turned towards you the net when the seat backrest is moved IA 3 Hook the other end of the rod into the back again only adjust until the seat WARNING roof mounting on the opposite side the backrest makes contact with the net telescopic spring loaded retaining hooks Loads in the luggage compartment must facilitate alignment Take care to press O IMPORTANT a be anchored well and also have a cor forward the rod s retaining hooks for each If a seat backrest is pushed backwards rectly fitted safety net respective roof mounting s front end posi hard into the safety net then the net and or tion its roof mounts may be damaged 5 Tension the cargo net with the anchoring straps Option accessory for more information see Introduction 307 07 During your journey Cargo area Removal and storage 4 Break the rod in the centre fold it Parcel shelf together and roll up the net Insert the net in the storage bag The folded cargo net is stored in its bag in the Cargo area e
161. ay obstruct the combined instrument panel s instructions when you turn it during the parking manoeuvre 1 Searching and checking measurements G046216 The PAP function searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough Proceed as follows 1 Activate PAP by pressing this button and do not drive faster than 30 km h Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text so request Stop the car when the graphics and text so request PAP searches the area for a parking space displays instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side But if required the car can also be parked on the driver s side of the street e Activate the direction indicator for the driver s side the car is then parked on that side of the street instead 2 a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 2 Reversing in G046213 During the Reversing step PAP will steer the car into the parking space Proceed as fol lows 1 Check that the area behind the car is clear then engage reverse gear 2 Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel and no faster than approx 7 km h 3 Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text so request Keep your hands away from the steer ing wheel when the PAP function is activated Make sure that th
162. ayer there may be a certain delay before playback starts Disc eject A disc remains in the ejected position for about 12 seconds after which it is inserted back into the player for safety reasons Pause When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE is pressed the media player is paused When the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed again the media player starts It is also possi ble to pause via the menu system press OK MENU select Play Pause Playback and navigation CD audio discs Turn TUNE to access the disc s playlist and navigate in the list Use OK MENU to confirm the selection of the disc track and start play back Press EXIT to cancel and exit the play list A long press on EXIT leads to the play list s root level Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing on 3 on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad 3 Does not apply to CD Audio Burned discs audio video files Turn TUNE to access the disc s playlist folder structure and navigate in the list structure Use OK MENU to confirm either selection of subfolder or start of playback of the selected audio video file Press EXIT to either stop and exit the playlist or go up back in the folder structure A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist s root level Audio video files can also be changed by pressing on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Audio files have the symbol sa video files have the symbol MN and
163. battery charger with automatic trickle charging A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life IMPORTANT A quick charger must never be used when charging the battery 09 Maintenance and service QD Battery 09 IMPORTANT If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for info tainment may be temporarily disengaged and or the message in the combined instrument panel s information display about the starter battery s state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable following the connection of an external starter bat tery or battery charger e The negative battery terminal on the car s starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point See the section Start assistance for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached Q 09 Maintenance and service 09 Battery Symbols on th Datery Avoid sparks and naked Use protective goggles flames Risk of explosion Further information in the owner s manual Must be taken for recy Store the battery out of cling the reach of children an environmentally safe manner as it con tains lead The battery contains cor A rosive acid An expended battery must be recycled in Replacing the main battery Volvo recommends that you allow an author ised workshop to replace the batt
164. battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while station ary Before a long journey e Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal e Make sure that there are no leaks fuel oil or other fluid e Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths e Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries Winter driving Check the following in particular before the cold season e The engine coolant must contain at least 50 glycol This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C To achieve opti mum antifreeze protection different types of glycol must not be mixed e The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre vent condensation e Engine oil viscosity is important Oils with lower viscosity thinner oils facilitate star ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold For 07 During your journey Recommendations during driving 07 07 During your journey Recommendations during driving more information on suitable oils see page 383 D IMPORTANT Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather e The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected Cold weather places great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold e Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir To a
165. bro ken bulb has been replaced then we rec ommend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop Lamps 09 Outside lighting such as headlamps fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens This is normal all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time Location of front bulbs Position parking lamps LED in Xenon headlamps 2 Main beam in Xenon headlamps Extra main beam in Xenon headlamps Q 09 Maintenance and service 09 Dipped beam in Xenon headlamps 2 PJ Loosen the screw with a Torx tool Cover for main dipped beam lamps Xenon lamps in Xenon headlamps size T30 O Indicator 5 Side marker lamps 3 EYTurn the locking pin anticlockwise EYPull out the locking pin Daytime running lights LED or bulb 4 Release the headlamp by alternatel depending on variant E poy y tilting and pulling it out Headlamps front O IMPORTANT All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment Loosen and remove the whole headlamp Take care when lifting out the headlamp so as not to damage any parts gt 16 Press down the catch 1 K Press the hooks together F Unplug the connector Angle out the cover Place the headlight on a soft surface so 2 Replace the relevant bulb as instructed as not to scratch the lens IMPORTANT Do n
166. by pressing OK MENU FAV store a preset The FAV button can be used to store func tions that are used frequently so that the function can be started simply by pressing FAV You can select a favourite e g Equalizer for each function as follows In RADIO mode o AM e FM1 FM2 e DAB1 DAB2 2 a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction In MEDIA mode DISC USB iPod Bluetooth AUX TV It is also possible to select and store a favourite for MY CAR CAM and NAV Favourites can also be selected and stored under MY CAR For more information on the menu system MY CAR see page 207 To store a function in the FAV button Select a main source e g RADIO MEDIA Select a wavelength or source AM Disc etc Press and hold the FAV button until the favourites menu is shown Turn TUNE to select an option from the list and press OK MENU to save gt When the main source e g RADIO MEDIA is active the stored function is available via a short press on FAV General information on infotainment General audio settings Press SOUND to access the audio settings menu Bass Treble etc Scroll forward with SOUND or OK MENU to your selection e g Treble Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save the setting with OK MENU Continue pressing SOUND or OK MENU to access other options e Surround Can be set to the On Off position When On is selected the sys te
167. by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi tion Home safe and approach lighting The light on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting or home safe lighting is selected see page 97 Heated windscreen rear window and door mirrors G045906 1 Heating windscreen 2 Heating rear window and door mirrors The function is used to remove ice and mist ing from the windscreen rear window and door mirrors One press of the respective button starts the heating The light in the button indicates that the function is active Switch off the heating 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D Windows rearview and door mirrors 03 gt gt 107 E 03 Your driving environment Windows rearview and door mirrors as soon as the ice misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily How ever the function is switched off automati cally after a certain time Refer to the section Heated windscreen and max defroster on page 222 The door mirrors and rear window are demis ted defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than 7 C Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Climate settings Auto start rear defrost Select between On or Off For a description of the menu system
168. c function deactivated for a short while now it is possi ble to close by continually holding the button pulled up One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly Operating without auto Move one of the controls up down gently The power windows move up down as long as the control is held in position Operating with auto Move one of the controls up down to the end position and release it The window runs automatically to its end position Operating with the remote control key and central locking To remotely operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or from inside with central locking see pages 46 and 57 03 Your driving environment E 03 E 03 Your driving environment 03 Windows rearview and door mirrors Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the func tion for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly 1 Gently raise the front section of the but ton to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second Release the button briefly Raise the front section of the button again for one second A reset must take place for pinch protec tion to work 1 Only in combination with power seat with memory see page 84 Door mirrors G047483 Door mirror controls Adjusting 1 Press the L button for the left hand door mirror or the R button for the
169. care IMPORTANT When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened the alarm is triggered 02 Locks and alarm Interference to remote control key Locking function Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the Keyless function In cars with automatic gearbox selectors 02 the gear selector must be set to the P position otherwise the car can be neither locked nor alarmed Do not place store the remote control key Unlocking Unlocking with Keyless drive takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tail gate s rubberised pressure plate is actuated open the door or tailgate as normal with keyless function near a mobile phone or metal object no closer than 10 15 cm If interference is experienced nonetheless use the remote control key and the key blade like a traditional remote control key see Cars with the Keyless drive system have a touch page 46 sensitive area on the outer handle of the doors The door handles normally register a hand and a rubberised button next to the tailgate s that takes hold of the handle but with MURDERER Pressure Piate thick gloves on or after a very quick hand Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping movement a second attempt may be one of the door handles or pressing the required or with the glove taken off smaller of the tailgate s two rubberised but tons the lock indicator in the windscreen confirms that locking
170. cates that the button is ready for programming Aim the original remote control towards the HomeLink button to be programmed and hold it 5 30 cm from the button Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink Press and hold the button on the original remote control Do not release the button until the indicator lamp has changed from a yellow light to either red or green If the indicator lamp is red make a new 03 Your driving environment E attempt to program the remote control holding the original remote control at a different distance from the HomeLink button A green light indicates that pro gramming was successful 4 Depress the HomeLink button being programmed hold it depressed for 5 seconds and then release it Repeat if necessary until the garage door is acti vated If the door is not activated press the programmed HomeLink button and hold it depressed and check the indicator lamp gt Steady green light The indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed this indi cates that the programming is com plete The garage door gate or similar should now be activated when the pro grammed HomeLink button is depressed Flashing green light The indicator lamp flashes while the button is held depressed In which case continue with the programming steps 5 7 in order to complete the programming of a device with rolling code usually a garage door opene
171. ccstasssuencccenoessesecsdeudedeseneccevanees 118 O pee a E aaa co oc ceenceceendcnccsecedccedesereceseeenecees ess 125 FOOMDFAKG a Tenant irre see A 131 Parking Drak Geese e 133 9 Home rt 134 3 66 Option accessory for more information see Introduction YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT Ii Tisi E 03 Your driving environment Instruments and controls m Instrument overview G046257 Left hand diva CC OOO ee 00 O0 O Y OS Menus and messages direction indicators main dipped beam trip computer Cruise control Horn airbags Combined instrument panel Menu navigation audio control phone control START STOP ENGINE button Ignition switch Screen for infotainment and display of menus Door handle Control panel Hazard warning flash ers 204 95 9i 232 148 150 88 20 71 207 249 2517276 aie 81 248 249 207 5 62 104 106 94 MEA A B 00 000e Control panel for info tainment system and menu navigation Control panel for cli mate control Gear selector Parking brake Wipers and washing Steering wheel adjust ment Bonnet opener Light switch opener for tailgate Seat adjustment 249 251 207 218 118 133 101 102 88 338 89 58 84 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D Instruments and controls Function Page 03 gt gt 69 0
172. ce for road respon siveness or steering sensitivity Go to the menu system MY CAR and locate Settings gt Car settings Steering wheel force and select Low Medium or High For a description of the menu system see page 207 This menu cannot be accessed while the car is in motion 05 240 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Comfort inside the passenger compartment Storage spaces 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 242 Comfort inside the passenger compartment Storage compartment in door panel Storage compartment driver s side Ticket clip O Storage compartment Glovebox QO Storage compartment cup holder Y Jacket holder 8 Cup holder in rear seat Storage pocket 10 Storage compartment rear seat WARNING Keep loose objects such as mobile phones cameras remote controls for accessories etc in the glove compartment or other compartments Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision 4 With ice scraper holder on the driver s side Not applicable to textile upholstery N Storage compartment driver s side WARNING Do not keep any sharp objects in the com partment or objects which protrude Jacket holder The jacket holder is only designed for light clothing Tunnel console G045723 Storage compartment e g for CDs and USB
173. chieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of Snow or ice The use of winter tyres is a legal require ment in certain countries Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries 07 Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts 07 During your journey Refuelling Refuelling Opening the fuel filler flap manually Opening closing the fuel filler flap G046395 iS Y 10 Y 2 oO e Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler x t co 9 Y o The fuel filler flap can be opened manually opening Take care to insert the nozzle when it cannot be opened from outside properly into the filler pipe The filler pipe Open the fuel filler flap by slightly press l l consists of two opening covers The noz ing in the rear part of the hatch Open remove the side hatch in the cargo zle must be pushed past both covers Take out the flap l l l Carefully pull the line back in a straight e Do not overfill the tank but fill until the Close the flap after fuelling line The flap can now be opened from pump nozzle cuts out outside To lock unlock the fuel filler flap see page 59 o lock unloc flap pag NOTE The fuel filler flap s lock logic also follows IMPORTANT keyless drive and central locking s locking Q PLA Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot and unlocking respective
174. cking button all doors are locked If any of the rear doors is open it will lock when it is closed Press and hold at least 2 seconds to also close all the side windows simultaneously Global opening Press and hold the central locking button at least 4 seconds to also open all the win dows simultaneously for example to quickly ventilate the passenger compartment during hot weather Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automati cally when the car starts to move The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings Automatic door locking For a description of the menu system see page 207 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 02 o 02 Locks and alarm 02 98 Locking unlocking Lock cylinder glovebox Tailgate fj D ORTANT k Manual opening e Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock just gently press the rubberised panel e Do not place the lift force on the rub ber panel when opening the rear hatch lift the handle Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel Unlocking with the remote control key G046402 The glovebox can only be locked unlocked using the remote control key s detachable Rubber plate with electrical contact key blade For information on the key blade The tailgate is he
175. cnansancosanes 222 Air conditioning system pel A e 344 Air distribution 216 224 Air quality system IAQS 0ooocococicccncnnnncnnos 224 Alr VOM Ss oda 217 A PEET PE E EAN A O 63 alarm indicator 0is lt aviecassscctaccnuianinnvadewceaei 63 allann SiN AlS stone prision 64 ATE o A A 63 checking the alarM occcconnnncccnnnno o 47 deactivate es sannscaced dato cipciciasaias 63 deactivating a triggered alarm 64 reduced alarm level cccccssseeeeeeeees 64 A e 111 Allergy and asthma inducing substances 216 Approach light CUratiON scicociiozan 46 97 Audio o PA 253 SUMTOUNG cinvasisenadinanearanndunsaienawnaceas 248 253 PUNO SUS Misa dos 248 Ugo AAA MPA 253 DEMI Wariano laca epica 248 Audio volume noriosacacia caida venis 249 PINGING iia ciales 279 phone media player ccccoocnccccoccn 279 ring signal PRO Sussicoasaic 279 speed noise compensation 253 Auto climate control settings 221 Automatic Car WaSh8S ccooooccccnnoccnnnnnnnonss 368 Automatic gearboOX sssessssssrssssrrrresreen 119 manual gear positions Geartronic 120 towing and recOVel Y cocccconccicconccnonnonons 315 AA 3 310 Automatic lOCKINQO ccccccoccccccnocinononccnnnnos 57 Automatic KElOCKING caciocioriosi dirias 56 Auxiliary heater oooooccononicccononnccconnnnononnanons 230 AUX MU scrape 248 270 AG eS Ercan 83 front seat lowerinQ cccconcnn
176. co 230 O mputA AR 232 Adapting driving characteristics 240 Comfort inside the passenger compart o A AA AA 241 iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction Table of contents Gi Gi Table of contents 06 Infotainment system Med a External audio source via AUX USB IO gt EE lt 07 During your journey Recommendations during driving 296 RECIMO A team ascnet eset 299 FU antece o e Amn Ney 301 a ale eraa O 304 Ce gt lt e A 307 Diving With atrailer Wi sss 309 Towing and teeevery A 315 4 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres General a cca attrac anne 320 Changing WwihCelS ocsi reeet ns 324 Ivre pres sure aam nE a a eat 328 Warning triangle and first aid kit 329 Emergency puncture repair TMk 330 Table of contents Gi 01 10 00 111 09 Maintenance and service 10 Specifications 11 Alphabetical Index Engine CoOMPartment ens 338 Type designations srmn 376 Alphabetical Index cocoonccnnconmomm om 410 Enae O 345 Dimensions and welightS oomncnnco 378 Wiper blades and washer fluid 352 Engine SpecitiCatlOmS 0 c cc tee ccse esnose 382 Balle ly Soest Sr accents er ee ear ee 355 EN E 383 EEES AMA AAA 359 Astana lubricaMiS E 385 o ACA AA 368 le A PAPA 387 Wheel and tyres dime
177. commendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for a few minutes in order to allow the gearbox to cool down e If the car overheats the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily e Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive It is normal for the engine s cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off Open tailgate Do not drive with an open tailgate Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area Do not overload the battery The electrical functions in the car load the battery to varying degrees Avoid using the key position Il when the engine is switched off Instead use the I mode which uses less power Also be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system Do not use func tions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off Examples of such functions are e ventilation fan e headlamps e windscreen wiper e audio system high volume If the starter battery s voltage is low then the information display in the combined instru ment panel shows the text Low battery Power save mode The energy saving func tion then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventila tion fan and or audio system In which case charge the battery by star ting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes
178. ction 04 Driver UN 04 175 04 Driver support Collision Warning with Auto Brake 8 Pedestrian Detection The windscreen Clean the wind The windscreen Wait It may take Dirt has appeared Visit a workshop to surface in front of screen surface in surface in front of several minutes for between the inside have the wind the camera is dirty front of the camera the camera has the camera to of the windscreen screen inside the or covered with ice from dirt ice and been cleaned but measure the visibil and the camera camera cover or snow snow the message ity cleaned an author remains ised Volvo work Thick fog heavy No action At times shop is recom rain or snow means the camera does mended that the camera not work during 04 does not work suffi heavy rain or snow ciently well fall Symbols and text messages As Collis n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off Tey Shown when the engine is started The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button Collision warn The collision warning system cannot be activated A Bie Unavailable Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button Auto braking was Auto Brake has been active activated The message clears after one press of the OK button 176 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support U
179. ction that enables the voice recognition system to learn to know your voice and your accent The function provides an opportunity to voice train two user profiles The help functions can be accessed by pressing the MY CAR button on the control panel in the centre console and then turning TUNE to the desired menu option Instructions The instructions can be started in two ways OLE This instruction and voice training can only be started when the car is parked e Press the button for Voice recognition and say Voice tutorial e Activate the instructions in the menu sys tem MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings Voice tutorial For a descrip tion of the menu system see page 207 The instructions are divided into 3 lessons which take around 5 minutes in total to com plete The system starts with the first lesson To skip a lesson and go to the next one press the button for voice recognition and say Next Go back to the previous lesson by saying Previous Exit the instructions by means of a long press on the button for voice recognition Voice training The system displays up to fifteen phrases for you to say Voice training can be started in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings Voice training Choose between User 1 or User 2 For a description of the menu system see page 207 After voice training has been completed remember to set your user profile under Voice user s
180. d approx 10 km h The lamp in the button is parking manoeuvre there may be a illuminated in order to indicate that the sys ah ri i When reversing with e g a trailer on the tow l i En dek ci emee gt O eee ol gt H tem is activated When the speed is below other objects since the sensors are bar rear parking assistance is switched off iO kmh n svetemis reactivated temporarily unable to function opti automatically otherwise the sensors would y i mally react to the trailer IMPORTANT When auxiliary lamps are fitted Remember that these must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle When reversing with e g a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar without Volvo genu ine trailer wiring parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 187 Y 04 Driver support 04 188 Park assist syst Fault indicator Cleaning the sensors If the combined instrument panel s information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the text message Park assist syst Service required is shown then parking assistance is disengaged Dirt ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement IMPORTANT Under some circumstances the parking sensors can give false warning signals due to external sound sources whic
181. d to engine throttle steering and brake sys tems amongst other things This information may include details regarding the way the driver drives the vehicle such as vehicle speed brake and accelerator pedal use steering wheel movement and whether or not the driver and passengers have used their seatbelts For the reasons given this informa tion may be stored in the vehicle s computers for a certain length of time but also as a result of a collision or incident This informa tion may be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and quality and as long as there are legal requirements and other regulations that Volvo needs to consider Volvo will not contribute to the above descri bed information being disclosed to third par ties without the vehicle owner s consent However due to national legislation and reg ulations Volvo may be required to disclose such information to authorities such as police authorities or others who may assert a legal right to have access to it To be able to read and interpret the informa tion recorded by the computers in the vehicle requires special technical equipment that Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to Volvo is responsible that the information which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling com plies with applicable legal re
182. d be performed The follow ing table shows some examples START STOP ae A KA KA Engine in Auto Start Eco DRIVe OFF Auto Start Stop Service required Engine management system Autostart Engine running acoustic signal Engine in Auto Start Press Start button Depress clutch pedal to start Depress brake pedal to start Press brake and clutch to start Start Stop Illuminates for a few seconds after Start Stop has been activated M A Illuminates for a few seconds after Start Stop has been switched off M A Start Stop is not operational Contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is rec M A ommended An automatic function check is carried out M A Activated if the driver s door is opened with auto stopped engine M A The engine is ready to start automatically waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be M depressed The engine will not start automatically start the engine as normal with the START STOP M ENGINE button The engine is ready to auto start waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed M The engine is ready to auto start waiting for the brake pedal to be depressed M The engine is ready to auto start waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed M n 2 A a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN 03 gt gt 129 UY 03 Your driving environment Start Stop Put gear in neutral
183. d fit them l Take along extra batteries for a long journey 3 Refit the cover 06 INFO Information about the current gt programme song etc Also 0 NOTE used when there is more infor mation available than can be shown in the TV screen Be sure to dispose of the exhausted bat teries in an environmentally safe manner ER Selection of language for sound track Option accessory for more information see Introduction 293 294 Recommendations A A 296 MA Ma Geert Ware 8 a con 5 iocsice dean E T 299 Fuel a a ee E ea E Ea E a E E ARa 301 Eo Neh DAE A a A 304 TAJO CAME ener o na e ae a aT e ai t E N 307 Driving with El AA ADO TOWING ANC FECOV Cris arte Senter Ter aa rrr geen Feel ert a ol DURING YOUR JOURNEY 07 During your journey Recommendations during driving General Economical driving Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driv ing style and speed to the prevailing condi tions e Drive in the highest gear possible adap ted to the current traffic situation and road lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption e Avoid driving with open windows e Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking e Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel consumption e Use engine braking to slow down when it can take place without risk to other road users e A roof load and ski b
184. d in parts on the work of the FreeType Team This software uses parts of SSLeay Library Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved Combined Instrument Panel Software Open Source Software Notice This product uses certain free open source and other software originating from third parties that is subject to the GNU General Public License version 2 and 3 GPLv2 GPLv3 GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 LGPLv3 The FreeType Project License FreeType License and other different and or additional copyright licenses disclaimers and notices The links how to access the exact terms of GPLv2 GPLv3 LGPLv3 and the other open source software licenses disclaimers acknowledgements and notices are provided to you below Please refer to the exact terms of the relevant License regarding your rights under said licenses Volvo Car Corporation VCC offers to provide the source code of said free open source software to you for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution such as the cost of media shipping and handling upon written request Please contact your nearest Volvo Dealer This offer is valid for a period of at least three 3 years from the date of the distribution of this product by VCC or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support Portions of this product uses software copyrighted O v2 4 3 2010 The FreeTypeProject www freetype org All right
185. d insert in the com partment behind the centre console and locate a spring loaded button in the bot tom of the compartment Press and hold the button Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions 3 The gear lever s gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option as the Geartronic automatic gearbox descri bed in the previous section Powershift or Geartronic In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift trans mission this can be verified by checking the designation on the gearbox label under the bonnet see page 376 The designa tion MPS6 means that it is Powershift trans mission otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission To bear in mind The transmission s double clutch has over load protection that is activated if it becomes too hot e g if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate and the warning symbol illuminates and the combined instrument panel shows a message The transmission can also overheat during slow driving in queues 10 km h or slower on an uphill gradi ent or with a trailer hitched The transmission cools down when the car is stationary with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed 4 One exception is the heading Geartronic Winter mode Powershift enables dri
186. d make a new start attempt Error reading the remote control key during starting Try to start again If the error persists Insert the remote control key into the ignition switch and try to start again Error in immobiliser system during starting If the error persists Contact a work shop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended For starting the car see page 115 02 Locks and alarm E Remote control key key blade 02 Os 02 Locks and alarm 02 46 Remote control key key blade Functions G045797 5 button remote control key Locking Unlocking Approach light duration Bax Tailgate Panic function co o 10 fo 0 Remote control key with PCC Personal Car Communicator Ei Information Function buttons Locking Locks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is activated Press and hold at least 2 seconds to close all windows simultaneously WARNING If windows are closed using the remote control key check that nobody s hands are trapped Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tail gate while the alarm is deactivated y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Press and hold at least 4 seconds to open all windows simultaneously The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously to unlocking the driver s door only with one press of the but ton and after a further press of the button within 10 seconds unl
187. d spilling fuel onto the paintwork Wash off any spillage with deter gent and water IMPORTANT Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm IMPORTANT Diesel type fuels that must not be used e Special additives e Marine diesel fuel e Heating oil e FAME Fatty Acid Methyl Ester and vegetable oil These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty Empty tank The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel the tank may need to be vented in the 1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME but further amounts must not be added workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check Do this before starting the engine once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel 1 Insert the remote control key in the igni tion switch and push it in to the end posi tion See page 81 2 Press the START button without depressing the brake and or clutch pedal 3 Wait approx 1 minute 4 To start the engine Depress the brake and or clutch pedal and then press the START button again Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage Stop the car on as
188. de structure The menus shown on the display in the com Service status bined instrument panel are controlled with the Messages left hand stalk switch The menus shown depend on key position see page 81 If a Oil level message appears then this must be acknowl Parking heater edged with OK for the menus to be shown Trip computer reset 1 Certain engines 2 The number of messages is indicated in brackets 204 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Message When a warning information or indicator symbol illuminates a corresponding message appears in the display An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified Press OK see the figure in the section Com bined instrument panel on page 204 in order to confirm a message Scroll through mes sages with the thumbwheel If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer the message must be read press OK before the previ ous activity can be resumed Stop safely Stop engine Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage consult a work shop Stop and switch off the engine Serious risk of damage consult a work shop Service urgent Service required See manual Book time for mainte nance Time for reg ular mainte nance Maintenance overdue 3 A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button Contact a works
189. destrians on or beside the road e If there are highly reflective objects such as signs in the vicinity of the road e When the lighting from oncoming traf fic is obscured by e g a crash barrier e When there is traffic on connecting roads On the brow of a hill or in a hollow In sharp bends For more information on the limitations of the camera sensor see page 175 Active Xenon headlamps ABL G021143 Headlamp pattern with function deactivated left and activated right respectively If the car is equipped with active Xenon head lamps Active Bending Lights ABL then the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maxi mum lighting in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety The function is activated automatically when the car is started provided that it has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR In the event of a fault in the func tion the symbol illuminates in the com bined instrument panel at the same time as the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN Lighting 03 93 UY 03 Your driving environment 03 Lighting Sa Headlamp The system is Oe system disengaged Visit A malfunc a workshop if tion Serv the message ice remains Volvo required recommends that you contact an authori
190. disc tracks preset radio sta Steering wheel keypad with without tions does not apply to DAB or chapters thumbwheel only applies to DVD discs Long press fast winds disc tracks or searches for the next Display screen The display screen is Aera or available in two sizes 5 and 7 inch The manual shows a 7 inch display screen SOUND press for access to audio set tings bass treble etc For more informa O Centre console control panel tion see page 253 VOL raise or lower volume ON OFF MUTE short press starts the system and long press until the screen is off switches off Note that the whole of the Sensus system including navigation and phone functions starts switches off at the same time Briefly press to mute the sound MUTE or restore the sound if it had been switched off 06 5 Disc insert and eject slot O Disc eject T Main sources press to select the main source e g RADIO MEDIA Last active source is shown e g FM1 A new source view is selected if the main source button is pressed while in RADIO or MEDIA If you are in TEL or NAV and press the main source G047185 gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 249 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment 06 250 button then a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options OK MENU press the thumbwheel in the steering wheel o
191. driv er s seat and door mirrors Proceed as fol lows e Adjust the seat as you want it e Lock the car by pressing the lock button on the remote control key that you nor mally use This stores the positions of the 2 For key memory for Keyless function see page 54 seat and door mirrors in the remote con trol key s memory e Unlock the car by pressing the unlock button on the same remote control key and open the driver s door The driver s seat and door mirrors will automatically adopt the positions that are stored in the remote control key s memory if the seat has been moved since you locked the Car The key memory can be activated deacti vated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Car key memory For a description of the menu sys tem see page 207 Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key The driver s door must then be open 3 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors 4 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat s memory function 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction WARNING Risk of crushing Make sure that children do
192. driver s seat and power mirrors 4 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors this chapter describes functions available in all variants If there are children in the car Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The remaining remote control keys must then be taken to the workshop The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention meas ure The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the menu system MY CAR under Information Number of keys For a description of the menu system see page 207 Key memory door mirrors driver s seat and steering force The settings are automatically connected to each respective remote control key see pages 84 106 and 240 When locking with the remote control key the setting of the com bined instrument panel s theme is saved in the key see pages 72 and 209 The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Car key memory For a description of the menu system see page 207 For remote control keys with keyless function see page 52 Indicator for locking unlocking When the car is locked or unlocked using the remo
193. dscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice snow mist and dirt Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working If the message Active main beam Temporary unavailable Switch manually is shown in the combined instrument panel s information display then you have to switch manually between main and dipped beam However the knob for headlamp control is still in position Ep The same applies if the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual and the symbol are shown The symbol goes out when these messages are shown AHB may be temporarily unavailable e g in situations with dense fog or heavy rain When AHB becomes available again or the wind screen sensors are no longer blocked the message goes out and the symbol illu minates AHB is an aid for using optimum light composition when conditions are favoura ble The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require IMPORTANT Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required e In heavy rain or dense fog In freezing rain In snow flurries or slush In moonlight When driving in poorly lit built up areas e When the traffic ahead has weak light ing e lf there are pe
194. duction 23 S 01 Safety Side airbags SIPS bags Side airbag a N ite o o In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS Side Impact Protection System to beams pillars the floor the roof and other structural parts of the body The side airbags at the driver s and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS The SIPS bag system consists of two main components side airbag and sensors The side airbags are located in the front seat backrests CO Location The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision Child seats and side airbags The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag WARNING e Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop Defective work in the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury e Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel since this area is requ
195. e battery in your car and remove the cover 6 Connect the red jump lead s other clamp onto the car s positive terminal 2 7 Connect one of the black jump lead s clamps to the donor battery s negative terminal 3 8 Connect the other clamp to a grounding point e g right hand engine mounting at the top the outer screw head 4 9 Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting procedure 10 Start the engine of the donor car and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx 1500 rpm 11 Start the engine in the car with the dis charged battery IMPORTANT Do not use the connections when attempt ing to start as there is a risk of sparking 12 Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red gt Make sure that none of the black jump lead s clamps comes into contact with the battery s positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead e The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas which is highly explosive A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con nected incorrectly and this can be enough for the battery to explode e The battery contains sulphuric acid which can cause serious burns e f sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes skin or clothing flush with large quantities of water If acid splashes into the eyes seek medical attention immediately For more informat
196. e cruise control The driver must be familiar with this information before using the adaptive cruise control The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed even when the adaptive cruise con trol is being used IMPORTANT Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Automatic gearbox Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control s Queue Assistant see page 155 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may differ depending on car model 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Function eee a he 7 k ja S Sie 2 Function overview 1 Warning lamp braking by driver required 2 Steering wheel keypad Radar sensor Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing system 04 Driver support UN Adaptive cruise control WARNING The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time inter Warning lamp braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system The driver must inter vene if the system does not detect a vehi cle in front The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy cles Nor for oncomin
197. e 56 e The glovebox lock opens see page 58 e the airbag for front passenger seat PACOS can be activated deactivated see page 22 02 Locks and alarm 8 Remote control key key blade Removing the key blade Unlocking doors with the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the 02 remote control key e g if the batteries are discharged then the left hand front door can be opened as follows 1 Unlock the left hand front door with the key blade in the door handle s lock cylin der To see a figure and for more information see page 54 1 Slide the spring loaded catch to the side When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened the alarm is At the same time pull the key blade triggered straight out backwards Attaching the key blade 2 Deactivate the alarm by inserting the Carefully refit the key blade into its location in remote control key in the ignition switch the remote control key For a car with Keyless Drive see page 54 1 Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot 2 Lightly press the key blade You should hear a click when the key blade is locked in O 02 Locks and alarm 02 50 Battery replacement remote control key PCC Replacing the battery The batteries should be replaced if e the information symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel and its infor mation display show
198. e Singa IEA J ID KRSSWIK49264 Standards DB01752 pore IDA t d d 28TT SWK49264 maw Wie standards a CCABNBLPB40TS s DA105753 momo CE Compiles wih IDA IDA Infocomm Development TA 20 Hong Kong Authority of Singapore Dn on Continental y g p SWK4 9209 Brazil AT Keyless lock system Keyless drive nt Country i EU a Continental SWIX4 9265 C E Europe C Delphi Electronics 8 Safety hereby declares that L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR Korea are in compliance with the Continental essential requirements and R other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC This dec laration of conformity may if necessary be consulted with Delphi Electronics amp Safety One Corporate Center Kokomo Indiana 46904 9005 USA 10 Specifications Type approval Bluetooth Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity coumes O Countries in the EU Exporting country Japan Manufacturer Alpine Electronics Inc Type of equipment Bluetooth device For further information visit http ec europa eu enterprise rtte fag htm informing 01 10 00 111 01 10 00 111 10 Specifications Type approval EA AEALPINE E A633 LPINE a as ils tao GEC LAI THEN af COSO TV DEA EA THOS ef COSO AM TY 1 h e e Ls lA im Di eg Lopes eras h eee Oe O ie io ss eggs basie e e FT y Y gg de es o e a el a A od MER de A A e es ME y PD es A ey Se ee A as Er ei a a mer i im
199. e applied at least a lit tle more firmly e When parking the vehicle always engage 1st gear for manual gearbox or put the gear selector in position P for automatic gearbox Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill e Turn the wheels away from the kerb If the car is parked facing downhill e Turn the wheels towards the kerb Disengaging the parking brake 1 Press the foot brake pedal down firmly 2 Pull the lever up slightly press the button release the lever and release the button Parking brake gt The combined instrument panel s warning symbol extinguishes If the driver forgets to release the parking brake in addition to the illuminated warning lamp a pinging sound combined with a message in the combined instrument panel alerts the driver of this when the car s speed exceeds 10 km h 03 Your driving environment E 03 133 E 03 Your driving environment 03 134 General ES cr o qT o 0 HomeLink is a programmable remote con trol which is integrated in the rearview mirror and can remotely control up to three different devices e g garage door opener alarm sys tem outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc and in doing so replace their remote controls In addition to the three programmable but tons there is also an indicator lamp in the panel HomeLink cannot be activated when the car is locked from the outside For more information on HomeL
200. e engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot In parallel with the text message the driver is also advised that the car s electronics are temporarily The examples in the table are no indication If a warning symbol combined with the text of the car being defective but show that a Transm overheat park safely is ignored safety function has been activated with a then the heat in the gearbox may become cs ies view to preventing damage to any of the so high that the power transmission changing the driving characteristics Follow car s components between engine and gearbox is temporar the instructions in the text message where ily halted in order to prevent the clutch appropriate gt gt E 03 Your driving environment Gearboxes from malfunctioning the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox tem perature has cooled to an acceptable level For more possible text messages with their 03 respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic transmission see page 205 A text message extinguishes automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk OK button Quieter and cleaner Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor poration s core values and it influences all of our operations This target orientatio
201. e from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap 08 Wheels and tyres Emergency puncture repair TMK 12 As soon as possible drive approximately 4 Fold the hose into the box and leave the Inflating the tyres 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km h so bottle where it is Place TMK in the cargo The car s original tyres can be inflated by the that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre area compressor 1 The compressor must be switched off Make sure that the switch is in position O Rechecking the repair and pressure 1 Reconnect the equipment The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must and locate the cable and air hose 2 Read the tyre pressure on the pressure be replaced after use Volvo recommends l gauge that this replacement is performed by an 2 Unscrew the wheel s dust cap and screw eif itis below 1 3 bar then the tyre is authorised Volvo workshop in the air hose valve connection to the insufficiently sealed The journey bottom of the thread on the tyre s air should not be continued Contact a WARNING valve tyre centre WARRING e If the tyre pressure is higher than 1 3 pls de a ab e bar the tyre must be inflated to the Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in pressure specified in accordance with Volvo recommends that you drive to the near danger to life Never leave the engine run the tyre pressure table see page 391 est authorised Volvo workshop for the ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf 1 bar 100 kPa Re
202. e in FM mode under found it is played for approx 10 seconds Service and Ensemble FM menu gt Advanced settings gt before scanning is resumed When a station e Service Channel radio channel only Alternative frequency is playing back it can be saved as a preset in audio services are supported by the sys the usual way see the section Preset page tem Regional radio programmes REG 260 e Ensemble A collection of radio chan vale mncton oo mE radio i Onne Tostart scanning go in FM AM mode to nels on the same frequency with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low The symbol REG shows that FM menu gt Scan or AM menu gt Scan the function is active Storing channel groups Ensemble learn When the vehicle is moved to a new broad casting area programming of existing chan nel groups in the area may be necessary Resetting RDS functions Radi t DAB Programming of channel groups creates an All radio settings can be reset to the original APIO Sy ets updated list of all available channel groups NOTE Activate deactivate in FM mode under l A FM menu gt Advanced settings gt REG Scamning stops if a station is saved factory settings General The list is not updated automatically The reset is carried out in FM mode under DAB Digital Audio Broadcasting is a digital Programming is carried out in the menu sys FM menu Advanced settings gt broadcasting system for radio This system tem in
203. e is also a package containing gloves and a wheel bag for the punctured wheel 3 Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example 4 Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers Use the removal tool to hook in and pull off any full wheel wheel covers Alternatively the wheel covers can be pulled away by hand 5 Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench until the stop position as shown in the following illustration o O Y y e 1 The wheel wrench and towing eye IMPORTANT The towing eye must be screwed into all threads in the wheel bolt wrench 6 Loosen the wheel bolts 72 1 turn anti clockwise with the wheel wrench WARNING Never position anything between the ground and the jack nor between the jack and the car s jacking point 7 There are two jacking points on each side of the car y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres 08 325 Changing wheels IMPORTANT The ground under the jack must be firm smooth and level 8 Wind up the jack so that the flange in the bodywork ends up in the notch in the head of the jack 9 Lift the car so that the wheel is free Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel 08 WARNING Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack Passengers must leave the car when it is
204. e legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country Tread depth Road conditions with ice slush and low tem peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 millimetres Using snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels also applies to all wheel drive cars Never drive faster than 50 km h with snow chains Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva lent chains designed for the car model and tyre and rim dimensions In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an acci dent Specifications The car has whole vehicle approval This means that certain combinations of wheels and tyres are approved For the permissible combinations see page 391 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Wheel rim dimensions Wheels rims have a designation of dimen sions for example 7Jx16x50 T Rim width in inches J Rim flange profile 16 Rim diameter in inches 50 Off setin mm distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub Tyre dimensions The dimensions are stated on all car tyres Example of designation 215 55R16 97W
205. e letters etc turn and lowercase letters with OK Receiving a vCard TUNE to one of the options see explana MENU It is possible to receive a vCard to the car s tion in the table below in the list 1 and phone book from other mobile phones other then press OK MENU lt gt A eel than the one currently connected to the car When the name has been fully entered select OK in the list on the TV screen 1 and press moves to the input field 2 at the top of the TV screen The cursor can now be moved In order to allow this the car is set to visible mode for Bluetooth The function is acti OK MENU Now continue with the telephone with TUNE to the appropriate vated in phone mode under Phone menu gt oe number in the same way as above place to e g insert new letters Phone book gt Receive vCard or delete with EXIT To be able een me bee ete gt ha a tel to insert new letters first go Memory status entered press and select a tele i one nunibe pe Mobilephone Home back to the input mode by Memory status of the car s paang book and Work or General Press OK MENU to con pressing OK MENU the connected mobile phone s phone book i i can be seen in phone mode under Phone ai menu Phone book Memory status 4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia gt gt sy Option accessory for more information see Introduction 283 06 Infotainment system 06 284 Bluetooth handsfree Del
206. e must be paired and connected via Bluetooth hands free If a telephone command is given and no mobile phone is paired then the system will provide information about this For informa tion on pairing and connecting a mobile phone see page 277 06 e Press the button for voice recognition 1 in order to activate the system and initiate a dialogue with voice commands The system will then display commonly used commands in the screen in the centre console Keep the following things in mind when you use the voice recognition system e Fora command speak after the tone with normal voice at normal speed e Do not speak while the system is replying the system cannot understand com mands during this time e The car s doors and windows must be closed e Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment If the driver is unsure of which command to use he she can say Help the sys tem then responds with a few different commands which can be used in the cur rent situation Voice commands can be disabled by e saying Cancel e not speaking e along press on the steering wheel but ton for Voice recognition e Press EXIT or another main source button e g MEDIA 286 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Help functions for voice recognition e Instructions A function that helps you get familiar with the system and the pro cedure for giving commands e Voice training A fun
207. e of the lt ORGANIZATION gt nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group This software uses parts of sources from libtess The Original Code is OpenGL Sample Implementation Version 1 2 1 released January 26 2000 developed by Silicon Graphics Inc The Original Code is Copyright c 1991 2000 Silicon Graphics Inc Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein All Rights Reserved Copyright C 1991 2000 Silicon Graphics Inc All Rights Reserved 10 Specifications
208. e of the car o Y ise Re t fo 0 LKA intervenes on the right hand side marked in red in the figure The Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away from the side line this is indicated with e RED line for the side in question e The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is restricted in a similar way to the human eye For more information see page 175 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction In certain demanding situations LKA may find it difficult to assist the driver correctly in which case it is recommended that LKA is switched off Examples of such a situation could be e roadworks winter road conditions poor road surface very sporty driving style poor weather with reduced visibility Hands on the steering wheel In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate the driver must have his her hands on the steer ing wheel LKA continual monitors this If hands are not detected on the steering wheel a text message encouraging the driver to actively steer the car is shown If the driver does not follow the request to begin steering the Lane Keeping Aid goes into standby mode and will remain in this mode until the driver begins to steer the car again r y L Gurmnhnhale ANA tawt mae A a gt VWMDO SS and te YT I n AS Ac wy n IDOIS ana LOCAL MICs Ae In situations where the LKA function fails or is interrupted the combined instrument panel 04 Driver support UN Driver
209. e page 62 2 Rear window controls E Front window controls Check that no rear seat passengers are trapped when the windows are closed from the driver s door Check that children or other passengers are not trapped if the windows are closed even when the remote control key is used If there are children in the car remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by selecting key posi tion O and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car For infor mation on key positions see page 82 G047482 Operating the power windows E gt Operating without auto Operating with auto All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver s door the con trol panels for the other doors can only each operate their respective power window Only one control panel can be operated at a time In order for the power windows to be used the key position must be at least I see page 81 The power windows can be oper ated for a few minutes after the engine has been switched off and after the remote con trol key has been removed although not after a door has been opened Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its movement It is possible to override the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted e g if there is ice forming After two succes sive closing interruptions the pinch protection will be forced and the automati
210. e phone Accept incoming calls confirm your selection or go to the Phone menu by pressing OK MENU TUNE Turn in normal view to the right to access the phone book and to the left for the call register for all calls also used for navigation among the options on the TV screen EXIT Cancels rejects phone calls dele tes input characters leads up in the menu system and cancels the current function If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 249 For a description of the remote control see page 292 D gt mm wn lke a na AAM ANAhAK Arn iT Jol Y Activate A short press on TEL activates searches last connected phone If a phone is already con nected and TEL is pressed a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options for the phone The symbol indicates that a phone is connected Connect an external Bluetooth device A maximum of ten external devices can be registered Registration is performed once per device After registration the device no longer needs to be activated as visible searchable If the phone s operating system is updated then it is possible that the registration of the phone is interrupted In which case disconnect the phone see page 279 and then reconnect it see page 277 It is pos
211. e recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged NOTE The noise level increases as the fan is operating at max When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings Recirculation When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates The function is selected to shut out bad air exhaust gases etc from the passenger compartment The air in the passenger compartment is recirculated i e no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated IMPORTANT If the air in the car recirculates for too long there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the out side temperature This reduces the risk of ice misting and bad air Activate deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Climate settings gt Recirculation timer For a description of the menu system see page 208 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D 05 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 224 Climate control Nowa Activate deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Climate Cars with Start Stop With an auto stopped engine certain equip When max defroster is selected recircula e 3 Interi j lity syst ata settings Interior
212. e size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity e g motorcycles This could mean that the warning lamp illumi nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Distance Warning Symbols and text messages Symbol Specification y Radar blocked See Distance Warning temporarily disengaged a manual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles e g in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 157 Collision warn Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged Vas Service required Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended A The symbols are schematic 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support fA 04 163 Y 04 Driver support 04 164 City Safety General City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues amongst other things when changes in the traffic ahead combined with a lapse in attention could lead to an incident The function is active at speeds under 50 km h
213. e steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely For optimum results Wait until the steering wheel has been turned before starting to drive backwards forwards 3 Straightening up D gt G046214 When the car has reversed into the parking space it must be straightened up and stop ped 1 Engage first gear or D position wait until A text message indicates where the PAP the steering wheel has been turned then sequence was stopped drive slowly forwards 2 Stop the car when the graphics and text message so request Dirt ice and snow covering the sensors 3 Engage reverse gear and drive back will reduce their function and may prevent wards slowly until the graphics and text measurement message tell you to stop The function is disengaged automatically IMPORTANT when parking is complete and the graphics and text message show that parking is com Under certain circumstances PAP is unable to find parking spaces one reason for this may be the fact that there is inter ference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultra sound frequencies as those with which the plete It may be necessary for the driver to correct the positioning Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked O IMPORTANT system works The warning distance is shorter when the Examples of such sources include horns sensors are used by Active Park Assist wet tyres on asph
214. eater General information about the additional heater For cars with diesel engines sold in cold cli mate zones an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating tem perature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compartment In such instances the car is equipped with either e an additional electric heater or e a fuel driven additional heater Electric additional heater The heater cannot be controlled manually but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside tempera tures below 9 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached Fuel driven additional heater The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car which is perfectly normal Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater s automatic start sequence can be switched off if required 1 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned 2 For cars fitted with parking heaters see page 226 a i Option accessory for more information see Introduction ETT Y UN 11 ty l20 140 o CA E 010 0 Information display analogue combined instru
215. ed Volvo workshop Seatbelt ten In a frontal collision A There is no seatbelt tensioner at the centre rear seat sioner rear and or side impact B The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a A WARNING seatA accident and or over collision without airbag deployment A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit the speed turning of the car the angle of the collision etc affects how the Never drive with deployed airbags They different safety systems of the car are activated can make steering difficult Other safety Airbags In a frontal collision o systems may also be damaged The If the airbags have deployed the following is smoke and dust created when the airbags Steering wheel recommended are deployed can cause skin and eye irrita airbag knee air tion injury after intensive exposure In case e Recovering the car Volvo recommends bag passenger 9 Pp g that you have it conveyed to an author of irritation wash with cold water The airbag rapid deployment sequence and airbag ised Volvo workshop Do not drive with fabric may cause friction and skin burns Side airbags In a side impact acci deployed airbags SIPS dent e Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car s safety systems e Always contact a doctor NOTE The airbags and belt tensioner system are deployed only once during a collision
216. ed in different ways The front seats may need to be pushed forwards and or the backrests adjusted upwards in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully e Both sections can be folded separately e fthe entire backrest is to be folded then the different sections should be folded separately pe o EG 0 G046012 If the right hand section is being lowered release and adjust the centre seat head restraint downwards see page 85 The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the backrests are lowered Pull up the backrest s locking 03 Your driving environment ED handle while folding the backrest for ward at the same time A red indicator on the lock catch B shows that the back rest is no longer locked in place 03 When the backrests have been lowered the head restraints must be moved for ward slightly so as not to make contact with the seat cushion Raising takes place in reverse order When the backrest has been raised the red indicator should no longer be showing If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked prop erly after being folded up A E 03 Your driving environment 03 88 Steering wheel Adjusting G046607 PE eee A a Adjusting the steering wheel ap Lever releasing the steering wheel
217. efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up For more general information on heavy loads on the car see page 383 Anti lock braking system The car is equipped with ABS Anti lock Braking System which prevents the wheels from locking during braking This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example Vibra tion may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal A short test of the ABS system is made auto matically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made when the car reaches 10 km h The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking The function means that the brake light flashes instead of as in normal braking shining with a constant glow Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km h if the ABS system is working and or in the event of sudden brak ing Once the car s speed has been braked to below 10 km h the brake light stops flashing and returns to a normal constant glow haz ard warning flashers are activated at the same time which flash until the driver accel erates the car to at least 20 km h or they are switched off with their button see page 94 Cleaning the brake d
218. efore use The leather has now been given improved protection against stains and improved UV protection Washing instructions for the leather steering wheel e Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre moistened sponge and neutral soap e Leather needs to breathe Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic e Use natural oils Volvo s leather care agents are recommended for best results If the steering wheel has stains Group 1 ink wine coffee milk sweat and blood Use a soft cloth or sponge Mix a 5 ammonia solution For blood stains use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt Group 2 fats oils sauces and chocolate 1 Same procedure as for group 1 2 Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth Group 3 dry dirt dust 1 Use a soft brush to remove the dirt 2 Same procedure as for group 1 Treating stains on interior plastic metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth lightly moistened with water available from Volvo dealers is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces Do not scrape or rub stains Never use strong stain removers A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning Cleaning seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent A spe cial textile cleaning agent is available from your Volvo dealer Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract Q 09 Maintenance and service
219. ell as symbols on the centre console s screen indicate the dis tance to the detected obstacle Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console s VOL knob or in the 04 car s menu system MY CAR see page 207 Parking assistance is available in two vari ants e Rear only e Both front and rear When a towbar is configured with the car s electrical system the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space 1 Side warning see page 201 e Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver s own responsibility during parking e The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected e Be aware of e g people and animals near the car Function On Off for the sensors for parking assistance and CTA The system is automatically activated when the engine is started the switch s On Off lamp is illuminated If parking assistance is 186 Option accessory for more information see Introduction switched off with the button the lamp goes out G046146 Screen view showing an obstacle left front and right rear The centre console s screen shows an over view of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle Marked sectors show which of the four sen sor s detected an obstacle The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is the shorter the distance between the car and a
220. els the tyre pressure table on page 391 larger than those fitted as standard on the model s basic version then resistance e Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump increases seek advice on suitable tyres from a ealer e High speed results in increased wind resistance See further information and more advice on e Fuel quality road and traffic conditions pages 11 and 296 weather and the condition of the car See page 301 for general information on fuel Even a combination of the above mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption For further information please refer to the regulations referred to Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based To bear in mind Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce consumption 1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment EU driving cycles all in accordance with EU Directive 80 1268 EEC Euro 4 EU Regulation no 692 2008 715 2007 Euro 5 and UN ECE Regulation no 101 The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra urban driving Urban driving the measurement starts with cold starting the engine The driving is simulated Extra urban driving the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 120 km h The driving
221. em Drive to a workshop for checking Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working The car s regular brake system continues to work but without the ABS func tion 1 Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine Restart the engine If the symbol remains illuminated drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system Stability system sport mode Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal steering wheel move ments and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car Engine preheater diesel This symbol illuminates during engine pre heating Preheating mostly takes place due to low temperature Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low refuel as soon as possible Information read display text When one of the car s systems does not behave as intended
222. ems in the screen With Volvo Sensus the car can be 1 personalised by means of an intuitive user interface Settings can be made in Car set tings Infotainment Climate etc With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel s right hand keypad functions can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are pre sented such as City Safety Locks and alarm setting the clock etc With a press on the respective function RADIO MEDIA TEL NAV and CAM other sources systems and functions can be acti vated e g AM FM1 CD DVD TV Blue tooth navigation and park assist camera For more information on all functions systems see the respective section in the owner s manual y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN Key positions Insert and remove the remote control IMPORTANT L l Functions ms Foreign objects in the ignition switch can 0 Odometer clock and temperature impair the function or destroy the lock gauge a Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned Hold the end with the detachable key blade see page 49 The audio system can be used for 03 a limited time see page 248 Power seats can be adjusted Withdraw the key e Push the remote control key allow it to eject then pul
223. ended Prior to towing Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine Use a donor battery if the battery is dis 07 charged and the engine does not start see page 117 IMPORTANT The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow start the engine Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area Towing eye The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right hand side of the bumper front or rear To access the towing eye wheel wrench in Attaching the towing eye e oam bock r e Version 1 Lift the compressor unit for the emergency puncture repair kit point 5 to access the wheel wrench Lift out the bottle of sealant point 6 to access the towing eye Version 2 Lift the compressor unit for the emergency puncture repair kit point 5 to access the towing eye The wheel wrench is located underneath the jack The cover for the towing eye s attach ment point is opened as follows e The cover has a marking along one side or in a corner Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side corner at the same time the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange Turn in the towing eye firmly e g using the wheel wrench The towing eye is unscrewed after use Place the towing eye b
224. ends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo work shop 10 Specifications 01 10 00 111 10 Specifications 01 10 OO 1 Engine oil grade 10 Recommended oil grade Volume incl oil filter litres T2 B4164T4 Certified and factory filled oil Oil grade WSS M2C925 A approx 4 1 T3 B4164T3 options for service approx 4 1 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 Ue B41641 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 approx 4 1 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 De D4162T For the low emissions variant max tyre width 205 the recommendation for best fuel econ approx 3 8 omy is ACEA A5 B5 SAE OW 30 When driving under adverse conditions use ACEA A5 B5 SAE OW 30 D3 D5204T6 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 approx 5 9 D4 D5204T4 Viscosity SAE OW 30 approx 5 9 T4 B5204T8 Oil grade ACEA A5 B5 approx 5 5 T5 B5204T9 Viscosity SAE OW 30 approx 5 5 ES B5254T12 approx 5 5 T5 B5254T14 approx 5 5 A Engine code component and serial number can be read on the engine see page 376 For filling engine oil see page 339 10 Specifications 01 10 00 111 Fluids and lubricants Coolant Coolant Volume Volume Prescribed grade Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50 water see the pack litres litres 19 aging D2 D4162T 10 0 T4 B5204T8 Volume D3 D5204T6 an T5 B5204T9 ae litres D4 D5204T4 T5 B5254T12 T2 B4164T4 T5 B5254T14 13 B4164T3 7 0 A Engine code component and serial number can be read on
225. enly that the emergency brake lights have been activated at a speed below 10 km h The hazard warning flashers remain on when the car has stopped and are deacti vated automatically when the car is driven off again or the button is depressed For more information on emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers see page 131 Direction indicators flashers Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release The direction indicators flash three times The function can be activated deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings Light settings Triple indicator For a description of the menu system see page 208 Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually or automatically by the steering wheel movement Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols see page 75 Interior lighting G046415 Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting Reading lamp left hand side Passenger compartment lighting floor lamps and ceiling lamps On Off Ey Auto function for passenger compartment lighting Reading lamp right hand side All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when e the engine has been switched off and the c
226. ensor show dis tance If the car is also equipped with parking assis tance sensors see page 186 the distance indication will be more precise and the col oured areas show which of the 4 sensors is are registering an obstacle The colour of the areas changes with decreasing distance to the obstacle from light yellow to yellow to orange to red Colour paint Distance metres Light yellow 0 7 1 5 Yellow USO Orange 0 3 0 5 Red 0 0 3 Settings Press OK MENU when a camera view is shown Make the settings as desired Miscellaneous e The default setting is that the camera is activated when reverse gear is engaged e One press on CAM activates the camera even if reverse gear is not engaged Change between normal and zoomed image by turning TUNE or by pressing CAM Towbar The camera can be used to advantage when hitching a trailer A help line for the towbar s intended course towards the trailer can be shown in the display just as for the wheel tracks e The towbar can be zoomed in for preci sion manoeuvring with one press on CAM Pressing again gives normal view The towbar s park assist line is activated in the menu system MY CAR where a selection can be made between displaying the wheel g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support UN Colour paint Distance metres 04 gt gt 191 Y 04 Driver support Park assist camera tracks or towba
227. eries an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended For more information on the car s main bat tery see page 117 Start Stop Cars with the Start Stop function are equip ped with two 12 V batteries one extra pow erful battery for starting and one support bat tery that helps during the Start Stop func tion s starting sequence For more information on Start Stop see page 125 For more information on the car s main bat tery see page 117 and 393 Banery Start Support Cold start 7608 1208 capacity CCA A 800 180 Size 278x175x1908 150x90x1068 LxWxH mm 315x175x190 150x90x1300 Capacity 70 8 Ah 80 10 A According to EN standard B Manual gearbox C Automatic gearbox D Largest possible size IMPORTANT When replacing batteries in cars with the Start Stop function the AGM type batter ies must be fitted 1 Absorbed Glass Mat Temporarily reduced Start Stop function due The higher the current take off in the car extra cooling heating etc the more the batteries must be charged increased fuel consumption When the capacity of the battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start Stop function is disengaged to high current take off means The engine starts automatically without the driver depressing the clutch pedal manual gearbox The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his her foot off the foot brake pedal
228. es of passenger compartment filter Make sure that the cor rect filter is fitted Clean Zone Interior Package CZIP This option keeps the passenger compart ment clear of allergy and asthma inducing substances For more information on CZIP see the brochure included with the purchase of the car The following is included e Anenhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air The function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened e The air quality system IAQS is a fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from con taminants such as particles hydrocar bons nitrous oxides and ground level ozone To maintain the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depend ing on whichever occurs first However up to 75 000 km over 5 years In cars without CZIP and where the customer does not want to retain the CZIP standard the lAQS filter must be replaced during a regular service Use of tested materials in the interior equipment The materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the pas senger compartment and they contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean The carpets in both the passen
229. esel Control module radiator roller cover 4 cyl die sel Solenoid piston cooling 5 cyl diesel Turbo control valve 5 cyl diesel Oil level sensor 5 cyl diesel Solenoid clutch A C 6 cyl IN 34 S Ho ooeoe OO a gt a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Valves 4 cyl petrol Solenoids 4 cyl petrol Injectors 5 cyl petrol Lambda sond 5 cyl diesel Crankcase ventilation heater 5 cyl diesel Ignition coils petrol Diesel filter heater Glow plug control module 5 cyl diesel Engine control module 4 cyl Engine control module 5 cyl Throttle unit 5 cyl petrol ABS Engine control module Trans mission control module Airbags Light height control Electric control servo Central electronic module Collision warning system 10 10 15 10 as 10 10 15 000A Accelerator pedal sensor Charging point support battery Coolant pump when no parking 10 heater is available Under the glovebox A Y e E A A as A On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses Replacing fuses The fuses can be accessed when a protective cover has been removed from the fuse box 09 Maintenance and service QD 1 Take hold of the reces
230. esses on RESET 2 Press OK loop with all functions opens 3 Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select confirm with OK 4 Finish by pressing RESET twice after completed checking adjustment are listed in the following table The different functions of the trip computer 05 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Trip computer 05 236 Trip computer reset Average Average speed Messages Themes Settings Contrast mode Colour mode Parking heater Direct start Symbol Timer 1 leads to the menu for selecting time Symbol Timer 2 leads to the menu for selecting time Service status Oil levelA A Certain engines a gt a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 see the table in the sec tion Headings page 237 or the heading Resetting with Digital page 238 for information on the process For more information see page 205 Combined instrument panel appearance is selected here see page 72 Select Auto On or Off For more information see page 230 Adjusting the combined instrument panel s brightness and colour intensity For a description of programming the timer see page 226 Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service For more information see page 341 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Headings play in the combined instrumen
231. est Stewardship Council symbol shows that the paper pulp in this publication comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 11 D Introduction Volvo and the environment VA Paper from responsible sources FSC www fsc org FSC C01 1 209 Introduction L X O Meter O E E a E 16 h TL T E E a cedscissivassievastussscatcasvissinsiaisonseveinnes 19 Activating deactivating Wea O E ss 22 le AA ol ea ore e E e chad ikivesccoattsateebuesetoutoensdeut hivcuseanedcoenentectanees 24 eE ds OW gee Ss 0 i eee enn ree 25 A ct ee NO Pita atin E E 26 Wi A deploy Witiprantrremreingg cc sccccseesccceesscseesseesseceenenceneseceenses 28 SSI MNO CEN inte hatte a re Pos ere 29 Pedestrian airbag Pedestrian AirbaQ cccccssscscsssseecesseseeeesenseeeesess 30 Chill SATCLY 1 1 RR a Sec r oa sewer Tiree etl A 32 sey Option accessory for more information see Introduction ON SAFETY 9 01 Safety 01 16 Seatbelts General information Mel o A e o Heavy braking can have serious consequen ces if the seatbelts are not used Ensure that all passengers use their seatbelts It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protec tion Do not lean the backrest too far back The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor mal seating positi
232. ete phone book The car s phone book can be deleted this is carried out in phone mode under Phone menu Phone book gt Clear phone book Deleting the car s telephone book only deletes contacts in the car s telephone book Contacts in the mobile phone s phone book are not deleted Version information Bluetooth The car s current Bluetooth version can be seen in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone settings Bluetooth software version in car fi A a i Option accessory for more information see Introduction Voice recognition mobile phone Language ee ee hs E Yi C The infotainment system s voice recognition allows the driver to voice activate certain functions in a Bluetooth connected mobile phone or in Volvo s navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System The information in this section describes the use of voice commands to control a mobile phone connected using Bluetooth For detailed infor mation on using a mobile phone con nected using Bluetooth with the car s Infotainment system see page 276 The Volvo navigation system RTI Road and Traffic Information System has a separate user manual which contains more information on voice control and voice commands to con trol that system Voice commands offer convenience and help the driver to avoid being distracted and instead concentrate on driving and focus attention on the road and traffic conditions
233. etting Additional settings in MY CAR e User setting Two user profiles can be set the function is activated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice settings gt Voice user setting Choose between User 1 or User 2 For a descrip tion of the menu system see page 207 e Voice volume Can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings Voice output volume For a description of the menu system see page 207 Using voice commands The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice commands by pressing the button for voice recognition see illustration on page 286 Once a dialogue has been started commonly used commands will be shown in the screen Greyed out text or text within brackets is not included in the spoken command When the driver becomes accustomed to the system he she can speed up the command dialogue and skip the prompts from the sys tem by briefly pressing the button for voice recognition Commands can be given in several ways The command Phone call contact can be pronounced as e g e Phone gt Call contact Say Phone wait for the system s reply and then con tinue by saying Call contact or e Phone call contact Say the whole command in one sequence Quick commands Quick commands for the phone can be found in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Voice settings gt Voice command list gt Phone commands and General commands For a de
234. ext image on black or blue warning field and message field Used to indicate the presence of danger which if the warning is ignored may result in damage to property Information oO Q LO 92 o o White ISO symbols and white text image on black message field It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner s manual should be exact replicas of those in the car They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner s manual When there is a series of illustrations for step by step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres ponding illustration There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant Arrows appear numbered and unnum bered and are used to illustrate a move ment Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the reciprocal order is of no relevance If there is no series of illustrations for step by step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com ponents are pointed out The number recurs i
235. eyless system G045811 The Keyless system has a number of inte grated antennae located around the car ap Rear bumper centre Door handle left rear Cargo area central and furthest in under the floor Door handle right rear O Centre console under the rear section O Centre console under the front section g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 55 02 Locks and alarm 02 56 Locking unlocking From the outside The remote control key can lock unlock all doors the tailgate and the fuel filler flap Dif ferent sequences for unlocking can be selected see Unlocking with the remote control key page 46 In order that the lock sequence can be acti vated the driver s door must be closed if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open then it they is are locked and the alarm is activated only when it they are closed With the Keyless system all the doors and tailgate must be closed D NOTE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car If it is not possible to lock unlock with the remote control key the battery may be dis charged lock or unlock the left hand front door with the detachable key blade see page 49 Remember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch
236. facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible 9 18 kg Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s secured with the car s seatbelt and straps seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 Type approval E5 04192 L L Group 1 Child seats which are universally approved Child seats which are universally approved 9 18 kg U U Group 2 Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible 15 25 kg Convertible Child Seat rear facing child seat Child Seat rear facing child seat secured with the car s secured with the car s seatbelt and straps seatbelt and straps Type approval E5 04192 Type approval E5 04192 L L Group 2 Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Convertible Convertible Child Seat front facing child seat Child Seat front facing child seat secured with the 15 25 kg secured with the car s seatbelt car s seatbelt Type approval E5 04191 Type approval E5 04191 U U Group 2 3 Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo Booster Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo Booster Seat 15 36 kg Seat with backrest with backrest Type approval E1 04301169 Type approval E1 04301169 UF UF gt gt de p 01 Child safety eee Child safety eee seat Group 2 3 Booster cushion with and without backrest Booster 15 36 kg Cushion with and withou
237. fety has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta tionary for a maximum of 1 5 seconds If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov ing then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City Safety has stopped the car unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor free from ice snow and dirt see the illustration for sensor location page 165 Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor Remove ice and snow from the bonnet snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm Fault tracing and action If the combined instrument panel shows the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual then it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car This means that City Safety is not operational However the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual is not shown for all sit uations in which the laser sensor is blocked The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor clean The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown along with suggestions for appropriate action 04 Driver support City Safety ECC O ronan cnica a e if there are cracks scrate
238. ff You can select whether the collision warning system s acoustic and visual warning signals should be switched on or off When starting the engine the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically The Brake Support and Auto Brake func tions are always activated they cannot be deactivated Light and acoustic signals To deactivate the light and acoustic signals Locate Settings gt Car settings gt Driver support systems gt Collision Warning there select to uncheck the box The warning lamp no 1 in the figure page 170 is tested every time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the warning lamp s sep arate points of light if the collision warning system s light and acoustic warnings are acti vated Acoustic signal The warning sound can be activated deacti vated separately e Select On or Off in the menu system under Settings gt Car settings gt Driver support systems Collision Warning gt Warning sound Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed e Select Long Normal or Short in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Driver support systems Collision Warning gt Warning distance The warning distance determines the sys tem s sensitivity Warning distance Long pro vides an earlier warning First test with Long and if t
239. fic while being parked Objects situated higher than the detection areas of the sensors are not included when calculations are made for the park ing manoeuvre This may cause PAP to swing into the parking space too early for this reason such parking slots should be avoided The driver is responsible for determine whether the space selected by PAP is suitable for parking e Use approved tyres with the correct tyre pressure as this affects PAP s ability to park the car e Heavy rain or snow may cause the sys tem to measure the parking space incor rectly e Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted e Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro truding from the car D IMPORTANT The PAP system s parameters may need to be updated when changing to another approved wheel rim size involving changed tyre circumference Consult a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recom mended 1 Approved tyres refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Maintenance G046215 The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers 6 front and 4 rear For the PAP function to work correctly its sensors must be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo these are the same sen sors as are used by parking assistance see page 188 Symbols and text messages The combined instr
240. flat level ground as possible if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel Condensation can disrupt engine operation The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel IMPORTANT Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter Diesel particle filter DPF Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter which results in more efficient emission con trol The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving So called regeneration is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter This requires the engine to have reached nor mal operating temperature Filter regeneration takes place automatically and normally takes 10 20 minutes It may take a little longer at a low average speed Fuel consumption may increase slightly dur ing regeneration Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied When the filter has become approximately 80 full of particles a yellow warning triangle is shown
241. folders have the symbol W When playback of a file is complete the play back of the other files of the same type in that particular folder continues Change of folder takes place automatically when all the files in the current folder have been played back The system automatically detects and changes setting when a disc containing only audio files or only video files is loaded into the media player and then plays back these files However the system does not change setting if a disc containing a mixture of audio 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 4 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place 06 Infotainment system and video files is loaded into the media player but instead the player continues to play back the previous file type A video film is only shown when the car is stationary When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen although the audio is heard during this time The picture is shown again as soon as the car s speed falls below about 6 km h Some audio files that are copy protected by record companies or privately copied audio files cannot be loaded by the player DVD video discs For playback of DVD video discs see page 268 Fast forward reverse Hold in the buttons ER to fast forward rewind Audio files are fast forwarded
242. for i Option accessory for more information see Introduction right hand drive cars see page 100 The template scale is 1 2 Use a photocopier with a zoom function to copy the tem plates at 200 e A LHD Right left hand drive right lens e B LHD Left left hand drive left lens e C RHD Right right hand drive right lens e D RHD Left right hand drive left lens Transfer the template to a self adhesive waterproof material and cut it out Start from the design lines on the head lamp lenses see the lines on page 99 Position the self adhesive templates at the design lines with the help of the illus tration 03 Your driving environment EN Lighting Aligning the templates 03 G046418 Upper row left hand drive cars templates A and B Lower row right hand drive cars templates C and D gt gt 99 03 Your driving environment AA Templates for halogen headlamps Windscreen wipers Pala Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers ED Rain sensor on off Thumbwheel sensitivity frequency Windscreen wipers off 0 Move the stalk switch to position O to switch off the windscreen wipers Single sweep a Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep Intermittent wiping INT Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at norm
243. for the current TV channel and a new search for the channel continues When the reception returns the display of the TV channel starts immediately It is possible to change channel at any time when the message is shown If the message Reception lost searching is shown then this is because the system has detected that there is no reception for all TV channels One possible reason may be that a border has been crossed and that the system is set to the wrong country In which case change to the right country in accordance with Searching TV channels Preset list see page 290 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 291 06 Infotainment system Remote control zeneral AGCIICT al NAV RADIO MEDIA TEL 06 Corresponds to TUNE in the centre con sole The remote control can be used for all func tions in the infotainment system The remote control s buttons have the same functions as the buttons in the centre console or steering wheel keypad When using the remote control first press the remote control s button t to position F Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver which is located to the right of the INFO button see page 249 in the centre console I WARNING gt NI TA LED A a Keep loose objects such as mobile phones cameras remote controls for accessories etc in the glove compartment or other compartments Otherwise they
244. formation see Introduction 04 Driver support UN BLIS and CTA 04 201 Menus A A E E E 204 _ MS ot NA AN 207 e RAWIEPC Sree iat c rc scceccedeitesssancsetacesenscdnareasnetecasenscesarasduaencaesens 215 Engine and passenger compartment heater cccsssesssseeceseeeeenees 226 X ele O e E rretiieng sesecseccsecsouscccesecseeocsseceeessceeesoeeacs 230 A e a a ea a aa ara 232 Adapting driVING CH AAC SCS Er ere ett 240 Comfort inside the passenger COMpartMeNt occcccnccccccccncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 241 202 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Combined instrument panel Menu overview Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car aw Ds i N u i A E 0 180 b Analogue combined instrument panel Digital speed Parking heater Additional heater TC options Service status Information displays digital combined instrument Information display analogue combined instru panel and controls for menu navigation Oil level ment panel and controls for menu navigation OK access the menu acknowledge Messages 05 messages and confirm menu selections Thumbwheel browse between menu Digital combined instrument panel options Settings RESET reset data in the selected trip Themes computer step and go back in the menu Contrast mode Colourmo
245. formation see Introduction Number of keys VIN number DivX VOD code Bluetooth software version in car Map and software version Only in cars with Volvo GPS navi gator see separate manual p 44 p 3 269 p 27 General Climate control The car is equipped with electronic climate control The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment The air conditioning system AC can be switched off but to ensure the best possi ble climate comfort in the passenger com partment and to prevent the windows from misting it should always be on Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to fac tors such as air speed humidity and solar radiation etc in and around the car The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left hand air vents despite the con trols being set for the same temperature on both sides 1 Only applies to ECC Sensor location e The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard e The temperature sensor for the passen ger compartment is located below the cli mate control panel e The outside temperature sensor is located in the door mirror Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects Side windo
246. g 02 59 02 Locks and alarm 02 60 Locking unlocking Deadlocks Temporary deactivation 2 Select Activate once gt The combined instrument panel shows the message Locks and alarm Reduced guard and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked Deadlocks means that all door handles are mechanically disengaged which prevents doors being opened from the inside The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and are set after an approximately 10 second delay after the doors have been or locked Select Ask when exiting gt Each time the engine is switched off the centre console s screen shows the If a door is opened within the delay time i message Activate Reduced Guard then the sequence is interrupted and the mE until engine has started again fol alarm is deactivated Active menu options are indicated with a cross lowed by the alternatives Confirm ab MY CAR with OK and Cancel with EXIT The car can only be unlocked from a dead lock state with the remote control key The E OK MENU de peace cop nal penes front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade TEE orn Press OK MENU and lock the car Note O EXIT that the alarm s movement and tilt detec WARNING tors are switched off at the same time If someone is going to stay in the car but the see page 64 Do not allow anyone to remain in the car doors must be locked from the outside then Th Giana icuataied
247. g slow or stationary vehicles and objects val set by the driver If the radar sensor can not see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the cruise control s set speed This also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control s set speed The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way In situations that Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to more than 40 of the car s braking capacity If the car needs to be braked more heavily than cruise control capacity and the driver does not brake then the cruise control uses the collision warning system s warning lamp and warning sound see figure on page 170 Do not use the adaptive cruise control for demand sudden braking the driver must to alert the driver that immediate intervention 04 example in city traffic in dense traffic at brake himself herself This applies with large is required junctions on slippery surfaces with a lot differences in speed or if the vehicle in front of water or slush on the road in heavy brakes heavily Due to limitations in the radar rain snow in poor visibility on winding sensor braking may come unexpectedly or roads or on slip roads not at all see page 157 The warning lamp may be difficult to see in l l l strong sunlight or when wearing sun The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly Hs rta Jade SON da cai glasses measured by a radar sensor Cruise con
248. g a Call aos 279 11 Alphabetical Index register PNONGissssscsccessecadersdactyeesatncwenss 211 Rear bulbs TOG COME ocre amn ran anaa 46 VOICE CONTO lirite 285 o aiena 349 cn 47 Pocket park assist PAP cccceeeeeees 193 Rearview and door mirrors Remote control key system type appro POLISHING escscececcsseceesesecsesececsesseescereeees 369 COMPASS or an a eee aiaia 110 We lara a 394 Position parking lamps o 90 cs A oe PEO eo Ce 106 Resetting trip meter 234 237 238 electrically retractable 107 41 Power eros 73 Nating ecccccseccssccsseecsseesssecssecsssecsseessee 107 Resetting the door MirrOfS w om o 107 POWEr S at ccccccsssscccccrersessssessecsccnenseseasees 84 MAES TI ON E E E 108 Resetting the power windows 106 Powershift gearDOX ceseeseeeeeeeees 122 315 Rear window defrosting 107 Retractable power door mirrors 107 Power WINdOWS cooocccccconocononnconccnanacannnos 104 REC CUIATON ecticorisintconsncansiicooetericis 223 Reverse gear InhibitOF o omomomomemooomn 118 Recommendations during driving 296 Rims Recommendedchiid Goats Fab contas 34 em opi l E a 369 Q e Y PP gon 317 A O TIPS ON eehseceetiarseestiececr q Roller blind for glass rO0Of ooo oc m 108 ENSS 155 ASMA scsi iaa 344 o a a E oof load MAX weight eseese 379 Queue ASSIStAMticcccacsccccococusenescevcrcdccecccucs 155 PCTUCI
249. g a fuse This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire Location fuse boxes o ite 10 SY o 0 Fuse box locations in a left hand drive car In a right hand drive car the fuse box under the glovebox changes sides ab Engine compartment 2 Under the glovebox Below right front seat 09 Maintenance and service QD 09 Q 09 Maintenance and service G046424 On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses Replacing fuses The fuses can be accessed following the removal of the cover fitted on the starter bat tery and the cover for the electrical distribu tion unit E z o N y fo jo Fold out the locking catches that are fitted on the sides of the cover on the starter battery Fold out the locking catch that is fitted on the side of the electrical distribution unit P Rotate the cover upward until the lock lugs 1 are released Fold the cover toward the engine to access the fuses Refitting the covers Reinstall the parts in reverse order Positions The label on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses e Fuses 7 18 are of JCASE type and should be replaced by a workshop e Fuses 19 45 and 47 48 are of Mini Fuse type 1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended S 000006860
250. gate Op n o oncccconnnn 297 WiN tale ssl 309 Driving Wat rssacdaiondica 296 Driving with a trailer TOW OA OA sercstscscotsesseceensennatecuchoosledienes 379 towing CAD AG ICY ccncsinisdpencciactnteaxanceliiens 3 9 DSTC see also Stability control system 141 A O 266 ECC electronic climate control 218 ECO I usina 73 Economical ONVING sccccGutereresaswnceccseredesseins 296 ECO PIre SSUe cccsscecsseseeeesseeeees 328 391 Electrical SOCK Cl sc icacateotecccctastdereiediarescemets 244 CAN GO Al Sa isso 306 Mont Sealsed iana 244 Emergency equipment warning triangle ooocccconnninnconononcn 329 Emergency puncture repalf cccon 330 Emissions of carbon dioxide 303 Engine OVEMMGAUING wirccicecsoacesseacscncsrennesorsenestennds 309 o A e 115 Engine block heater fuel driVeN occconnnnccconccnonionccnonoonanonnonnos 226 Engine compartment CODA Eros eee ee eee eee eee 342 a A eee eee eee eee ere 339 AMM ip 339 Engine drag CONTO ssiisiccscssinccontacdveesdanea 140 Engine A 339 383 adverse driving conditions 383 CAD AG SS A 383 ili E APRA zan 339 Ol OAC E PN AE A 383 Engine specificatiOnsS ooccccnionccnonnocmos 382 Environmental labelling FSC owner s Manual A 11 Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control c 159 Driver Alert Control ccccccseeeeeees 181 EA ostia tintas 18
251. ge in sharp inside curves line of the lane and the direction indicator is LKA steers and warns with pulsing steering In certain cases the Lane Keeping Aid allows not activated the car is steered back into the wheel vibrations the car to cross side lines without engaging lane If the vehicle passes a side line the Lane active steering or warning with pulsing vibra Keeping Aid warns the driver with pulsing tions in the steering wheel Using an adjacent vibrations in the steering wheel This occurs lane for dynamic cornering when there is a regardless of whether the car is actively clear line of vision is an example of one such steered back by applying a slight steering tor case que 1 The figure shows 3 pulsing vibrations when the side line is passed 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support i 04 183 Y 04 Driver support 04 184 Driver Alert System Lane Keeping Aid aratinn peration Ll oa The function is supplemented with self explanatory graphics in different situations Here are some examples LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as the direction indicator is switched on G046345 LKA sees and follows the side lines marked in red in the figure If the Lane Keeping Aid is active and detects sees the side lines the LKA symbol is shown with WHITE lines e GREY side line the Lane Keeping Aid does not see a line on that sid
252. ger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo see page 370 Menu settings It is possible to activate deactivate or change the default settings for four of the climate control system s functions via the centre con sole For general information about menu navigation see page 208 Option accessory for more information see Introduction e Fan level for automatic climate control see page 221 e Recirculation timer see page 223 e Automatic start of rear window defroster see page 107 e Air quality system see page 224 The climate control system s functions can be reset to the default settings via the menu sys tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under Settings gt Climate settings gt Reset climate settings Air distribution G046267 The incoming air is divided between a num ber of different vents in the passenger com partment 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode If necessary it can be controlled manually see page 224 Air vents in the dashboard 05 AJ Open E Closed Lateral airflow D Vertical airflow Aim the vents at the side windows to remove misting NOTE Remember that small children may be sen sitive to air flows and draughts Option accessory for more information see Introduction 217 05 Comfor
253. h emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works G046570 Examples of such sources include horns Sensor location front wet tyres on asphalt pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc Sensor location rear The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly Clean them with water and car shampoo 2 a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support Park assist camera General Function and operation When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken The parking camera is an assist system and lines are shown graphically which illustrate is activated when reverse gear is engaged where the car s rear wheels will roll with the can be changed in the settings menu see current steering wheel angle this facilitates page 207 tight parking reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer The car s approximate external dimensions are illustrated by means of two dashed lines These help lines can be switched off in the settings menu The camera image is shown on the centre console s screen If the car is also equipped with parking assis tance sensors then their information is dis 04 played graphically as coloured fields in order i i to illustrate the distance to detected obsta CAM button location cles see page 186 When a towbar is configured with the car s electrical system the protrusion of the
254. has been completed by starting to flash see page 45 All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked otherwise the car is not locked 2 Not applicable to remote control keys with keyless start g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 53 02 Locks and alarm 54 Keyless Unlocking with the key blade ha G045810 Hole for key blade to loosen the cover If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key e g if the batteries are discharged then the left hand front door can be opened using the remote control key s removable key blade see page 49 To access the lock cylinder the door handle s plastic cover must be removed this is also done with the key blade 1 Press the key blade approx 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle cover do not prize gt The plastic cover loosens automati cally by means of the torque when the 3 Only in combination with power driver s seat and power mirrors blade is pushed straight up and into the opening 2 Then insert the key blade in the lock cyl inder and unlock the door 3 Refit the plastic cover after unlocking When the front left door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened the alarm is triggered It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch see page 64 Key memory driver s seat door mirro
255. hat detects pedes trians receives aS unambiguous information as possible about the contours of the body this implies the opportunity to identify the head arms shoulders legs upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement If large parts of the body are not visible to the camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian e In order for a pedestrian to be detected he she must appear full length and have a height of at least 80 cm e The system cannot detect a pedestrian carrying larger items e The camera sensor s ability to see pedes trians at dusk and dawn is limited just like the human eye e The camera sensor s capacity to detect pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels even when street lights are lit WARNING Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool This function cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and it cannot see e g parti ally obscured pedestrians people in cloth ing that hides the contours of the body or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm e The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Operation Settings are made from MY CAR via the cen tre console s screen and menu system For information on how the menu system is used see page 207 Warning signals On and O
256. he Bulb fail Stop lamp trailer text is shown Level control The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car s load up to the maximum permissible weight When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly which is normal Trailer weights For information on Volvo s permitted trailer weights see page 380 The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo The maximum permitted speed for a car with a trailer attached is 100 km h National vehi cle regulations may further restrict the trailer weight and speed Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights Otherwise the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 07 During your journey 07 309 07 During your journey Driving with a trailer Manual gearbox Overheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheat ing e Do not run the engine at higher revolu tions than 4500 rpm diesel engines 3500 rpm otherwise the oil temperature may become too high Diesel engine 5 cyl e Inthe event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300 3000 rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant Automatic gearbox Overheating W
257. he backrest Always secure the load Always secure the load During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift causing personal injury to the car s occupants Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft Switch off the engine and apply the park ing brake when loading unloading long items Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position and the car could then move off Front seat The passenger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load see page 83 Roof load Using load carriers To avoid damaging the car and for maximum possible safety while driving the load carriers designed by Volvo are recommended Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers e Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured Lash the load securely with retaining straps e Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers Put the heaviest objects at the bottom e The size of the area exposed to the wind and therefore fuel consumption increase with the size of the load e Drive gently Avoid quick acceleration heavy braking and hard cornering The car s centre of gravity and driving cha racteristics are altered by roof loads For information about the maximum allowable load on the roof including load carriers and any space box see page 379 07 During your journey Lowering the rear seat back
258. he button for next previous avail able station Short press for preset 1 Does not apply to Performance If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 249 For a description of the remote control see page 292 Menus The menus inRADIO are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu navi gation see page 251 and menu overview see page 254 Radio AM FM Tuning The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality are The transmission may be disturbed by various factors such as tall buildings or the transmitter being far away Coverage level can also vary depending on where in the country you are located 06 Infotainment system Automatic tuning 1 Press RADIO turn TUNE until the desired wavelength AM FM1 etc is shown press OK MENU 2 Hold in XX in the centre console or in the steering wheel keypad The radio searches for the next previous avail able station Station list The radio automatically compiles a list of the strongest FM stations whose signals it is cur rently receiving This enables you to find a station when you drive into an area where you do not know the radio stations and their fre quencies To go to
259. he car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position Do not move the car further than necessary Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode This could result in per sonal injury or the car not functioning as normal Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed Never under any circumstances attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is displayed Leave the car at once BFR FPRBREER Ee AJ ADA NT es WWrnl DiNriwNs If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed It must be transported from its location Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo work shop ee 01 Safety 9 9 01 Safety Pedestrian airbag Pedestrian Airbag Properties ite Y A o T o o The airbag Pedestrian Airbag is fitted under the bonnet near the windscreen In the event of a frontal collision with a pedestrian the sensors in the front bumper react and the air bag inflates if required based on the force of the impact The sensors are active at a speed of approx 20 50 km h and an ambient tem perature between 20 and 70 C If the airbag is activated Pedestrian Airbag e the rear part of the bonnet is raised and locked in this position e the hazard warning flashe
260. he rear seat If there are passengers in both the front and rear seats then the option recommended is both front seats The options can be selected under Audio settings Sound stage For general information on menu navigation see page 251 and menu overview see page 254 Audio volume and automatic volume control The audio system compensates for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by increasing the volume in relation to the speed of the car The compensation level can be set to low medium high or off Select the level under Audio settings gt Volume compensation For general information on menu navigation see page 251 and menu overview see page 254 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 gt gt 253 06 Infotainment system 06 General information on infotainment External audio source audio volume If an external audio source e g an MP3 player or iPod is connected to the AUX input then the audio source that is connected can have a different volume than the audio system s internal volume e g radio Correct this by adjusting the volume of the input 1 Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK MENU 2 Press OK MENU and then turn TUNE to AUX input volume Confirm with OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the AUX input If the external audio source s volume is too high or too low the quality
261. he system is designed to react when e the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles e another vehicle is quickly approaching the vehicle When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 ora quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2 the door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a con stant glow If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning in this situation then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light WARNING BLIS does not work in sharp bends BLIS does not work when the car is being reversed Activate deactivate CTA In cars equipped with parking assistance see page 186 the CTA function can be deacti vated activated with the parking assistance On Off button l mm On Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors CTA itself can be deactivated in the MY CAR menu system as follows Go to Settings gt Car settings gt BLIS Cross Traffic Alert and deselect The CTA function is then deactivated BLIS remains activated 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support UN 04 199 Y 04 Driver support 04 200 BLIS and CTA When CTA operates Principle for CTA CTA supplements the BLIS function by being able to see crossing traffic from the side dur ing reversing such as when reversing out of a parking space CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles In
262. hen driving with a trailer in hilly terrain ina hot climate there may be a risk of overheat ing e An automatic gearbox selects the opti 07 mum gear related to load and engine speed e Inthe event of overheating a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel and a text message is shown in the information display follow the recommendation given Steep inclines e Do not lock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine can cope with it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revo lutions IMPORTANT See also the specific information on slow driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page 122 Parking on a hill 1 Depress the foot brake Activate the parking brake Move the gear selector to position P Release the foot brake 3 2 Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer Always use the parking brake e Block the wheels with chocks when park ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill Starting on a hill 1 Depress the foot brake 2 Move the gear selector to driving posi tion D 3 Release the parking brake 4 Release the foot brake and start driving off Towing bracket If the car is equipped with a removable tow bar the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully see page 312 If the car is fitted with a Vol
263. hen in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 249 For a description of the remote control see page 292 Watch TV Press MEDIA turn TUNE until TV is shown in the display press OK MENU gt A search starts and after a short while the most recently used channel is shown Changing channel It is possible to change channel as follows 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 289 06 Infotainment system TV e Turn TUNE a list of all available channels in the area is shown If any of these chan nels is already saved as a preset then its preset number is shown to the right of the channel name Continue turning TUNE to reach the desired channel and press OK MENU By pressing the preset buttons 0 9 Via a short press on the ERI ES vut tons the next available channel in the area is shown If the car has been moved within the coun try for example from one city to another it is not certain that the presets are availa ble at the new location as the frequency range may have changed In which case carry out a new search and save a new 06 preset list see the function Save the available TV channels as presets page If no reception is available on the preset buttons it may be because the car is ata location other than where the scan of TV channels was run for example
264. hen the car is stationary When the car is moving at a speed over about 6 km h the picture dis appears No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen although the audio is heard during this time The picture reappears when the car has stopped The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality are The transmission may be disturbed by various factors such as tall buildings or the TV transmitter being far away Coverage level can also vary depending on where in the country you are located IMPORTANT A TV licence is required for this product in some countries Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu navi gation see page 251 and menu overview see page 254 Overview Centre console control panel 1 Station presets numeric input MEDIA button Last active source e g iPod or TV is activated If a source is activated and you press MEDIA then a 06 Infotainment system CO TV shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options Confirm your selection or go to the menu by pressing OK MENU Navigate in channel lists or menus by turning TUNE EXIT leads up in the menu system stops the function in progress O The next available channel is shown by pressing D If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control t
265. hen the engine is running The sealing fluid can irritate the skin In the case of contact with skin wash away the fluid with soap and water 2 Check that the switch is in position O and locate the cable and the air hose 7 Flick the switch to position I Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running lf cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately The journey should not be continued Contact ing an authorised tyre centre is recom mended Do not break the bottle s seal before use The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in 3 Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle s stopper 4 Screw the bottle into its holder ri 7 a A Option accessory for more information see Introduction When the compressor starts the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds Risk of overheating The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes 9 Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge Mini mum pressure is 1 8 bar and maximum 3 5 bar Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high If the pressure is below 1 8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big The journey should not be continued Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended 10 Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket 11 Detach the hos
266. hes or stone The City Safety function includes a sensor ae idan gal ll earn chips in the windscreen in front of either of which transmits laser light Contact a quali ace In front of the SC u the laser sensor s windows and they fied workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser sensor is dirty or front of the sensor cover a surface of approx 0 5 x 3 0 mm laser sensor needs servicing an authorised covered with ice or from dirt ice and or larger then a workshop must be con Volvo workshop is recommended It is abso snow snow tacted for replacement of the windscreen lutely essential to follow the prescribed see the illustration for sensor location instructions when handling the laser sensor The laser sensor field Remove the page 165 an authorised Volvo workshop of vision is blocked blocking object is recommended The following two labels are affixed directly on the laser sensor unit Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety M us To avoid the risk of failed deficient or INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH reduced operation for City Safety the OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS MAGNIFIERS following also applies CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT e Volvo recommends that you do not repair cracks scratches or stone chips Max average power 45mW 2 Pulse duration 33ns in the area in front of the laser sensor a Sos instead the whole windscreen should IEC 60825 1 1993 A2 2001 be
267. hether it is day or night However the sensor has limitations and has poorer functionality or none at all in e g heavy snowfall or rain dense fog dust storms or white out situations Mist dirt ice or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the 04 function Low hanging objects e g a flag pennant for projecting load or accessories such as auxili ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function The laser light from the sensor in City Safety measures how the light is reflected The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light reflectors On slippery road surfaces the braking dis tance is extended which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision In such situations the ABS and DSTC sys tems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability When your own car is reversing City Safety is temporarily deactivated City Safety is not activated at low speeds under 4 km h which is why the system does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly e g when parking Driver commands are always prioritised which is why City Safety does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering or accelerating in a clear manner even if a colli sion is unavoidable When City Sa
268. higher sen sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity An extra sweep is made when the thumb wheel is turned upward Deactivate Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program 4 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D Wipers and washing 03 101 E 03 Your driving environment 03 102 Wipers and washing The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off IMPORTANT The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash Switch off the rain sensor while the car is in motion or when the remote control key is in position I or Il The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the light in the button go out Washing the headlamps and windows Washing function Faa Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released High pressure headlamp washing High pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid To save fluid the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle Reduced washing If only approx 1 litre of washer fl
269. his setting produces too many warn ings which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations then change to warning distance Normal Only use warning distance Short in excep tional cases e g for dynamic driving Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the collision warning system is switched off The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time In order for the collision warning system to be effective always drive with the Dis tance Alert set at time interval 4 5 see Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations e g when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily WARNING No automatic system can guarantee 100 correct function in all situations Therefore never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake by driving at people or vehicles this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the centre console s screen Search with the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Driver support systems gt Collision Warning see page 207 Maintenance Camera and radar sensor For the senso
270. hop E 03 Your driving environment Windows rearview and door mirrors General Laminated glass g The glass is reinforced which pro vides better protection against break ins and improved sound insu 03 lation in the passenger compart ment The windscreen has laminated glass Water and dirt repellent coating ey The windows are treated with a sur face coating that improves the view in difficult weather conditions Main tenance see page 369 IMPORTANT Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows Use the heating to remove ice from the door mirrors see page 107 Heat reflecting windscreen gt Areas where IR film is not applied A 65 mm B 150 mm C 125 mm The windscreen is equipped with a heat reflecting film IR that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment The positioning of electronic equipment such as a transponder behind a glass surface with heat reflecting film may affect its function and performance 104 Option accessory for more information see Introduction For the optimal function of electronic equip ment it should be positioned on the part of the windscreen with no heat reflecting film see the highlighted area in the above illustra tion Power windows G047481 Driver s door control panel Switch for electric child safety locks and disengaging rear power window buttons se
271. hop to check the car immedi ately Contact a workshop to check the car as soon as possible Read the owner s man ual Time to book regular service contact a work shop Time for regular service contact a workshop The timing is determined by the number of kilometres driven number of months since the last service engine running time and oil grade If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts contact a workshop Transmission Oil change needed Transmission Reduced performance Transmission hot Reduce speed Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for cooling Contact a workshop to check the car as soon as possible The gearbox cannot han dle full capacity Drive carefully until the mes sage clears If shown repeatedly contact a workshop Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clears Critical fault Stop the car immediately in a safe manner and contact a workshopY 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Specification 05 D 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 Specification Temporarily A function has been tem off porarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after star ting again Low battery The audio system is charge switched off to save Power save energy Charge the bat mode tery
272. ilable Seatbelt tensioner The seatbelts on the driver s side the pas senger side and at the outer rear seats are fit ted with seatbelt tensioners A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants Never insert the tongue of the passenger s seatbelt into the buckle on the driver s side Always insert the tongue of the seat belt into the buckle on the correct side Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision There is a risk of serous injury 01 Safety 9 Airbags 01 Warning symbol in combined control key in key position Il fault tracing is Airbag system instrument panel performed each time the ignition is switched on The symbol clears after approx 6 seconds provided the airbag sys tem is fault free The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated Where required the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the information display If the warning symbol malfunctions the warning tri angle illuminates and SRS airbag Service required or SRS airbag Service urgent ih Fa appears in the display Volvo recommends Airbag system viewed from above left hand Analogue combined instrument
273. in the battery The battery must first be charged in order to ensure a successful auto start after an auto stop At an outside temperature of 15 C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour At a lower outside tem perature a charging time of 3 4 hours is recommended The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an exter nal battery charger If this is not possible then the recommen dation is to temporarily deactivate the Start Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged For more information about recharging the battery see the section Battery in the chapter Maintenance and service General All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car s electrical system from dam age by short circuiting or overloading If an electrical component or function does not work it may be because the component s fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking Changing 1 Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse 2 Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown 3 If this is the case replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacin
274. in types of discs and files e Pre recorded CD discs CD Audio e Burned CD discs with audio and or video files e Pre recorded DVD video discs e Burned DVD discs with audio and or video files For more information about the supported formats see page 269 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 2 Only applies to DVD discs 2 a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel see page 249 For a description of the remote control see page 292 Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information on menu navi gation see page 251 and menu overview see page 254 Starting playback of a disc Press the MEDIA button turn TUNE until Disc is displayed press OK MENU If there is a disc in the media player then the disc starts playing back automatically otherwise Insert disc is shown in the TV screen Then insert a disc with text side up The disc starts to play back automatically If a disc with audio video files is inserted into the player then the disc s folder structure needs to be loaded Depending on the quality of the disc and the quantity of information Media pl
275. individually However individual buttons can be reprogrammed see the fol lowing section Programming individual but tons 1 Press and hold the two outer buttons on HomeLink Do not release them until the indicator lamp has changed from a yellow light to either red or green 2 Release the buttons gt HomeLink is now set in so called learn mode and is ready to be reprogrammed see section Program ming HomeLink on page 134 g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 139 E 03 Your driving environment 03 136 Programming individual buttons To reprogram an individual HomeLink but ton proceed as follows 1 Depress the required button and do not release 2 When the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash yellow after about 10 sec onds release the button and start with step 2 of section Programming Home Link on page 134 For more information or to leave comments about HomeLink visit www homelink com or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 or premium rate phone number 49 6838 907 277 fi r A i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D DSTC Stability and traction control SySteM oncccccconccccconncnnonnnnnnnnnns 140 Road sign informati n RSP arrancadas 143 Speed AA E e o O UOC A 146 Cruise CONT rearme iii 148 Adaptive cruise Control mr rr RE RR 150 A MAS aeree a E E aA een deenwecee 161
276. ing style 174 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction WARNING Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and the system therefore pro vides effective warnings and brake inter ventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km h For stationary or slow moving vehicles warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km h Warnings for stationary or slow moving vehicles could be disengaged due to dark ness or poor visibility Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians are switched off at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km h The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as adaptive cruise control For more information on the radar sensor and its limitations see page 157 If warnings are perceived as being too fre quent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced This then leads to the sys tem providing a warning at a later stage which reduces the total number of warnings see the section Set warning distance on page 173 Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti vated at low speeds under 4 km h which is why the system does
277. ink visit www homelink com or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 or premium rate phone number 49 6838 907 277 e If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate make sure that there is no one in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is moving e The car should remain outside the garage while a garage door opener is being programmed e Do not use HomeLink for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse Save the original remote controls for future programming e g when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is deleted if the car is sold See the section Resetting the HomeLink buttons on page 135 1 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls Inc 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Programming HomeLink In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in accessory position before HomeLink can be programmed or used If possible fit new batteries in the remote control that shall be replaced by HomeLink for faster programming and improved transmission of the radio signal The HomeLink buttons should be reset before programming When this has been done HomeLink is set in learn mode and ready for programming Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator lamp flashes yel low This indi
278. inued by using the mobile phone s built in microphone and speaker Even when your mobile phone has been manually disconnected some mobile phones may automatically couple up to the last handsfree unit connected e g when a new call begins Remove the device A connected mobile phone can be deregis tered and removed This is performed in phone mode under Phone menu Remove Bluetooth device Making and receiving calls Incoming call Press OK MENU to answer the call even if the audio system is in e g RADIO or MEDIA mode Refuse or end with EXIT Automatic answer The automatic answer function means that calls are accepted automatically Activate deactivate in phone mode under Phone menu Call options Auto answer In call menu Press OK MENU during an ongoing call to access the following functions e Mute audio system microphone is muted e Mobile phone the call is transferred from handsfree to the mobile phone For some mobile phones the connection is interrupted This is normal The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect e Dial number option to call a third party using the number keys current call set in standby Call lists The call lists are copied to the handsfree function at each new connection and are then updated during the connection In normal view turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register for All calls In phone mode it is possible to see all the ca
279. ion on the car s battery see page 355 03 Your driving environment D 03 E 03 Your driving environment 03 Gearboxes General IMPORTANT To prevent damage to any drive system components the working temperature of the gearbox is checked If there is a risk of overheating a warning symbol in the com bined instrument lights up and a text mes sage is shown Follow the recommenda tion given in the text message Start assistance on a hill HSA The foot brake can be released before setting off or reversing uphill the HSA Hill Start Assist function means that the car does not roll backwards The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver s foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver acceler ates Manual gearbox G046027 Gearing pattern Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever e Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change e Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situa tions 2 a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possi bility of mistakenly attempting to engage rever
280. ions and weights Dimensions Wheelbase 2647 B Length 4369 C Load length floor folded rear seat 1508 D Load length floor 684 E Height 1420 F Load height 532 G Front track H Rear track Load width floor 15464 ss 15595 9387 15388 1546 960 o A oO 10 o 0 J Width 1802 K Width including door mirrors 2041 Width including folded in door mirrors 1657 A Offset 52 5 mm B Offset 50 mm C Offset 46 mm Dimensions and weights Weights Kerb weight includes the driver the fuel tank 90 full and all fluids The weight of passengers and accessories and towball load when a trailer is hitched see table page 380 influences the payload and is not included in the kerb weight Permitted max load Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version i e a car without extra equipment or accessories This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory Examples of accessories that reduce load ing capacity are the Kinetic Momentum Summum equipment levels as well as other accessories such as Towbar Load carrier Space box Audio system Auxiliary lamps GPS Fuel driven heater Safety grille Carpets Luggage cover Power seats etc Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer taining the kerb weight of your own partic ular car The car s dri
281. ired by the side airbag e Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags e Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt 01 Safety 9 Inflatable Curtain IC 01 Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof The hook is only designed for light clothing not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example Do not screw or install anything onto the car s headlining door pillars or side pan els This could compromise the intended protection Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas E 5 2 2 O o The inflatable curtain IC is a part of the SIPS Do not load the car higher than 50 mm system It is fitted in the headlining along both under the top edge of the windows in the sides of the roof and protects the car s occu doors Otherwise the intended protection pants sitting in the outer seats A sufficiently of the inflatable curtain which is con cealed in the headlining may be compro violent collision trips the sensors and the f mised inflatable curtain is inflated The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and pas sengers from striking their heads on the WARNING inside of the car during a collision z The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt OO A 9 01 Safet
282. is simulated Cars with manual transmission are started in 2nd gear applies to cars with up to 18 inch wheels The value for combined driving which is reported in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra urban driving in accordance with legal requirements CO emissions the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles These are then analysed and give the value for CO emissions 390 10 Specifications Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure Approved tyre pressures Tyre size Speed Load 1 3 persons 1 3 Load 1 3 persons Max load load ECO pressure ie km h Front Rear EE Front rear i kPa kPa kPa 195 65 R15 O 160 260 270 280 T2 B4164T4 205 55 R16 T3 B4164T3 205 50 R17 14 B4164T 225 45 R17 160 230 230 270 270 D2 D4162T 225 40 R18 235 35 R19 T4 B5204T8 205 55 R16 O 160 230 230 260 260 260 T5 B5204T9 205 50 R17 T5 B52541T12 225 45 R17 e ge at Das ae i T5 B52541714 E ee 295 40 R18 O 160 240 240 260 260 260 D4 D5204T4 235 35 R19 160 290 240 310 280 Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 420 420 420 420 A Economical driving B In certain countries there is the bar unit beside the SI unit Pascal 1 bar 100 kPa C Only applies to 16 wheels for D2 automatic low emission variant D Only applies to 15 wheels for D2 low emission variant 391 10 Specifications Wheel and
283. iscs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function This delay is minimised by cleaning the brake lin ings Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road surfaces prior to long stay parking and after the car has been washed Carry this out by braking gently during a short period while en route Emergency Brake Assistance Emergency Brake Assistance EBA Emergency Brake Assist helps to increase brake force and so reduce braking distance EBA detects the driver s braking style and increases brake force as necessary The brake force can be reinforced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual depress hold the brake pedal as long as neces sary If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases 03 Your driving environment EN 03 E 03 Your driving environment Maintenance To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi ble follow the Volvo service intervals as If and LO illuminate at the same specified in the Service and Warranty Book time there may be a fault in the brake sys let see page 338 tem If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is 03 O IMPORTANT normal at this stage drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake sys The wear on the brake system s compo tem checked an authorised Volvo work
284. it again e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended D Message There is a message in the combined instrument panel Read it and Constant glow for System check when the engine is started 2 seconds gt gt Y 04 Driver support DSTC Stability and traction control system Flashing light DSTC system is being activated Sport mode is activated A The symbols are schematic Examples of readable speed related signs The Road sign information function RSI Road Sign Information helps the driver to remember which road signs the car has passed through information on among other things the current speed the start end of a motorway or road and when overtaking is prohibited If both a sign for motorway road for motor ised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed RSI decides to show the sign symbol for maximum permitted speed RSI does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid The driver always bears ultimate responsi bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed G046287 Recorded speed information When RSI has recorded a road sign with an imposed speed the combined instrument panel displays the sign as a symbol Road sign information RSI Together with the symbol for
285. ith the gear selector in position N D Drive D is the normal driving position Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R Geartronic Manual gear positions The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox The car engine brakes when the accelerator pedal is released The manual gear position is reached by mov ing the lever to the side from position D to the end position at The combined instru ment panel s symbol changes colour from WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1 2 3 etc are displayed in a box which corre sponds to the gear that has just been selected e Move the lever forwards towards plus to change up a gear and release the lever which returns to its neutral position between and or e Pull the lever back towards minus to change down a gear and release it The manual gearshift mode can be selected at any time while driving Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear in order to avoid jerking and stalling To return to automatic driving mode e Move the lever to the side to the end position at D f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved f
286. ker than reg ular CD discs and therefore playback can not be guaranteed and malfunction may arise If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA tracks all MP3s will be ignored Audio format CD audio mp3 wma CD audio mp3 wma aac m4a Audio format Video format CD video DVD video divx avi asf A Applies to Performance B Does not apply to Performance C Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre mium Sound Multimedia Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system 06 269 06 Infotainment system 06 External audio source via AUX USB input 1 7 y Bi g Ns ee s oom te E s F 4 T r s F a r m Connection points for external audio sources An external audio source e g an iPod or MP3 player can be connected to the audio system via any of the connections in the cen tre console An audio source connected to the USB input can then be handled with the car s audio controls A device connected via the AUX input cannot be controlled via the car There is a recess in the right hand rear edge of the tunnel console where cables can be routed so that the hatch can be closed with out cables being pinched If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad and or remote control then in many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console For a description of the buttons in the steering wheel
287. l is depressed for longer button erator pedal e g during overtaking does not than 1 minute 2 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode Option accessory for more information see Introduction 149 Y 04 Driver support 04 150 Adaptive cruise control General information on ACC The adaptive cruise control ACC Adaptive Cruise Control helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead Adap tive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows The driver sets the desired speed and time interval to the car in front When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car the speed is automatically adapted to that When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to the standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front then the driver is warned instead by Distance Warning see page 161 about the short distance The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter vene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suita ble distance The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic weather and road conditions Read the whole of this section for informa tion on the limitations of the adaptiv
288. l it out from the ignition switch l Sun visor for glass roof power windows 12 V socket in the pas senger compartment RTI phone ventilation fan and windscreen i i wipers can be used Functions at different levels Ignition switch with remote control key extrac In order to enable the use of a limited number Il The headlamps come on ted inserted of functions with the engine switched off the Warning indicator lamps illumi car s electrical system can be set in 3 differ nate for 5 seconds ent levels key positions 0 I and II with i For cars with the Keyless function the key the remote control key Throughout this Soveral other Systems aro acti does not need to be inserted into the igni owner s manual these levels are described vated However heating in seat tion switch but can be stored in e g a using the denomination key positions cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the engine The following table shows the functions avail has been started able in each key position level pocket For more information on Keyless functions see page 52 This key position consumes a Insert the key lot of current from the starter 1 Hold the end of the remote control key battery and should therefore be with the detachable key blade and insert avoided the key in the ignition switch 2 Then press the key in the lock up to its end position y Option accessory for more information see Introduction
289. l you want to move in the list and confirm with OK MENU gt The selected channel is highlighted 2 Turn TUNE to the new location in the list and confirm with OK MENU gt The channels change places with each other After the preset channels max 30 come all the other channels available in the area It is possible to move a channel up to a place in the preset list Save the available TV channels as presets If the car has been moved within the country for example from one city to another it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency range may have changed In which case carry out another scan and save a new preset list 1 Press TV mode on OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK MENU 3 Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK MENU gt An automatic scan for available TV channels starts this scan takes a little while During this time the figure for each channel found and added as a preset is shown When the scan is complete a message is shown and the picture is shown A preset list max 30 presets has now been created and is available To change channel see page 289 Scanning the TV channels This function automatically scans through the frequency range for all channels available in the area where you are When a channel is found it is shown for approx 10 seconds before scanning is resumed Scanning is stopped with EXIT then the channel that you
290. lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehi cle If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model 198 MOI A information see Introduction Function BLIS and CTA are activated when the engine is started This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once Activate deactivate BLIS Button for activating deactivating The BLIS function can be deactivated acti vated by pressing the BLIS button on the centre console Some combinations of the selected equip ment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console in which case the func tion is handled by the car s menu system MY CAR BLIS and CTA Select On or Off at Settings gt Car settings gt BLIS When BLIS is deactivated activated the lamp in the button goes out illuminates and the combined instrument panel confirms the change with a text message The door panel indicator lamps flash once upon activation To extinguish the message e Press the left stalk switch OK button or e Wait approx 5 seconds the message extinguishes When BLIS operates Principle for BLIS 1 Zone in blind spot 2 Zone for quickly approaching vehicle 2 For information on the menu system see page 207 The BLIS function is active at speeds above approx 10 km h T
291. lb and put back the parts in reverse order Position parking lamps o 1 Ko Y f 6 1 Detach the headlamp see page 346 2 EY Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise Pull out the bulb holder 3 Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order 5 Not applicable to cars with xenon headlights as these are equipped with LED lamps Side marker lamps o NS Detach the headlamp see page 346 E Undo the cover Pull down the bulb holder Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order 09 Maintenance and service QD 09 Daytime running lights Location of rear bulbs Lamp housing rear o a co D oD o Ro 2 5 2 o oO 0 Brake light LED Direction indicators brake lights and rear 1 Undo the cover ane eee en Hae as e ights are replaced from inside the cargo area 2 Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise Position parking IGniS 12D l 1 Remove the hatch in the upholstery 1 on Pull out the bulb holder Brake light the same side as the defective bulb 3 Replace the bulb and put back the parts Side marker lamps LED 2 Press the catch sideways in reverse order Indicator Pull out the bulb holder Reversing lamp 3 Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in O a in reverse order 6 Only applies to daytime running lights with bulbs gt gt 09 Maintenance and service 09 Rear fog lamp gt Pull out the bulb holder Specifications of bulbs 3 Replace
292. ld closed by an electrical see page 49 lock To open Locking the glovebox 1 Push down gently on the wider of the two Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock rubberised pressure plates under the cylinder outer handle the lock is released 2 Lift the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate G021093 Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed Pull out the key blade and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using e Unlock by carrying this out in reverse the remote control key s c button order The lock indicator on the instrument panel stops flashing in order to show that not all of the car is locked and the alarm s level and y Option accessory for more information see Introduction movement sensors and the sensors for open ing the tailgate are disconnected The doors remain locked and armed The tailgate can be opened in two different ways using the remote control key One press The boot lid is unlocked but remains closed press lightly on the rubber ised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the boot lid If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re armed Two presses The boot lid is unlocked and the lock is disengaged at which the boot lid opens about a centimetre lift the outer han dle to open Rain cold frost or snow could however
293. lease air using the replacement repair of the damaged tyre ficient ventilation pressure reducing valve if the tyre Advise the workshop that the tyre contains pressure is too high sealing fluid WARNING WANA Ne WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running Do not unscrew the bottle it is equipped You should not drive faster than 80 km h with a reverse catch to prevent leakage after the emergency tyre repair kit has 3 C h bl fth i been used Volvo recommends that you l ei M ca K y a of the car s isi i sockets and start the car 3 Make sure the compressor is switched Tan authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre maximum A Start th by flickina th off Detach the air hose and cable Refit si art the compressor by Ticking the driving distance is 200 km The staff there atento nestor the dust cap can determine whether or not the tyre can P l be repaired or if it needs to be replaced 08 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 333 08 Wheels and tyres Emergency puncture repair TMK IMPORTANT Risk of overheating The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes 5 Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table see page 391 Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres sure is too high 6 Switch off the compressor Detach the air hose and cable 7 Refit the dust cap
294. left stalk switch OK button audible signal plus the text message Driver Alert Time for a break the linked symbol is illuminated in the combined WARNING instrument panel at the same time The warn An alarm should be taken very seriously ing is repeated after a time if driving ability as a sleepy driver is often not aware of does not improve his her own condition In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tiredness stop the car in a safe manner as zy soon as possible and rest Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol 180 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support fA Driver Alert System DAC ARAM A A C Ee dild MICSS Combined instrument panel Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal text break NX Windscreen sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged blocked See manual Shown in the event of snow ice or dirt on the windscreen for example 04 e Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 175 Driver Alert system Serv The system is disengaged l ice required e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended A The symbols are schematic Screen bol Driver Alert OFF The functi
295. les in every folder The top level which can handle up to 1000 subfolders files is an exception to this When using a longer model USB memory stick the use of a USB adapter cable is recommended This is to avoid mechanical wear to the USB input and the connected USB memory stick USB hub It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB connection and thereby connect multi ple USB devices simultaneously Selection of USB device is made in USB mode under USB menu Select USB device MP3 player Many MP3 players have their own file sys tems that are not supported by the audio sys tem For use in the system an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device Mass Storage Device mode iPod An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection via the player s con nection cable NOTE The system only supports the playback of audio files from iPod When an iPod is used as audio source the car s infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod play er s own menu structure Compatible file formats via the USB connection Audio and video files in the following table are supported by the system for playback via the USB connection Audio format mp3 wma aac m4a Video format divx avi asf A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre mium Sound Multimedia y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Media Bluetooth Ove
296. licable maximum speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded To activate speed warning e Check the option Speed alert at Settings gt Car settings Speed alert and go back out by pressing EXIT Limitations The RSI function s camera sensor is limited just like the human eye Find out more about this on page 175 Signs which indirectly provide information on a prevailing speed limit e g name signs for towns districts are not recorded by the RSI function Here are some other examples of what can disrupt the function Faded signs Signs positioned on bends Rotated or damaged signs Concealed or poorly positioned signs Signs completely or partly covered with frost snow and or dirt a 2 a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support MA Road sign information RSI 04 145 Y 04 Driver support 04 146 Speed limiter General information on the speed limiter A Speed Limiter can be regarded as a reverse cruise control the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre selected set speed by the speed limiter Operation Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panels Digital and Analogue Gp Speed limiter On Off Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed Standby mode O Activate and adjust the max speed O Selected speed O Speed limite
297. ll lists under Phone menu All calls e All calls e Missed calls e Answered calls e Dialled calls e Call duration ORE Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled numbers in reverse order Voice mailbox In normal view a speed dial number for the voice mailbox can be programmed in and then accessed later via a long press on 1 Voice mailbox number is changed in phone mode under Phone menu Call options gt Voicemail number gt Change number If there is no number stored then this menu can be reached with one long press on 1 Audio settings Phone call volume The phone call volume can only be changed during a call Use the steering wheel keypad or turn the VOL control Audio system volume Providing there is no ongoing call taking place the audio system volume is controlled as usual by turning VOL If an audio source is active during an incom ing call then it can be muted automatically Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system Bluetooth handsfree 06 279 06 Infotainment system 06 280 Bluetooth handsfree Activate deactivate in phone mode under Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Mute radio media Ring volume In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone settings Sounds and volume Ring volume and adjust by turning VOL Press OK MENU to hear the audio volume Press EXIT to save Ring signals The
298. lock is installed either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment D 03 113 E 03 Your driving environment 03 Activating the Bypass function Depress and hold the left hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx 5 seconds the combined instru ment panel first shows Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled after which the engine can be started This function can be activated several times The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop Activating the Emergency function Depress and hold the left hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx 5 seconds the combined instru ment panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started This function can be used once after which a reset must be made at a workshop 2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Alcoguard Restart possi ble Alcoguard Service required Alcoguard No signal Alcoguard Invalid test Alcoguard Blow longer Alcoguard Blow softer y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Symbols and text messages In addition to the messages already descri bed the foll
299. lvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop WARNING The air conditioning system contains pres surised refrigerant R134a This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop 09 Maintenance and service General The bulbs are specified see page 350 The following list contains locations of bulbs and other light sources that are specialised such as LED lamps or are unsuitable for changing for some other reason except at a workshop e Active Xenon headlamps ABL Xenon lamps e Position parking lamps front e Daytime running lights Side direction indicators door mirrors Approach lighting door mirrors Interior and cargo area lighting Glovebox lighting Position parking lamps rear Side marker lamps rear Brake light above the rear windscreen Number plate lighting 1 LED Light Emitting Diode 2 Certain variants On cars with Xenon headlamps the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car ried out at a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme cau tion because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit The car s electrical system must be in key position O when replacing bulbs see page 81 IMPORTANT Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat coating the reflector and then causing damage If an error message remains after the
300. ly the car s braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car to decrease the risk of skidding Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension and also the same make Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table see page 391 Tyre care Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged Tyres age and decompose even if they are hardly ever or never used The function can therefore be affected This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use Examples of external signs which indi cate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration New tyres o N o oO Y o oO Tyres are perishable After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the fric tion capacity characteristics gradually deteri orate For this reason aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them This is especially important with regard to winter tyres The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manu facture This is the tyre s DOT marking Department of Transportation and this is stated with four digits for example 1510 The tyre in the illustration was manufactured in week 15 of 2010 Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheel
301. ly Pull the wire gently minimal force is weather 07 required to disengage the hatch lock Filling up with fuel The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system Avoid spillage by waiting approx 5 8 seconds after refuelling before care fully removing the nozzle 07 During your journey Refuelling Filling with a fuel can When filling with a fuel can use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area Take care to insert the funnel properly into the filler pipe The filler pipe consists of two opening covers The funnel must be pushed past both covers before filling is started 07 General information on fuel Fuel of a lower quality than that recom mended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and fuel splashing in the eyes In the event of fuel in the eyes remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Never swallow fuel Fuels such as petrol and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swal lowed Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed WARNING Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited Switch off the fuel driven heater before starting to refuel Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling The ring signal could cause spark build up and ig
302. ly there is a size classification for C Full s a seat if the car is fitted with an activated air child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in A SS bag order to assist users in choosing the correct Reduced size rear facing 3 D child seat see the following table dal Sean NOTE seats are suitable for all seats in all car mod els Description E Rear facing infant seat If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi l cation the car model must be included on E Transverse infant seat left the vehicle list for the child seat A Full size front facing child hand seal G Transverse infant seat right B Reduced size alt 1 front hand Volvo recommends that you contact an facing child seat authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo B1 Reduced size alt 2 front fac recommends ing child seat Types of ISOFIX child seat Type of child seat Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats IN CT Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X G X X ee 9 01 Safety 01 Child safety Type of child seat Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats DE TT X OK Infant seat rear facing max 10 kg E IL Infant seat rear facing max 13 kg E X OK IL D X OK IL C X OK IL Child seat rear facing 9 18 kg D X OK IL C X OK IL 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Type of child seat Passenger seats for ISOFIX inst
303. m h and low engine speeds are encouraged The pointers fall dur ing acceleration and braking Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red zone on the meter with a short delay which means poor driving economy and hence should be avoided 7 Power is dependent on engine speed Average value The average value slowly follows the instanta neous value and describes how the car has been driven most recently The higher the pointers on the scale the better the driving economy achieved by the driver Power guide This instrument shows the relationship between how much power Power is being taken from the engine and how much power is available To view this function select the theme Performance see page 73 o 1 5 Ko o Available engine power Engine power utilised Available power The smaller upper pointer shows the availa ble engine power The higher the reading on the scale the more power is available in the current gear Utilised power The larger lower pointer shows the engine power utilised The higher the reading on the scale the more power is being taken from the engine A large gap between the two pointers indi cates a large power reserve 03 Your driving environment E Instruments and controls Indicator and warning symbols except the symbol for faults in the car s emis sions system and the symbol for low oil pres sure Indicator symbols 111
304. m selects the setting for optimal sound reproduction Normally DPLII and opti then appear in the display screen If the recording is made with Dolby Digital tech nology then playback will take place with this setting MDIGITAL then appears in the display screen When Off is selected 3 channel stereo is available e Bass Bass level e Treble Treble level e Fader Balance between the front and rear speakers e Balance Balance between the left and right hand speakers 1 Only Premium Sound Multimedia 2 Only when Surround is activated 3 Not Performance e Subwoofer Bass speaker level e DPL Il centre level3 channel centre level Volume for centre speaker e DPL Il surround level 2 Level for sur round Advanced audio settings Equalizer The volume level can be adjusted separately for different wavelengths 1 Press OK MENU to access Audio settings and select Equalizer 2 Select wavelength by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU 3 Adjust the audio settings by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU Con tinue in the same way with other wave lengths you want to change 4 When you have finished with audio set tings press EXIT to confirm and return to normal view For general information on menu navigation see page 251 and menu overview see page 254 06 Infotainment system Sound stage The sound experience can be optimised for the driver s seat both front seats or t
305. matically subdued in darkness the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align ment of the headlamp beam which could dazzle oncoming motorists Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden 1 Leave the engine running or have the car s electrical system in key position I 2 Roll the thumbwheel up down to raise lower beam alignment G047477 Thumbwheel positions for different load cases Only driver Driver and passenger in the front passen ger seat Occupants in all seats Occupants in all seats and maximum load in the cargo area Driver and maximum load in the cargo area 90 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Cars with active Xenon headlamps have automatic headlamp levelling and are there fore not equipped with the thumbwheel 4 4 Position parking lamps Knob for headlamp control in the position for position parking lamps Turn the knob to the position for position parking lamps number plate lighting is switched on at the same time If the car s electrical system is in key position Il or the engine is running then the daytime running lights are also switched on When it is dark outside and the tailgate is opened the rear position parking lamps illumi nate to alert traffic behind This
306. ment Scan 0 268 DivX VOD code p 269 Repeat folder p 268 Audio settings p 253 Audio settings p 253 Select USB device p 272 footnote B SEDERE See footnote B Change subtitles p 271 a O CAL RA Mulmecia and Pye A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Pre B For submenus see Main menu AM mium Sound Multimedia Change audio track p 271 B For submenus see Main menu AM A Vi i Scan 268 Main menu DVD Video Disc menu Main menu iPod4 p See footnote B Play Pause Continue p 268 Se 0 268 A Does not apply to Performance BF b Main menu AM ED nage Audio settings p 253 LS Subtitles p 268 See footnote P Main menu Media Bluetooth A Does not apply to Performance 06 Audio tracks p 268 B For submenus see Main menu AM O cues 2 h i 214 Advanced settings p 269 Main menu USBA OS p 0 269 Play p 271 Remove Bluetooth device p 274 Angle i ause Scan p 275 Stop p 271 Random p 268 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment Bluetooth software p 275 Scan p 291 Menus TEL version in car Main menu Bluetooth handsfree Audio settings p253 Phone menu Audio settings p 253 See footnote All calls p 279 See footnote P A For submenus see Main menu AM A Does not apply to Performance All calls p 279 B For submenus see Main menu AM Pop up enade and TVS Main menu AUX Press OK MENU when a video file is being Missed calls p 279 played back or TV is being shown in order AUX input volume p 254 t
307. ment panel and controls for menu navigation 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Additional heater 5 Exit the menu with RESET The menu options are only visible in key position I any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine Information displays digital combined instrument panel and controls for menu navigation aly OK button Thumbwheel 05 RESET button 1 Before starting the engine Select key position I see page 82 Press OK to access the menu Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional heater or Settings and select with OK 4 Select one of the options ON or OFF using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK 3 Analogue combined instrument panel 4 Digital combined instrument panel Option accessory for more information see Introduction 231 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 Trip computer General Checking and settings can be made immedi ately after the combined instrument panel is automatically illuminated in connection with unlocking If none of the trip computer s con trols are actuated within approx 30 seconds after the driver s door has been opened then the instrument extinguishes after which either key position II or engine starting is required in order to operate the trip com puter If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated
308. menu may appear on the display screen The disc menu gives access to additional func tions and settings such as selecting subtitles language and scene selection 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia Option accessory for more information see Introduction A video film is only shown when the car is stationary When the car is moving at a speed of over about 8 km h no picture is shown and No visual media available while driving appears on the display screen although the audio is heard during this time The picture is shown again as soon as the car s speed falls below about 6 km h Navigation in the DVD video disc s menu G044042 Navigation in the DVD video disc s menu is performed using the number keys in the cen tre console as illustrated above Media player Changing chapter or title Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and navigate through them if the film is being played back then it is paused Press OK MENU to select the chapter this also leads back to the original position if the film was being played back then it is restarted Press EXIT to access the title list Titles are selected in the title list by turning TUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK MENU this also leads back to the chap ter list Press OK MENU to activate the selection and return to the start position Use EXIT to cancel the selection and this leads back to the original positio
309. missions Urban driving 1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment EU driving cycles all in accordance with EU Directive 80 1268 EEC Euro 4 EU Regulation no 692 2008 715 2007 Euro 5 and UN ECE Regulation no 101 The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra urban driving Urban driving the measurement starts with cold starting the engine The driving is simulated Extra urban driving the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 120 km h The driving is simulated Cars with manual transmission are started in 2nd gear applies to cars with up to 18 inch wheels The value for combined driving which is reported in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra urban driving in accordance with legal requirements CO emissions the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles These are then analysed and give the value for CO emissions 10 Specifications 01 10 00 111 There are several reasons for increased fuel e Drive gently and avoid unnecessary consumption compared with the table s val acceleration as well as braking too hard 1 ues Examples of this are e Drive with the correct air pressure in the e The driver s driving style tyres and check this regularly select ECO tyre pressure for best results see e If the customer has specified whe
310. mitter is far away even if there is a lot of static TP from selected station all stations The radio can only interrupt for traffic infor mation from the selected station or all sta tions within the RDS network 06 06 Infotainment system Goin FM mode to FM menu Advanced settings Set TP favourite to change News This function allows news broadcasts sent within a set station s RDS network to break through The NEWS symbol indicates that the function is active Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu News settings News News from selected station all stations The radio can only interrupt for news from the selected station or all stations in the RDS net work Goin FM mode to FM menu News settings gt Set news favourite to 06 change Programme types PTY The PTY function can be used to select one or more programme types such as pop music and serious classic The PTY symbol indicates that the function is active This func tion allows programme types broadcast within a set station s RDS network to break through 4 Only cars with 7 inch screen 1 Activate in FM mode by first selecting the programme types under FM menu gt Advanced settings gt PTY settings gt Select PTY 2 Then the PTY function must be activated under FM menu gt Advanced settings gt PTY settings gt Receive traffic bulletins from other networks An indicator is shown in the TV screen when
311. mph No display Parking heater For a description of programming the timer see page 226 Direct start Timer 1 leads to the menu for selecting time Timer 2 leads to the menu for selecting time Additional heater For more information see page 230 0 Auto On Off TC options Here you can select activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings Distance to empty tank in the trip computer The ayoo for the items already selected are WHITE with a tick oth ers are GREY and have no tick il il 1 Open the function with OK scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumb Average speed wheel and select stop on the desired symbol Trip meter T1 and total dist 2 Confirm with OK the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a tick Trip meter T2 and total dist ip i 3 Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service gt gt Option accessory for more information see Introduction 233 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Trip computer Oil level4 For more information see page 341 Messages For more information see page 205 A Certain engines Headings 1 To ensure that no control is in the middle 3 Stop on desired heading One of the headings in the following table can of a sequence Reset them first with be
312. n The Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed interval 65 200 km h on roads with clearly visible side lines The function is tem porarily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2 6 metres between the lane side lines 182 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Off amp On Press the button in the centre console to acti vate or deactivate the function The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button Some combinations of the selected equip ment leave no vacant space for an On Off button in the centre console in which case the function is handled instead by the car s menu system MY CAR Here proceed as fol lows Select On or Off under Settings gt Car settings Lane Keeping Aid For a description of the menu system see page 207 In addition the following selections can be made in MY CAR e Warning with vibration in the steering wheel Vibration only On or Off e Active steering Steering assist only On or Off e Both Warning with vibration in the steer ing wheel and Active steering Full function On or Off Active steering The Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within the side lines for the lane Driver Alert System Lane Keeping Aid Warning with vibration in the steering Dynamic cornering wheel G046349 LKA intervenes and steers away G046348 If the vehicle approaches the left or right side LKA does not enga
313. n without any selection being made The chapter can also be changed by pressing on I on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad Advanced settings Angle If the DVD video disc supports it the function can be used to choose from which camera position a particular scene should be shown Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced settings Angle DivX Video On Demand The media player can be registered in order to play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or USB The code for registration can be found in the menu system MY CAR Settings gt Information gt DivX VOD code For general information on menus see under MY CAR see page 207 For more information visit www divx com vod Picture settings You can adjust the settings when the car is stationary for brightness and contrast 1 Press OK MENU and select Image settings confirm with OK MENU 2 Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and confirm with OK MENU 3 Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU To return to the settings list press the OK MENU or EXIT The picture settings can be reset to factory settings with the Reset option 7 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia Compatible file formats The media player can play back a variety of file types and is compatible with the formats in the following table Dual format double sided discs DVD Plus CD DVD format are thic
314. n a position P or if the car is moving Press twice or hold the START STOP ENGINE button 03 depressed until the engine stops Steering lock A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock unlocks or locks e The steering lock unlocks when the remote control key is in the ignition switch and the START STOP ENGINE button is depressed e The steering lock locks when the driver s door is opened after the engine has been switched off Key positions For information on the remote control key s different key positions see page 81 2 Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment Starting the engine external battery Jump starting If the battery is flat then the car can be started with current from another battery When jump starting the car the following steps are recommended to avoid short cir cuits or other damage 1 Insert the remote control key in key posi tion 0 see page 81 2 Check that the donor battery has a volt age of 12 V 3 Ifthe donor battery is installed in another car switch off the donor car s engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other 4 Connect one of the red jump lead s clamps to the donor battery s positive terminal 1 IMPORTANT Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment 5 Open the clips on the front cover of th
315. n has resulted in several separate energy saving functions of which Start Stop is one all with the collective task of reducing fuel consump tion which in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions General information on Start Stop The engine is switched off it becomes quieter and cleaner Some engine and gearbox combinations come fitted with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e g stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights the engine is then switched off temporarily and restarts automatically when the journey is due to con tinue The Start Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to allow the engine to stop auto matically whenever appropriate Manual or Automatic Note that there are differences in the Start Stop function depending on whether the gearbox is manual or automatic Eiin F Es ad a Ta el rhea frre E ru Y Start StopThe function is activated automatically when MICA the engine is started with the key The driver is alerted to the function by means of the symbol for the On Off button illuminating in the combined A instrument panel and the lamp in the On Off button illuminating All of the car s normal systems such as light ing radio etc work as normal even with an engine that has stopped automatically except that some equipment may have the function tempora
316. n the display E a 10 Park Assist Pilot 193 Registered speed 143 PAP A information 0 Rain sensor 101 Oil level measure 341 NW ment Lane Keeping Aid 184 Information symbols in the roof console display Driver Alert Sys 181 184 lem Lane Keeping Symbol Meaning R Page Aid Seatbelt reminder 18 Driver Alert Sys 179 181 tem Time for a break Airbag passenger 23 Gear indicator 118 spat activated manual gearbox Airbag passenger 23 Automatic gear 119 seat opactivated positions IA Option accessory for more information see Introduction 10 Specifications 2 11 Alphabetical Index A ACC Adaptive cruise contro l 150 Active Bending Lights ABL 93 Active Park ASSISt 0cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 Active Xenon headlamps cccsecccseeeees 93 Adaptive cruise Control ccsssceseeeeees 150 aia usina tinas 158 ce A 157 Additional heater Diese l 230 Adjusting headlamp pattern o 97 halogen headlaMP scccccssseeeeessees 98 Adjusting the steering wheel 88 Airbag activating deactivating PACOS 22 driver s and front passenger side 20 Key switch Ol oiresncaiomia iaa 22 PA 20 Airbag system snnncionionicarcorictircin ciao 19 Air COMEIMOMING siria 222 A al E E T E 215 Air conditioning AC wisscisisaccenssne
317. n the position list featured in con nection with the illustration that describes the item Introduction Important information Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner s manual Example e Coolant e Engine oil Images The manual s images are sometimes sche matic and may deviate from the car s appear ance depending on equipment level and mar ket To be continued This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the fol lowing page Recording data Your vehicle contains a number of computers whose function is to continuously check and monitor the vehicle s operation and function ality Some of the computers can record information during normal driving if they detect an error In addition information is recorded in the event of a collision or inci dent Parts of the recorded information are required so that technicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the vehicle during servic ing and maintenance and so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and other regulations In addition to this the information is used for research purposes by Volvo in order to con tinually develop quality and safety as the information can contribute to a better under standing of the factors that cause accidents and injuries The information includes details of the status and functionality of various sys tems and modules in the vehicle with regar
318. ncncnnnnnos 91 position parking laMpS ccccoccnnncnco 90 rear fog a aninciandi a 94 tunnel detectiON ccccccoonnccccononccnonnanos 91 Lighting bulb replacement 346 daytime running lightS 349 dipped beam cars with halogen head o A 347 direction indicators front 348 main beam cars with active xenon heal dps cecaiuinudseisntiocdecttecsasaneneadoved 347 main beam cars with halogen head ADS osas rodas 347 position parking lamps front 348 rear bulb holder direction indicators brake lamps and reversing lamps 349 rear fog TAM ismael 350 side marker lamps frONt ccooncccc 348 vaniy WON osseciprevescazedatansnadecsensseieiectes 350 HORES WI 89 LKA Lane keeping assistant 182 Loading cargo ACA sra 304 SS ih se cers ate cece o 304 Mounting DOMIMSssticcasvecnssia saceseneseeanndes 305 rool lOa eaS 304 Lock confirmation savia dira 44 Locking unlocking lo E roo EE E T 56 tailgate ruinaa 58 Locks AULOMAUG IOCKING isc 56 o Po e 56 TA 56 Mo AAPP 385 Lubricants Capaciti8s oocccocnnncicnnicnonns 385 Main dipped beam see Lightning 91 Main beam automatic activation 92 Maintenance PLIST ONO ONIN Ossa 370 Making Cal S setmana 278 Manual JE DO avicconinicncia dai 118 GSI Gear selector assistance 118 TOWING ANC FECOVETY ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 31
319. nd door mirrors 104 Windscreen Heatin a 107 222 Windscreen WashinNQ ooocccccccnnccconannnnnns 102 Windscreen WipeTS ccoocccccocococonccnonoconanoss 101 fan SOUS OF APA APA 101 Winter CUIWI Ocasi n 297 Winter PP yanyessunansaccesseues vate 322 Wiper blades ooocccoccccocccococcnocononccnnnnnnns 352 CAI ING AP o on PA 352 O cco cnensitseeateactavennenadentiameeceotac 303 replacing rear WINGOW c ccceeeeeees 353 service POSIT OM scisdinsnvsecctateeciooctsaicenvens 352 Wipers and WashiNQ ooonccccnnccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnos 101 Volvo Car Corporation TP 16042 English AT 1320 Printed in Sweden Goteborg 2013 Copyright 2000 2013 Volvo Car Corporation
320. nge position For information on the key blade see page 48 Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the lives of passengers in the car If the car is equipped with a front passen ger airbag but does not have a PACOS switch Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch then the airbag will always be activated Never place a child in a child seat or ona booster cushion in the front seat if the air bag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas senger seat if the message in the roof con sole see page 23 indicates that the air bag is deactivated at the same time as the warning symbol for the airbag system is shown in the combined instrument panel This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction Visit a workshop as soon as possible Volvo recommends that you con tact an authorised Volvo workshop y Option accessory for more information see Introduction PASSENGER AIRBAG G048069 Position of airbag label plus switch The airbag is activated With the switch in this position persons taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat but never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion EJ The airbag is deactivated With the switch in this position children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat but never pers
321. ning and treatment of leather upholstery which when used in accordance with the instructions preserves the leather s protective coating After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will never theless emerge depending more or less on the surface texture of the leather This is a 09 Maintenance and service QD Car care natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year or more if necessary The Volvo Leather Care kit is available from your Volvo dealer IMPORTANT e Certain items of coloured clothing for example jeans and suede garments may stain the upholstery e Never use strong solvents Such prod ucts may damage fabric vinyl and leather upholstery Washing instructions for leather upholstery 1 Pour the leather cleaner on the damp ened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam 2 Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements 3 Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains Allow the sponge to absorb the stain Do not rub 4 Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely Protective treatment of leather upholstery 1 Pour a small amount of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather 2 Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes b
322. nite petrol fumes leading to fire and injury IMPORTANT Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo s guarantees and any sup plementary service agreements this is applicable to all engines Extreme weather conditions driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car s performance Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly The catalytic converters consist of a monolith ceramic or metal with channels The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum rhodium palladium These metals act as cata lysts i e they participate in and accelerate a chemical reaction without being used up themselves Lambda sond oxygen sensor The Lambda sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen con tent of the exhaust gases leaving the engine This value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient com bustion and together with the three way cat alytic converter reduce harmful emissions hydrocarbons carbon monoxide and nitro
323. not intervene in situa tions where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly e g when parking In situations where the driver demonstrates active aware driving behaviour a collision warning may be postponed slightly in order to keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta tionary for a maximum of 1 5 seconds If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov ing then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand Camera sensor limitations The car s camera sensor is alSo used as well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake by the functions e Automatic main dipped beam dimming see page 92 e Road sign information see page 143 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection e Driver Alert Control see page 179 e Lane keeping assistant see page 182 Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice snow mist and dirt Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye i e they see wo
324. not the seatbelts are fastened Applies to all seatbelt positions apart from centre seat rear It is therefore possible that only one or none of the airbags may inflate in a colli sion The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that one or more airbags are deployed Airbags on the driver s side The car has two airbags to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver s side One of the airbags is folded up in the centre of the steering wheel see the illustration on page 19 the steering wheel is labelled AIRBAG G046233 Knee airbag on the driver s side in a left hand drive car The second airbag at knee level is fitted in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver s side this panel is labelled AIRBAG WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the airbags in the event of a collision Passenger airbag Location of the front passenger airbag in a left hand drive car Location of the front passenger airbag in a right hand drive car 7 01 Safety 9 Airbags 01 The car has an airbag to supplement the pro WARNING tection afforded by the seatbelt on the pas senger side It is folded up into a compart Never place a child in a child seat or on a ment above the glovebox Its cover panel is booster cushion in the fr
325. ns for the use of a warn ing triangle Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use First aid kit A case containing first aid equipment is located on the left side of the cargo area G015352 G015353 g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 08 Wheels and tyres 08 329 Emergency puncture repair TMK General Version 2 08 Emergency puncture repair TMK Temporary Mobility Kit is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust tyre pressure It consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid The kit works as a temporary repair The seal ing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expiration date and after use The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc tured in the tread The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall Do not seal tyres with the emer gency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits cracks or similar damage Connect the compressor to one of the car s 12 V sockets see pages 244 and 306 Choose the socket that is nearest the punc tured tyre The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo 330 y Option accessor
326. nsions and pres UG M ee 391 aC aeaiystemi 20 393 mera o val M ML 0 394 Leet x a 403 mbolsiin the diSplay 2 2 406 Introduction Important information Introduction A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner s manual ideally before your first journey This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions to see how best to handle the car in different situations and to make the best use of all the car s features Please pay atten tion to the safety instructions contained in the manual The specifications design features and illus trations in this owner s manual are not bind ing We reserve the right to make modifica tions without prior notice Volvo Car Corporation Option All types of option accessory are marked with an asterisk In addition to standard equipment this man ual also describes options factory fitted equipment and certain accessories retrofit ted extra equipment The equipment described in the owner s manual is not available in all cars they have different equipment depending on adapta tions for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations In the event of uncertainty over what is stand ard or an option accessory contact a Volvo dealer Special texts WARNING Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury
327. nsole can also be used 2 Continue with the next letter and so on The result of the search is shown in the phone book 3 3 To change the input mode to numbers or special characters or to go to the phone book turn TUNE to one of the options see explanation in the table below in the list for changing the input mode 2 press OK MENU 123 ABC Change between letters and numbers with OK MENU More Change to special characters with OK MENU gt Leads to the phone book 8 Turn TUNE to select a contact press OK MENU to see the saved numbers and other information A short press on EXIT deletes an input char acter A long press on EXIT will clear all entered characters By pressing a number key in the centre con sole when the text wheel is shown see illus tration above a new character list 1 appears in the TV screen Continue repeat edly pressing the number key to the desired letter and then release Continue with the next letter and so on When a button is depressed the entry is confirmed when another button is depressed To enter a number hold in the corresponding number key 4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction New contact G044052 Entering letters for New contact Changing the input mode see table below Input field New contacts can be added in phone mode under Phone menu
328. nt every other regular service e Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water In the event of any doubt about water quality used ready mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec ommendations For capacities and recommended fluid grade see page 385 The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard frequent braking such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high The fluid reservoir is located on the driver s side o When changing coolant replacing humidity Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid O system lec flush El The level must be between the MIN and MAX cooling system clean with approve marks which are located on the inside of the quality tap water or flush with ready WARNING reservoir mixed coolant If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive fur j bs hate Pa oniy oe eS i ie ther before pein fe brake fluid i Q IMPORTANT well filled cooling system Otherwise l es eo es Volvo recommends that the reason for the Do not forget to refit the cap S E loss of brake fluid is investigated by an occur resulting in the risk of damage authorised Volvo workshop cracks in the cylinder head 09 Maintenance and service 09 Engine compartment Air conditioning system Troubleshooting and repair The air conditioning system contains fluores cent tracing agents Use ultraviolet light when looking for leaks Vo
329. nt panel shows a mes sage to the effect that the function is has been active NOTE When City Safety brakes the brake lights come on Operation The City Safety function is always ena bled after the engine has been started via key position I and Il see page 81 on key positions 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model On and Off In certain situations it may advisable to disa ble City Safety e g where leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet and or wind screen After starting the engine City Safety can be deactivated as follows e Using MY CAR on the centre console s screen with its menu system search and locate Settings gt Car settings Driver support systems City Safety Select the Off option For more information on the menu system MY CAR see page 207 However the function will be enabled the next time the engine is started regardless of whether the system was enabled or disabled when the engine was switched off WARNING The laser sensor emits laser light even when City Safety is disabled manually To enable City Safety again e Follow the same procedure as for disa bling but select the On option 04 Driver support UN City Safety 04 Y 04 Driver support City Safety Limitations The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of w
330. ntains one channel but no sub channels If a subchannel is being played and a preset is saved then only the main channel is registered This is because subchannels are temporary At the next attempt to retrieve the preset the channel which contained the subchannel will be played The preset is not dependent on the channel list A list of pre selected channels can be shown in the TV screen The function is activated deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu gt Show presets ORE The audio system s DAB system does not support all functions in the DAB standard Radio text Some radio stations transmit information on programme content artists etc This informa tion is shown on the TV screen The function is deactivated activated in DAB mode under DAB menu Show radio text Only one of the functions Show radio text and Show presets can be acti vated at a time If one of them is activated when the other is already activated then the previously activated function is deacti vated automatically Both functions can be deactivated Advanced settings DAB to DAB link DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio can go from one channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another channel group with better reception There may be a certain delay when changing chan nel group There may be a period of silence between the current channel no longer being available to the new channel becoming avail able
331. ntle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required e g if there are any uneven edges The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry 3 Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush a matchstick or similar Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried 4 For scratches proceed as above but mask around the damaged area to pro tect the undamaged paintwork If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place fill in with basecoat and clearcoat as soon as the surface has been cleaned Ty pe Gesignatlon Sarg eran rs rr aie aeRO 376 y gt AM E a tn eoeaneecseensa capos seras 3 8 Wide specifications a ceraccanccncnnnco nen can cco neo ncn non nec reinen niass 382 A e comm a E 383 DOL E Ta OEE E POPE O E 385 FUC A a a fort cs cccdeseeccoenssdeceuieenncedasenscosusdecceesecntoaeederdaantscncss 387 OT al 0 Wheel and tyres dimensions and pressure ooccconccnccncnnococnnncnonennnnnnss 391 Eleamican y SiC on o a ocsiccsesecoseeescseeescausenasueescenecssouees 393 010 2 at ls 2 Sve ssh o eee 394 LICOMSES no as Pa ro Mewrnann a ota A 403 Symbols in the Aspar A 406 374 011 10 SPECIFICATIONS GE a i ae a 10 Specifications Type designations Label location VOLVO CAR CORPORATION HESDOHV AFSJJEF Ol BFDRY CiriV Gidr_urtvb 222M 2 Ao ls VOLVO
332. nun ciation A number of phrases are presented on the screen for the driver to read aloud When the sys tem has learnt how the driver talks the presentation of the phrases stops Following which e g User 1 can be selected in Voice user set ting in order that the system shall listen to the right user 4 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Menu source MY CAR 05 gt gt 213 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 214 Menu source MY CAR Voice output volume A volume control appears on the screen at which point proceed as follows 1 Adjust the volume with the thumbwheel 2 Test listen using OK 3 Use EXIT to store the setting and the menu is switched off Voice POI list Edit list The number of facilities is exten sive and varies depending on mar ket Maximum 30 favourite facilities can be stored in this list For more information on Facilities and Voice recognition see the Navigation system s owner s man ual Audio settings Climate settings p 24 Automatic blower adjustment p 220 Normal High Low Recirculation timer On Off Automatic rear defroster On Off Interior air quality system On Off Reset climate settings All menus in Climate settings are given original factory settings Favourites FAV p 25 Volvo On Call Described in a separate manual Information Option accessory for more in
333. o lt S eee we BEBE ET o acid e 0 Fault in the ABL system Emissions system Fault in the ABS system Rear fog lamp on Stability system DSTC Trailer sta bility assist Stability system sport mode Engine preheater diesel Low level in fuel tank Information read display text Main beam on 75 93 a 75 132 75 94 75 141 314 75 141 Us CS ET 8 NS 10 Specifications Symbols in the display Left hand direction 75 FA Adaptive cruise 152 Camera sensor 168 10 indicators control uy Laser sensor 176 181 184 Right hand direc 75 ae Adaptive cruise 152 tion indicators control A Distance warning 163 Dist Alert 168 176 Start Stop engine 75 125 Cruise control 448 PETE Is Be ip A auto stopped O sion warning sys Speed limiter 146 tem Auto brake Information symbols in the combined AS instrument panel y A 159 Engine and passen 227 heater Main beam with 92 a auto dimming Start Stop 128 Activated timer 227 Camera sensor 92 tu Start Stop 128 O Activated timer 2217 Adaptive cruise 159 SS control PER Adaptive cruise 153 Start Stop 128 Vv AO SS control 154 159 O N a aS Adaptive cruise 153 161 control Distance Start Stop 128 Low battery 227 Warning Distance Alert STOP gt gt y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 407 10 Specifications 01 10 00 111 Symbols i
334. o Brake to do the braking there will be a collision sooner or later Two system levels Depending on how the car equipped the Col lision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Protection function may appear in two vari ants Level 1 and Level 2 Level 1 The driver is merely warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals no automatic braking intervenes the driver must himself brake Level 2 The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals the car is braked automatically if the driver him self does not act within a reasonable time IMPORTANT Maintenance of components included in Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection must only be carried out in a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 1 NOTE The illustration is schematic details may vary depending on car model 2 With system Level 2 only y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Function Function overview Audio visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk 2 Radar sensor Camera sensor Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes three steps in the following order 1 Collision warning 2 Brake support 3 Auto Brake The collision warning system and City Safety complement each other For more information on City Safety see page 164 1 Collision warning The driver is first warned of
335. o access the pop up menu p 279 Answered calls i Audio settings p 253 Image settings p 269 p 279 See footnote Source menu p 251 Dialed cas A For submenus see Main menu AM B See footnote Cali duration p 279 one DOO p 06 C Select country p 290 see footnote DVD disc TOP menu p 268 Seach p 281 Reorganise presets p 290 A Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV 282 Autostore p 290 B What is shown in the pop up menu for the source menu New contact si depends on what is being played back or displayed it can be e g CD DVD data menu or USB menu C Only applies to DVD video discs p 283 Speed dials j p 283 Receive vCard gt gt g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 257 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment Memory status peg Voicemail number peels Clear phone book p 284 Disconnect phone p 278 Change phone 0 278 A Does not apply to Performance Remove Bluetooth device p 279 Phone settings Discoverable p 277 Sounds and volume p 279 Download phone book p 280 aE p 284 Bluetooth software version in c Call options Auto answer p 279 Centre console controls for radio functions RADIO button for selecting the wave length AM FM1 FM2 DAB1 DAB2 2 Station presets 0 9 Confirm your selection or go to the radio menu by pressing OK MENU O Select the desired frequency station or navigate in the radio menu by turning TUNE Hold in t
336. o open accidentally Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen Child safety Label Airbag The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened see the illustration on page 22 01 Safety 9 01 33 9 01 Safety 01 Child safety Recommended child seats DN Front seat with deactivated airbag Group 0 Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat rear facing child seat secured with the ISOFIX fixture system Outer rear seat Centre rear seat max 10 kg Type approval E1 04301146 Group 0 L max 13 kg Group 0 Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat rear facing Volvo infant seat Volvo Infant Seat rear facing child Volvo infant max 10 kg child seat secured with the car s seatbelt seat secured with the car s seatbelt seat Volvo Type approval E1 04301146 Type approval E1 04301146 Ie Meet Group 0 rear facing child U U seat secured max 13 kg with the car s seatbelt Type approval E1 04301146 U Group O Child seats which are universally approved Child seats which are universally approved max 10kg U U Group 0 max 13 kg 2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer s enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement a A ees PO Child safety PO Child safety 01 seat Group 1 Volvo rear facing turnable child seat Volvo Volvo rear
337. o using clean ing agents Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt Each inlay mat is secured with pins Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift the mat straight up Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid get ting caught adjacent to and under the ped als A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recom mended by your Volvo dealer Stains on fabric upholstery and roof upholstery A special fabric cleaning agent available from authorised Volvo dealers is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery IMPORTANT Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvo s leather upholstery is chromium free and is treated to preserve its original appear ance Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau tiful patina over time The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural characteristics It is given a protective coa ting but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appear ance Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the clea
338. ocking the remaining doors The function can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Lock settings gt Doors unlock with both the alternatives All doors and Driver door then all For a description of the menu system see page 207 Approach light duration Used to switch on the car s lighting at a distance For more information see page 97 le Tailgate Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only For more informa tion see page 58 Panic function Used to attract atten tion in an emergency Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds Otherwise the function switches 02 Locks and alarm 8 Remote control key key blade off automatically after 2 minutes and 45 sec Unique PCC functions If any of the other buttons are pressed onds during this time then the reading is interrupted 02 Range The remote control key s functions have a range of about 20 m from the car MM If none of the indicator lamps illumi nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations as well as If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC contact a workshop an a
339. odnenas 285 Oil see also Engine Oil cccccseeseeeeees 383 Oil TEV SLOW rc dowsnwsdenedossiesnmsnciiusiasdaednecuannes 339 OvVemneatind score 309 Owner s manual environmental labelling 11 PAGO e E E ET 22 PACOS S WI buin 22 Paintwork GOIQUP COS ii ctccescncetcensenivdcncentedeveoaiendan 372 damage and touch up s seceees 372 Panel MOMUNG s ssictcecscceizecsacctsccsssctiesvensencnenns 90 Panie TUCU o ssicseonecenwnencatenenunedesveesenscteene 46 PAP Active Park ASSISt 00cccseeeeeeee 193 Parcel Melissa 308 Park assist CAMELA ccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 Parking ASSISTANCE cesses sddvscacsaxnecareneideedas 186 parking assistance SeENSOIS 06 188 Parking WV AKC cesiones 133 Parking Neaten seso 226 battery and UB acissaas mitos 226 parking on a hill 226 Ume SS GING A 229 Passenger compartment c cceeeeee 241 Passenger compartment filter 215 Passenger compartment heater A 226 Passenger compartment lighting Bits ga AC AAA e 96 PCC Personal Car Communicator TUPIGUGNS ceire acsute iw ocsicenitenantiuiecevatiosasads 46 A E 47 48 Pedestrian Protection ccccscccsseeeseeeees 170 Petrol Ora wccctredccseuseantesisedcadasadinesdeneeess 301 Phone CONNEC soske a ce aniceacensans 277 ps A 276 INGOMINO CANS aaciiisdiadsiais 278 Makina calS arees 278 phone DOOK AAA 280 phone book shortCut oocccccncconno 280 receivin
340. olby Pro Logic screen or via a remote control Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia G044129 The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used in the development and tuning of the sound to ensure a world class sound experience If the Infotainment System is active when the engine is switched off then it is automatically activated the next time the key is inserted into Y key position I or higher and it continues with D O LBY the same source e g radio as before the DIGITAL Overview engine was switched off the driver s door must be closed on cars with Keyless sys BRO LOGIC ll tems G044178 The infotainment system can be used for 15 06 minutes at a time without the remote control Made under license from Dolby Laboratories key being in the ignition switch by pressing Dolby Pro Logic and the double D symbol the On Off button are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories When the car is being started the infotain ment system is switched off temporarily and continues when the engine has started Audyssey MultEQ Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia G046366 1 AUX only applies to Performance and USB does not apply to Performance 249 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment inputs for external audio sources e g Operating the system Scroll fast wind search Short press iPod scrolls between
341. oling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D 05 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 222 Climate control Temperature regulation ECC o 100 Bani Mernapol Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre console s display screen The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently Repeatedly press L R in the button to select the setting for left right or both sides Set the temperature using the knob the selected temperature for either side is displayed in the centre console dis play Temperature regulation ETC The temperature in the pas F senger compartment can be adjusted with the knob AC Air conditioning on off When the lamp in the AC button illuminates the air conditioning is controlled by AC the system s automatic func tion This way incoming air is cooled and dehumidified as required When the lamp in the AC button is switched off the air conditioning is disconnected Other functions are still controlled automatically When the max defroster function is activated the air conditioning is switched on automati cally so that the air is dehumidified at the maximum setting ri a a A Option accessory for more information see Introduction Heated windscreen and max defroster The
342. om the dashboard air vents to ensure good comfort in warm dry weather to ensure efficient cool ing in warm weather Air to floor Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows Airflow to windows from dashboard air vents and to the floor to direct heat or cold to the floor to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up in cold weather or hot dry weather 05 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 226 Engine and passenger compartment heater General The parking heater fuel driven prepares the engine and passenger compartment before departure so that wear and energy needs during the journey are reduced Warming up your car will also extend the driving distance The heater can be started directly or with timer Two different times can be selected using the timer Here time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready The car s electronic system calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature Fuel driven heater The fuel driven heater cannot start if the out side temperature exceeds 15 C At 5 C or lower the maximum running time of the heater is 50 minutes Do not use the fuel driven heater indoors Exhaust gases are secreted When the fuel driven auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from under neath the car which is perfectly normal Refuelling Warning label on fuel filler flap Fuel
343. omen and steering wheel 01 Safety 9 01 17 9 01 Safety Seatbelts Seatbelt reminder R o N ite lt T o 0 Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas ten their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual reminder The audio reminder is speed dependent and in some cases time depend ent The visual reminder is located in the roof console and in the combined instrument panel Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system O Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions e Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat A mes sage appears in the combined instrument panel when the seatbelts are in use or if one of the rear doors has been opened The message is acknowledged automati cally after approximately 30 seconds driv ing or after pressing the indicator stalk s OK button If anyone is unbelted then the message can only be acknowledged manually by pressing the indicator stalk s OK button e Provides a warning if one of the rear seat belts is unfastened during travel This warning takes the form of a message in the combined instrument panel along with the audio visual signal The warning stops when the seatbelt is re fastened or it can also be acknowledged manually by pressing the OK button The combined instrument panel s information display see page 71 shows which seat belts are in use This information is always ava
344. on Putting on a seatbelt Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle A loud click indicates that the belt has locked Pr kj i 3 a i h de A L TAD Incorrectly fitted seatbelt The belt must rest on the shoulder 044057 G044055 Seatbelt height adjustment Press the button and move the belt vertically Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat The locking tab at the centre rear seat only fits into the intended seatbelt buckle Releasing the seatbelt Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract If the seatbelt does not retract fully feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose The seatbelt locks and cannot be with drawn e if itis pulled out too quickly e during braking and acceleration e if the car leans heavily Make sure that you e donot use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly e ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything e the hip strap must be positioned low down not over the abdomen e tension the hip strap over the lap by pull ing the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder The seatbelts and airbags interact If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision Each seatbelt is designed for only one per
345. on function may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc Out of PCC range If the PCC is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown without the light travelling around on the PCC If several PCCs are used for the car then it is only the PCC last used for locking unlocking that shows correct status Fi If none of the indicator lamps illumi nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 48 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Detachable key blade A remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out The key blade s unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops which are rec ommended when ordering new key blades Key blade functions Using the remote control key s detachable key blade e the left hand front door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be acti vated with the remote control key see page 54 e the rear doors mechanical child safety locks can be activated deactivated see page 62 e the right hand front door and the rear doors can be locked manually e g in the event of power failure see pag
346. on is disengaged Driver Alert Available The function is activated Driver Alert Standby lt 65 km h The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km h Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disen gaged Read about the limitations of the camera sensor see page 175 g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 181 Y 04 Driver support Driver Alert System Lane Keeping Aid General information on the Lane Keeping Aid 04 G046269 The Lane Keeping Aid function Lane Keeping Aid is intended for use on motorways and similar major roads to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situations A camera reads the painted side lines of the road lane If the car is about to cross a side line the Lane Keeping Aid actively steers the car back into the lane with slight steering tor que in the steering wheel If the car reaches or passes a side line the Lane Keeping Aid warns the driver with puls ing vibrations in the steering wheel A Av A N al I Vi ING Yi Ga H o WWIABEMIEMIENMCOA LKA is merely a driver s aid and does not engage in all driving situations or traffic weather or road conditions The driver always bears ultimate responsi bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed Functio
347. onconononc 83 Backrest rear Seat lowering 86 Bad Nolder susi 305 o Ao 355 393 MaintenanCe ccccconccnnnonccnnnnoncnnennnnanoss 355 remote control cascara 293 remote control key PCC ooccccccconcoccnnnos 50 start assistance renere 117 symbols on the battery 356 warning SIMIO Sica diia 356 Blind spot BLS isseire 199 Do Sinarcas 198 11 Alphabetical Index Bluetooth C location in the Caf 32 handsfree citrico licaias 276 o eea 32 media reaicosusdaquiiediio seta lceciicids 273 Calls Child safety OCKS oecccccccccccccccccccccecccccccccceeee 62 microphone off cncsassancedausdeteayurmoncuennens 279 e ereraa nes 278 Child EAE E EE PEE NAT 2 streaming audio occcoccncccocnccnonncnnnnnnnnns 273 ae SA OM A enn 278 ds 2 transfer call to mobile 279 apy EEO eee ieee ce 166 175 Child SeAats oonconnionnnconinnnoninaninancnannnannnnos 32 7 Pannat oenn aaa ISOFIX fixture system for child seats 36 Opening vanced Car Cal aininn Ei 368 ee E rn 34 Brake and clutch fluid 343 Car care leather upholstery 370 size classes for child seats with the Brake 10 y Io 94 CArgO AF CA secccsessesessecessesetseseeseeeeees 304 307 ISOFIX Maure See cis ts 36 a 131 o A E E ean 307 upper mounting points for child seats 40 anti lock braking system ABS 131 ona e E E oe 96 Cigarette lighter SOCket
348. one or more child seats booster cushions in the rear seat cozo739 E Children of all ages and sizes must always sit AN Always fit child seats booster cushions in the correctly secured in the car Never allow a Child seats and airbags are not compatible rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated child to sit on the knee of a passenger If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he she could suffer serious injury if the Volvo has child safety equipment child seats airbag deploys booster cushions amp attachment devices which is designed for your particular car important to read the installation instruc Using Volvo s child safety equipment pro tions included vides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car Furthermore the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use When using child safety products it is 1 For information on activated deactivated airbag see page 22 ee WARNING Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air bag SRS is activated No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag SRS is activated Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life WARNING Booster cushions child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle s opening but ton must not be used as they could cause the seatbelt buckle t
349. ons taller than 140 cm 01 Safety 9 Activating deactivating the airbag 01 WARNING Activated airbag passenger seat Activated airbag Deactivated airbag rer e Never place a child in a child seat or ona booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm Deactivated airbag passenger seat No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the air bag is deactivated PASSENGER AIRBAG oF e G046619 Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated deactivated A text message and a warning symbol in the A text message and a symbol in the roof con When the remote control key is in key roof console indicate that the airbag for the sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas position Il the warning symbol for the air front passenger seat is activated see preced senger seat is deactivated See preceding bag is shown in the combined instrument ing illustration illustration panel for approx 6 seconds see page 19 Following which the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag For more information about the different key positions for the remote control key see page 81 Option accessory for more information see Intro
350. ont seat if the air marked AIRBAG bag is activated Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front WARNING of the front passenger seat No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated The seatbelts and airbags interact If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision Failure to follow the advice given above life To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag ES deploys passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest Seatbelts must be secured WARNING Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located 9 01 Safety 01 22 Activating deactivating the airbag Key switch off PACOS General information The airbag for the front passenger seat can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch PACOS Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch For information on how to activate deactivate see under the heading Activating deactivating Key switch off switch The switch for the passenger airbag PACOS is located on the passenger end of the instru ment panel and is accessible when the pas senger door is open See under the heading below Activating deactivating Check that the switch is in the required posi tion The remote control key s key blade should be used to cha
351. options gt Time format selects the 24h or 12h system AM PM 03 10 07 am OK ise T o o 1 Locate Settings gt System options gt Clock digital instrument panel Time Display for showing the time 2 The cursor is located in the first box for Hour Press OK MENU the box is acti Set the clock vated The clock can be adjusted in the menu group MY CAR for more information see page 207 ES Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and press OK MENU the box is deactivated 4 Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute A and press OK MENU the box is acti vated B 5 Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and press OK MENU the box is deactivated 6 Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and press OK MENU the setting is com plete 11The time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted a gt E 03 Your driving environment 03 80 Volvo Sensus General Control panel in centre console ap Navigation NAV see separate owner s manual Road and Traffic Information System RTI A Infotainment RADIO MEDIA TEL see page 248 Car settings MY CAR see page 207 O Climate control see page 215 Park assist camera CAM see page 189 Volvo Sensus is the car s operating system the heart of your personal Volvo experience Volvo Sensus combines and presents many functions in several of the car s syst
352. or additional settings of program ming interruptions EON Distant and EON Local see the section Enhanced Other Net works EON below Press EXIT to return to the interrupted audio source press the OK MENU to clear the message Alarm This function is used to warn of serious acci dents and catastrophes The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted or deactivated The message ALARM appears on the TV screen when an alarm message is transmitted Traffic information TP This function allows traffic information sent within a set station s RDS network to break 2 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia 3 Factory settings 06 Infotainment system through The TP symbol indicates that the function is activated If the preset station can send traffic information then this is shown by TP glowing brightly in the TV screen other wise TP will be grey Activate deactivate in FM mode under FM menu TP Enhanced Other Networks EON This function is useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations It allows the dis tance between the car and the radio station transmitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the current audio source Activate deactivate in FM mode by selecting one of the options under FM menu Advanced settings gt EON e Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close Distant interrupts if the station trans
353. or each bar between 1 km and 10 km the cursor at the far right changes position between up and down depending on the scale selected Operation A setting can be defined in the MY CAR menu system MY CAR gt My V40 Trip statistics all previous statistics back out of the menu by selecting EXIT e Reset for every driving cycle check the box by selecting ENTER and back out of the menu by selecting EXIT With the Reset for every driving cycle option checked all statistics are deleted automatically once driving is complete and the car has been stopped for 4 hours The journey statistics start again from zero the next time the engine is started If a new drive cycle begins before 4 hours have passed the current period has to be deleted manually first using the Start new trip option See also information on Eco guide on page 73 3 The figure is schematic layout may vary depending on updated software and market 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Trip computer e Start new trip ENTER is used to delete 05 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Adapting driving characteristics Speed related power steering Steering force increases with the speed of the car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity The steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed The driver can choose between three differ ent levels of steering for
354. orwards or backwards in its position The com bined instrument panel then shifts the indi cation from S to show which of the gears 1 2 3 etc is engaged Geartronic Sport mode S The Sport programme provides S sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears At the same time it responds more quickly to acceleration During active driving the use of a lower gear is prioritised leading to a delayed upshift To activate Sport mode e Move the gear selector to the side from D position to the end position at S the combined instrument panel changes indi cation from D to S Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving Geartronic Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually 1 Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector from D position to the end position at the combined instru ment panel shifts the indication from D to the figure 1 2 Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards plus twice the combined instrument panel shifts the indication from 1 to 3 3 Release the brake and accelerate care fully The gearbox winter mode means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels Kick down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration a lo
355. ot pull the electrical cable only the connector 6 Replace the relevant bulb as instructed 1 EDLift out the bonnet stop The headlight must be fitted and the contact fitted correctly before switching on the lights or switching key position 3460 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 09 Maintenance and service QD 09 Additional main beam Dipped beam Main beam G043274 G046379 1 Detach the headlamp see page 346 1 Detach the headlamp see page 346 1 Detach the headlamp see page 346 Undo the cover see page 346 2 Undo the cover see page 346 Undo the cover see page 346 E Press the bulb holder upwards until it releases Pull out the bulb holder 4 Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order 3 Cars with halogen headlights 4 Cars with xenon headlights E Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise EYPull out the bulb holder Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order ri 7 a A Option accessory for more information see Introduction EPress the bulb holder upwards until it detaches Pull out the bulb holder Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order 347 09 Maintenance and service 09 Lamps Direction indicators oo Ke qT o 1o _ 1 Detach the headlamp see page 346 2 Undo the cover 3 Push in the catch E Pull out the bulb holder 4 Replace the bu
356. ote receiver 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction EP Windscreen wipers Rear windscreen wiper Central locking system fuel filler flap Unlocking tailgate Electric additional heater But ton seat heating rear Airbags Pedestrian airbag OQO OR A Reserve position 4 constant voltage A See also fuse 84 B See also fuse 83 C See also fuse 82 D See also fuse 77 E See also fuse 70 F See also fuse 65 20 10 10 75 10 ES 09 Maintenance and service QD i a A Option accessory for more information see Introduction gt gt 365 09 Maintenance and service On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses Positions The label on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses 2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended G045949 Fuses 2428 ool JOASE upeana peor rey should be replaced by a workshop e Fuses 1 23 and 29 46 are of Mini Fuse Control panel right front door 25 type ECO se Control panel right rear door 25 Keyless 10 Power seat left 20 Door handle Keyless 5 Control panel left front door 25 i 13 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 09 Maintenance and service
357. ou do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system 01 Safety 9 01 WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces such as due to a rear end collision the WHIPS system must be checked Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop Part of the WHIPS system s protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged Volvo recommends that you contact an i m H authorised Volvo workshop to have the a H system checked even after a minor rear Do not place objects on the rear seat that may end collision prevent the WHIPS system from functioning WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest 9 01 Safety 01 When the systems deploy When the systems deploy Triggered WARNING Triggered PETE O manera The airbag system s control module is located in the centre console If the centre Seatbelt ten In the event of a frontal tame Jin A Son console is drenched with water or other sioner front seat collision and or side turning and or some liquid disconnect the battery cables Do impact collision and or frontal collisions not attempt to start the car since the air rear end collision bags may deploy Recovering the car and or overturning Whiplash pro In a rear end collision Volvo recommends that you have it con tection WHIPS veyed to an authoris
358. ow A down i P 240 50 04 Operation The design of the steering wheel keypad dif fers depending on whether the car is equip ped with the speed limiter Go4e138 1 Cruise control On Off 2 Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed Standby mode O Time interval Increase decrease O Activate and adjust the speed Green marking at stored speed WHITE standby mode Time interval ACC is active at the GREEN symbol WHITE standby mode 3 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market 152 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction WITHOUT speed limiter Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed Cruise control On Off or Standby mode Time interval Increase decrease O Activate and adjust the speed O Not used Green marking at stored speed WHITE standby mode Q Time interval ACC is active at the GREEN symbol WHITE standby mode Activating and setting the speed To enable cruise control Press the steering wheel button cf a similar WHITE symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel 6 which shows that the cruise control is in standby mode To activate cruise control e At the required speed press the steering wheel button F or gt The current speed is stored in the mem ory the combined instrument panel shows a magnifying
359. owing may also be shown Display text Meaning Action The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes engine star ting possible without new test Contact a workshop Transmission failed send manually with but ton 3 or take a new breath test Test failed take a new breath test Blowing too short blow for longer Blowing too hard blow more gently Display text Meaning Action Alcoguard Blow harder Alcoguard wait Preheat ing Blowing too weak blow harder Heating not finished wait for text Alcoguard Blow 5 seconds Petrol and diesel engines Ignition switch with remote control key extrac ted inserted and START STOP ENGINE button IMPORTANT Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned Hold the end with the detachable key blade see page 49 1 Insert the remote control key in the igni tion switch and press it in to its end posi tion Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started see page 111 2 Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed For cars with automatic gearbox Depress the brake pedal 3 Press the START STOP ENGINE button and then release it The starter motor works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection trig gers IMPORTANT If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before
360. ox increase air resis tance leading to higher fuel consumption remove the load carriers when not in 07 use e Do not run the engine to operating tem perature at idling speed but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one e Cars with manual transmission are started in 2nd gear applies to cars with up to 18 inch wheels under normal con ditions on flat ground For more information and further advice see the pages 11 and 387 Never switch off the engine while moving such as downhill this deactivates impor tant systems such as the power steering and brake servo Driving in water The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km h Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water During driving in water maintain a low speed and do not stop the car When the water has been passed depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function e Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud e Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time this could cause electrical malfunctions IMPORTANT Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter In depths greater than
361. p down O Adjust backrest rake turn the wheel O Raise lower the seat pump up down O Control panel for power seat 1 Also applies to power seat Adjust the position of the driver s seat before setting off never while driving Make sure that the seat is in locked posi tion in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident Adjusting front seat head restraints G046489 The height of the front seat head restraints can be adjusted Adjust the head restraint based on the per son s height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible To adjust the height the button see illustra tion must be pressed while the restraint is moved up or down The head restraint can be adjusted in three different positions Lowering the front seat backrest G043898 The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads ED Move the seat as far back down as possi ble gt Adjust the backrest to an upright position Es Lift the catches on the rear of the back rest and fold it forward 4 Push the seat forward so that the head restraint locks in under the glovebox Raising takes place in reverse order i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment E 03 83 03 Your driving environment WARNING Power seat Seat adjustment is normally made in key position and can always be made when
362. panel that you contact an authorised Volvo work drive car shop immediately 12 e o 0 G045790 tem remains illuminated or illuminates while driving it means that the airbag sys tem does not have full functionality The symbol indicates a fault in the airbag sys tem the belt tensioner system SIPS the IC system or some other fault in the sys i tem Volvo recommends that you contact la an authorised Volvo workshop immedi A MN f T Soe ately es Digital combined instrument panel a bag system viewed from above right hand rive car G018666 Fe N o o The warning symbol in the combined instru ment panel is switched on with the remote Os 9 01 Safety The system consists of airbags and sensors A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag s are inflated and become hot The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision When this occurs smoke escapes into the car This is completely normal The entire process including inflation and deflation of the airbag occurs within tenths of a second Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or
363. pened e amovement is detected in the passenger compartment if fitted with a movement detector e the caris raised or towed away if fitted with a tilt detector e the battery s cable is disconnected e the siren is disconnected If there is a fault in the alarm system then the information display in the combined instru ment panel shows a message In which case contact a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment air currents are also regis tered For this reason the alarm is trig gered if the car is left with a window open or if the passenger compartment heater is used To avoid this Close the window when leaving the car If the car s integrated pas senger compartment heater or a portable electric heater shall be used direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compartment Alternatively reduced alarm level can be used see page 64 Do not attempt to repair or alter compo nents in the alarm system yourself Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insurance Same LED as lock indicator see page 45 7 F 3 r q A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system s status LED not lit Alarm not armed The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and
364. phone From the car this will now look like you have double records with dif ferent icons Note also that when a short cut number is saved or a change to a con tact is made this will result in a new record in the car s phone book All use of the phone book requires that the Fy symbol appears at the top of the TV screen and that the handsfree function is in phone mode The audio system stores a copy of the phone book from each paired mobile phone The phone book can be copied automatically to the audio system during each connection Activate deactivate the function in phone mode under Phone menu gt Phone settings Download phone book If the phone book contains a ringing caller s contact information then this is shown in the TV screen Quick search for contacts In normal view turn TUNE to the right to obtain a list of contacts Turn TUNE to select and press OK MENU to call Under the name of the contact is the phone number that is selected by default If the sym bol gt appears to the right of the contact then there are several phone numbers stored for the contact Press OK MENU to show the numbers Change and dial a number other than that selected by default by turning TUNE Press OK MENU to dial Search in the list of contacts by using the centre console s keypad to key in the start of the contact s name see Character table key pad in centre console for button functions The list of contacts c
365. quirements For further information contact a Volvo dealer Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the car s electrical system Certain accessories only function when their associated software is installed in the car s computer system Volvo therefore recommends that you always con tact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electrical system Introduction Important information Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that consists of safety security and comfort serv ices If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a Change of owner it is very important that these services are discontinued so that the former owner cannot access the services in the car Contact an authorised Volvo dealer in the event of a change of ownership Information on the Internet At www volvocars com there is further infor mation concerning your car A QR code reader is required to read the QR code which is available as a supplemental program for several mobile phones The QR code reader can be downloaded from App Store or Google Play Ob QR code Option accessory for more information see Introduction 9 Introduction Volvo and the environment Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor poration s core values which influence
366. r 2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer 3 The indicator lamp remains lit while the button is held depressed 5 Locate the programming button on the receiver for the garage door for example normally located close to the antenna s bracket on the receiver 6 Depress and release the receiver s pro gramming button The button flashes for approx 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period 7 While the receiver s programming but ton is still flashing press the button on HomeLink being programmed and hold it depressed for approx 3 seconds and then release it Repeat the press hold release sequence up to 3 times to con clude the programming Operation When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls Press and hold the programmed button until the garage door alarm system etc is acti vated may take several seconds Naturally the original remote controls can still be used in parallel with HomeLink if required If the ignition is switched off HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver s door has been opened If programming problems persist contact 03 HomeLink on www homelink com or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 or premium rate phone number 49 6838 907 277 Resetting the HomeLink buttons It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink buttons at the same time not each button
367. r active Switch on and activate When the speed limiter is active its symbol 6 is shown in combination with a mark 5 by the set maximum speed in the combined instrument panel Selection and storage of the highest possible speed in the memory can be made both dur ing a journey and while stationary While driving 1 Press the steering wheel button to switch on the speed limiter gt The symbol 6 for speed limiter illumi nates in the combined instrument panel 2 When the car is moving at the desired highest possible speed Press one of the steering wheel buttons or until the combined instrument panel shows a mark 5 next to the desired maximum speed gt The speed limiter is then active and the selected max speed is stored in the memory y Option accessory for more information see Introduction When stationary 1 Press the steering wheel button G to switch on the speed limiter 2 Scroll with the button until the com bined instrument panel shows a mark 5 next to the desired maximum speed gt The speed limiter is then active and the selected max speed is stored in the memory Changing the speed To change the stored speed e Adjust with short presses on E or every press gives 5 km h The last presses made are stored in the memory To adjust 1 km h e Hold down the button and release it when the combined instrument panel shows a mark 5
368. r course both options can not be displayed simultaneously Limitations Bicycle racks or other accessories moun ted on the back of the car may obscure the line of sight of the camera ne Pay attention to the possibility that even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view Obsta cles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car To bear in mind e Keep the camera lens free from dirt ice and snow e Clean the camera lens regularly with luke warm water and car shampoo take care not to scratch the lens 192 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support i Park Assist Pilot PAP General G046250 The On Off button is on the centre console The Park Assist Pilot PAP Park Assist Pilot helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space The combined instrument panel uses symbols graphics and text to show when different operations should be performed When a towbar is configured with the car s electrical system the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space PAP does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid The driver always has the final responsibil ity for d
369. r or driving at high altitudes in combi nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car s performance 07 During your journey 07 303 07 During your journey General information on loading Payload depends on the car s kerb weight The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car s payload by a corresponding weight For more detailed information on weights see page 379 ES The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote control key see page 58 The car s driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load To bear in mind when loading e Position the load firmly against the rear seat s backrest Note that objects must not prevent the func tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat s backrests is folded 07 down see page 26 e Centre the load e Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests e Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery e Secure all loads to the load retaining eye lets with straps or web lashings A loose object weighing 20 kg can ina frontal collision at a speed of 50 km h carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro mised or eliminated by high loads e Never load cargo above t
370. r the button in the centre console to accept a menu selection If OK MENU is pressed while in the normal view a menu for the selected source opens e g RADIO or MEDIA Arrow to the right of the screen is shown when there are underlying menus TUNE turn the thumbwheel in the steer ing wheel or the knob in the centre console to scroll among tracks folders radio and TV stations phone contacts or to navigate among choices on the display screen 0 EXIT Short press leads upwards in the menu system interrupts current function interrupts rejects phone calls or erases entered characters Long press leads to nor mal view or if you are in normal view to the highest menu level main source view from where you can reach the same main source buttons located in the centre console 7 D INFO If more information than can be shown on the screen is available press the INFO button to see the remaining informa tion 12 Preset buttons input of numbers and let ters 13 FAV shortcut to a favourite setting The button can be programmed for a commonly used function in AM FM etc For more infor mation see page 252 14 MUTE cars without navigation press to deactivate the radio media audio or restore the audio if it has been switched off 15 Voice recognition cars with navigation press to activate voice recognition for Blue tooth connected mobile phone and naviga tion system y Option accessor
371. raking or has automatically braked The laser sensor is temporarily non operational because something is blocking it e Remove the object blocking the sensor and or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor Read about the limitations of the laser sensor see page 166 City Safety is not operational e Visit a workshop if the message remains an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended 04 Driver support 4 City Safety 04 Y 04 Driver support 04 170 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection General Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedes trian Detection is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedes trian or vehicle in front that is stationary or moving in the same direction Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedes trian Detection is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedes trian Detection is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedes trian Detection may prevent a collision or reduce the collision speed Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedes trian Detection must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his her driving style If the driver solely relies on Collision Warning with Aut
372. replaced Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products A except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No 50 dated e Before replacing a windscreen con July 26 2001 tact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted The upper label in the figure describes the e The same type or Volvo approved laser beam s classification windscreen wipers must be fitted dur ing replacement e Laser radiation Do not look into the laser beam with optical instruments Class 1M laser product The lower label in the figure describes the physical data of the laser beam N 04 Driver support 04 City Safety e EC 60825 1 1993 A2 2001 Complies with FDA U S Food Administration standards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with Laser Notice No 50 from 26 July 2001 Radiation data for the laser sensor The following table specifies the laser sen sor s physical data Maximum pulse energy 2 64 uJ Maximum average output 45 mW Pulse duration 33 ns Divergence horizontal x verti 20x2 cal If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury e Never look into the laser sensor which emits spreading invisible laser radia tion at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a mag nifying glass microscope lens or simi lar optical instruments e Testing repair remov
373. rest Bag holder Folding bag holder To simplify loading in the cargo area the rear z seat backrest can be folded down see page 86 The bag holders keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their contents around the cargo area The holder has a capacity of max 3 kg Load retaining eyelets h AS G046001 Dr Folding bag holder A folding bag holder in the floor can be opened up in three positions It can be set to two adjustment positions and one service position as it is known where it is fully unfol Bag holder ded There are also two floor combination G045846 ito co 10 SY Jo O The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten variants one with adjustment positions in a straps in order to anchor items in the cargo tub under the floor and one with adjustment area positions in plastic rails The raising below shows the adjustment position in a tub under WARNING the floor ay Hard sharp and or heavy objects which The load on the central holder is max 3 kg protrude may cause injury under violent and max 10 kg on the outer holder braking Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps Option accessory for more information see Introduction 305 07 During your journey 12 V socket le V MAX I20W Lift the handle on the upper floor and fold up the floor Lower the cover to access the electrical gt
374. rily reduced e g the climate control system s fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system Auto stopping the engine The following is required for the engine to auto stop Declutch set the gear lever in neu M tral position and release the clutch pedal the engine stops automati Cally Stop the car with the foot brake A and then keep your foot on the pedal the engine stops automati Cally A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox In some cases the engine stops automatically before the car is completely stationary The combined instrument panel s symbols for the Start Stop function illuminate as verification and reminder that the engine has stop ped automatically 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN Start Stop 03 A gt gt 125 03 Your driving environment 03 126 Start Stop Auto starting the engine eo A AA With the gear lever in neutral posi tion 1 Depress the clutch pedal or press the accelerator pedal the engine starts 2 Engage a suitable gear and drive The following option is also availa ble on a downhill gradient Release the foot brake and let the car move off the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal walking pace Release the foot pressure on the foot brake the engine starts auto matically and the journey can con tinue A M
375. riving the vehicle in a safe manner and for paying attention to the surround ings and other road users approaching or passing during parking Function The PAP function measures the space and turns the steering wheel the driver s task is to follow the combined instrument pan el s instructions and select the gear reverse forward control the speed brake and stop PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started e The functions DSTC or ABS must not interfere while the PAP function is ena bled these can be activated due to a steep or slippery surface for example see pages 131 and 140 for more informa tion e Trailers must not be connected to the car e The speed must be below 50 km h 04 Principle for PAP The PAP function parks the car using the fol lowing steps 1 The function searches for a parking space and measures it A amp B During measure ment speed must not exceed 30 km h The car is steered into the space while reversing C amp D The car is straightened up in the space by driving back and forth E amp F Option accessory for more information see Introduction 193 Y 04 Driver support 04 194 Park Assist Pilot PAP Operation The driver is instructed by means of simple clear instructions in the combined instrument panel using both graphics and text Remember that certain steering wheel positions m
376. rol key a remote control key must be approx 1 5 m from the car door handle or tailgate This means that the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the remote control key with him or her It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the remote control key is on the opposite side of the car The red rings in the preceding illustration indi cate the range covered by the system s antennas If all remote control keys are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or Il is active see page 81 and a door has been opened and then closed the information display in the combined instru ment panel shows a warning message while sounding an audible reminder at the same time y Option accessory for more information see Introduction When the remote control key has been returned to the car the warning message goes off and the audible reminder ceases once either or e a door has been opened and closed e the remote control key has been inserted in the ignition lock e The OK button on the direction indicator stalk Safe operation of the remote control key with keyless function If a remote control key with keyless function is left in the car it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked This prevents unau thorised entry However if someone breaks into the car and finds the remote control key it is reactivated It is therefore important to handle all remote control keys with great
377. rong stations When a station is found it is played for approx 10 seconds before scanning is resumed When a station is playing back it is saved as a preset in the usual way For more information on presets see Preset below Goin DAB mode to DAB menu Scan to start scanning E NOTE Scanning stops if a station is saved Scanning can also be selected in DAB PTY mode In which case only channels of the pre selected programme type are played Programme type PTY Various types of radio programmes can be selected using the programme type function There are a number of different programme types which also include different programme categories After selecting a programme type navigation only takes place within the chan nels that are broadcasting that type Programme type is selected in DAB mode under DAB menu gt PTY filtering Exit this mode as follows Press EXIT gt An indicator is shown in the TV screen when PTY is activated In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to DAB linking see below is implemented Preset 10 station presets can be stored per wave length DAB has 2 memories for presets DAB1 and DAB2 Storage of presets is made by means of a long press on the desired pre set button for more information see 5 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia page 260 The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons A preset co
378. ronment Instruments and controls 68 VOVO SENSUS eden ao toa cates 80 RENO cee tnt cece 81 SEMS E E T ooas eeeee 83 Jee iC i ee 88 ee ee 89 Wipes and Waning A 101 Windows rearview and door mirrors 104 Co CE Eo E 110 Ao AA x AAA 111 Starting the engine A 115 Starting the engine external battery 117 Go ioxes S A 118 gt ee 125 Oo i 0002000000 181 AM aria 133 A a aerereme trae 134 04 Driver support DSTC Stability and traction control sys Sl eee tye me reer ters eer trio errr re 140 Road sign information RSI 143 SpecalllMiten a eee arene 146 aes control A ccoo 148 Adaptive cruise control c c occcc oom 150 Distance Waming A os 161 lie Satoty A O o 164 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 4 Pedestrian Detection cccccssseeeeees 170 Driver Alert SySte mm cccccceseeeseeeeeeeeeees 178 Driver Alert System DAC 00006 179 Driver Alert System Lane Keeping Aid 182 NENA assist SYSt S 186 Paeassist camera A 189 Park Assist Pilot RAP 193 BES and CTA aac cee eect ero see 198 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Menus and MessageS ccccccccononcccnncnnnnano 204 Menu source MY CAR aattaro ote 207 Climate control esere e ann Grace 215 Engine and passenger compartment DGT N 226 Additional heater M
379. rrr G046238 o aD o ito t Oo O The cargo net can be easily removed and folded up Release the tension in the net by pressing in the button on the anchoring strap s lock and feeding out part of the strap The parcel shelf can be removed to provide additional cargo space D co N t o 0 Parcel shelf removal ED Undo the parcel shelf lifting eyes on both Press in the catch and detach both of the sides anchoring strap s hooks ED Unhook the front edge of the parcel shelf E Unhook the rod from its roof mounting by and remove it pulling back on the rod in the roof mount ings rear end position Press the rod in any direction so that the hook engages in the rod which at the same time releases the hook on the other side 07 Finally remove the remaining roof mount ing hook from the roof mounting Driving with a trailer General Payload depends on the car s kerb weight The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories e g towbar reduces the car s payload by a corresponding weight For more detailed information on weights see page 379 If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer e The car s towing bracket must be of an approved type e lf the towbar is retrofitted check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer e Distribute the load on the
380. rs and steering force Memory function in remote control key with keyless function If several people each with a remote control key approach the car then the settings for seat and mirrors are implemented for the per son who opens the driver s door After the driver s door has been opened by person A with remote control key A but per son B with remote control key B is to drive the settings can be changed as follows e Standing by the driver s door or sitting behind the steering wheel person B 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction presses their remote control key s unlock button see page 46 e Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1 3 see page 84 e Adjust seat and mirrors manually see page 84 and 106 e Adjust steering force in the MY CAR menu system see see page 209 Lock settings The Keyless drive function can be adapted by indicating in the menu system MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked under Car settings gt Lock settings Keyless entry there select between All doors unlock Any door Doors on same side and Both front doors For a description of the menu system see page 207 02 Locks and alarm Antenna location WARNING People who have had a pacemaker opera 02 tion should not come closer than 22 cm to the Keyless system s antennas with their pacemaker This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the K
381. rs are activated e the brake system is prepared for the upcoming emergency braking aa WARNING Do not fit any accessories or change any thing in the front Incorrect intervention at the front may cause incorrect function in the system and lead to serious injury and damage to the car Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms are used and that you only use genu ine parts for them Handling after activation If any of the other airbags in the passenger compartment were activated the car remains in safety mode see page 29 If only the pedestrian airbag was activated 1 Move the car to a safe location as close as possible 2 Fold the airbag following the instructions under the next heading Folding the air bag Pedestrian Airbag 3 Seek the nearest workshop WARNING Volvo recommends that after activation of the airbag you contact an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible Folding the airbag Pedestrian Airbag o M No o 0 Airbag Pedestrian Airbag 2 Airbag housing Velcro strap passenger side O Velcro strap driver s side The airbag may feel warm and give off smoke This is normal Fold the airbag as fol lows 1 Find the Velcro strap on the driver s side 4 2 Gather the airbag fabric along its length on the driver s side Then fold the gath ered fabric towards the centre Wind the Velcro strap double sided around as much fabric as possible and fasten it
382. rs to work correctly they must be kept clear of dirt ice and snow and be cleaned regularly with water and car sham poo Dirt ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support UN 04 173 Y 04 Driver support Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection Limitations Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedestrian Detection is active from approx 4 km h The visual warning signal no 1 in the illus tration on page 170 may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight reflections when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead The warn ing sound should therefore always be acti 04 vated On slippery road surfaces the braking dis tance is extended which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision In such situa tions the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability The visual warning signal can be temporar ily disengaged in the event of high passen ger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system e Warnings may not appear if the dis tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal move ments are large e g a very active driv
383. rse in darkness heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example Under such conditions the functions of camera dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged Strong oncoming light reflections in the car riageway snow or ice on the road surface dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor function when it is used to scan the carriage way and detect pedestrians and other vehi Cles The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim ited which is why pedestrians and vehicles cannot be detected in some situations or they are detected later than anticipated During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality Fault tracing and action If the combined instrument panel shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians vehi cles or road markings in front of the car At the same time this means that besides Collision Warning with Auto Brake the Auto matic main dipped beam dimming Road Sign Information Driver Alert Control and Lane Keeping Aid functions will not have full func tionality either The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introdu
384. rts An engine that has stopped automatically may restart in some cases without the driver having decided that the journey should con tinue In the following cases the engine also starts automatically if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal manual gearbox or takes his her foot off the brake pedal auto matic gearbox Misting forms on the windows M A The environment in the passenger M A compartment deviates from the preset values The outside temperature falls M A below freezing point or exceeds approx 30 C There is a temporarily high current M A take off or battery capacity drops below the lowest permissible level Repeated pumping of the brake M A pedal The car starts to roll faster than M the equivalent normal walking pace The driver s belt lock is opened A with the gear selector in D or N position Steering wheel movements The gear selector is moved from the D position to or R The driver s door is opened with A the gear selector in D position A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox 2 p a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN Start Stop 03 gt gt 127 03 Your driving environment 03 128 Start Stop Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically the engine may suddenly start automatically First switch off the engine as normal using the START STOP EN
385. rview General The car s media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can wirelessly play stream ing audio files from external devices with Bluetooth such as mobile phones and PDAs Navigation and control of the sound can be carried out via the centre console but tons or via the steering wheel keypad In some external devices it is also possible to change tracks from the device To play back the audio the car s media player must first be set in Bluetooth mode When a mobile phone is connected to the car it is also possible to remotely control a selection of the mobile phone s functions see page 276 Switch between the main sources TEL and MEDIA to operate each one s func tions The Bluetooth media player must support the Audio Video Remote Control Profile AVRCP and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile A2DP The player should use AVRCP version 1 3 A2DP 1 2 Otherwise some functions may not work Not all mobile phones and external media players available in the market are fully compatible with the Bluetooth function in the car s media player Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www volvocars com for information on compatible phones and external media players NOTE The car s media player can only play the audio files via the Bluetooth function Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key pad For general information
386. ry for information on Programme types PTY see page 262 This information is shown on the TV screen The function is activated deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced settings gt Show PTY text Resetting the DAB settings All DAB settings can be reset to the original factory settings The reset is carried out in DAB mode under DAB menu gt Advanced settings gt Reset all DAB settings 06 06 Infotainment system 06 266 Media player General The media player can playback audio and video from CD DVD discs and externally connected audio sources via the AUX USB input or wirelessly stream audio files from external devices using Bluetooth Certain media players can show TV and have the option to communicate with a mobile phone see page 276 via Bluetooth CD DVD functions 00 o0 Centre console control panel Gp Disc insert and eject slot 2 Disc eject MEDIA button activates last active media source If you are already in a media source and press the MEDIA but ton then a shortcut menu is shown for commonly used menu options O Input of numbers and letters 5 Confirm your selection or go to the menu for the selected media source by pressing OK MENU Select the disc tracks folders or navigate through menu options by turning TUNE Q Fast forward reverse and change disc track or chapter The media player supports and can play the following ma
387. ry hot If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure A ant Ici ilt Checking the level and topping up x a For capacities and for standards regarding water quality see page 385 Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank If the system is not filled sufficiently high temperatures could occur causing a risk of damage to the engine When topping up the coolant follow the instructions on the packaging It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather conditions Never top up with water only The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate 342 Option accessory for more information see Introduction 09 Maintenance and service QD Engine compartment 09 1 IMPORTANT Brake and clutch fluid Filling e Ahigh content of chlorine chlorides Checking the level iG and other salts may cause corrosion in Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser the cooling system voir The level must be between the MIN and e Always use coolant with anti corrosion MAX marks that are visible inside the reser agent as recommended by Volvo voir Check the level regularly e Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50 Change the brake fluid every other year or at water and 50 coola
388. s reserved This product includes software under following licenses GPL v2 http www gnu org licenses old licenses gpl 2 0 html e Linux kernel merge between MontaVista 2 6 31 kernel and kernel from L2 6 31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP e uBoot based on v2009 08 e busybox based on version 1 13 2 GCC runtime library exception http www gnu org licenses gcc exception html e libgcc_s so 1 LGPL v3 http www gnu org licenses Igp html e Libc so 6 libpthread so 0 Librt so 1 The FreeType Project License http www freetype org FTL TXT e libfreetype so 6 version 2 4 3 Divx nN po 0 N o 0 DivX Certified to play DivX video DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are registered trademarks of DivX Inc and are used under license ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX is a digital video format created by DivX Inc This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video Visit www divx com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX Video on Demand VOD content To generate the registration code locate the DivX VOD section in the device 10 Specifications Licenses setup menu Go to http vod divx com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD Covered by one or more of the following U S Patents 7 295 673 7 4
389. s together with an explanatory image in the 9 Only cars with alarm information display Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door that is open D If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx 7 km h then the informa tion symbol illuminates ES If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx 7 km h then the warning symbol illuminates If the bonnet is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi ble and close the bonnet If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information dis play Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate Trip meter i 9999 km G046377 Trip meter Display for trip meter The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for measuring short distances The distance is shown in the display Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show the required meter A long press until the change occurs on the left hand stalk switch s RESET button resets the trip meter shown For more information see page 232 10The appearance of the display may vary depending on variant Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN Instruments and controls Time The menu option Settings System
390. s Low battery in remote control Please change batteries and or e the locks repeatedly do not react to sig nals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car o o o e S e 0 G021086 G015518 Opening ED Slide the spring loaded catch to the side pa At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards E Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole behind the spring loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up this is to avoid the bat teries falling out when it is opened IMPORTANT Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Battery replacement Closely study how the battery batteries are secured on the inside of the cover with regard to their and sides Remote control key with 1 battery 1 Carefully prize out the battery 2 Install a new one with the side down Remote control key and PCC with 2 batteries 1 Carefully prize out the batteries 2 First install one new one with the side up 3 Position the white plastic tab in between and finally install a second new battery with the side down Battery type Use batteries with designation CR2430 3 V Assembly 1 Press the remote control key together 2 Hold the remote control key with
391. s and pull until the locking lugs in the lower edge of the cover are released from the fuse box 2 Remove the cover A relatively large amount of tensile force is required to release the locking lugs at the top edge of the cover from the electrical distribution unit 09 Maintenance and service o Cover refitting Fuel pump Combined instrument panel Central locking system fuel 10 filler flap 58 Rear window wiper 15 4 Climate panel 10 59 Interior lighting Roof console 5 for front reading lamps and Steering wheel module 7 5 passenger compartment light ing E Siren alarm Data link connec 5 tor OBDII Interior lighting Power seats 10 a 74 Main beam 15 1 Guide in the lower lugs 61 Snel Eo e 10 2 Turn the cover upwards until the upper i 75 a i lugs engage 62 Rain sensor Dimming interior 5 l rearview mirror Moisture sen de Reversing lamp 10 sor Windscreen wipers Rear 20 Make sure that the upper locking lugs are 63 Collision warning system 5 windscreen wiper seated properly in the grooves of the elec trical distribution unit 64 2 E Immobiliser 5 Positions 65 Unlocking tailgate 10 79 Reserve position 1 constant 15 The label on the inside of the cover shows the D voltage positions of the fuses Ey Reserve position 2 constant 20 The fuses are of Mini Fuse type 67 Reserve position 3 constant 5 voltage SES 81 Movement sensor alarm 5 63 Steering lock 15 Rem
392. s are changed the wheels should be marked with 08 Wheels and tyres which side of the car they were mounted on WARNING Rims and wheel bolts for example L for left and R for right A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car Wear and maintenance The correct tyre pressure results in more even o wear see page 328 Driving style tyre pres Tyres with tread wear indicators sure climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear To avoid dif ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other A suitable dis tance for the first change is approx 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals Volvo rec ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncer tain about tread depth If significant differen ces in wear gt 1 mm difference in tread depth ho Y i l between tyres have already occurred the cal WE Locking wheel bolts least worn tyres must always be placed on Tread wear indicators the rear Understeer is normally easier to cor ai ct than overseer and eade to the car con baras aero le miel ro eo On o IPS 1 wheel bolt steel rim 110 Nm tinuing forwards in a straight line rather than side of the tyre are the letters TWI Tread e Type 2 wheel bolt aluminium rim 130 10 o oO Y o oO 1 Low wheel bolt 2 High wheel bolt Tightening torque having the rear end
393. s driver support systems Setup menus The menus are structured as follows Menu level 1 Menu level 2 eee Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under MY CAR gt Settings Some menus have fur ther submenus these are then described in detail in their respective sections When selecting whether a function should be activated On or deactivated Off a square is displayed On Selected square Off Empty square e Select On Off with OK then back out of the menu with EXIT Car settings Car key memory p 84 On and 106 Off 05 gt gt O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Menu source MY CAR Lock settings p Automatic door locking e On and Off 57 Doors unlock All doors Driver door then all Keyless entry All doors Any door 05 Doors on same side Both front doors Audible confirmation On Off Reduced Guard p 60 Activate once ae Ask when exiting Side mirror settings p Fold mirrors 10 Tilt left mirror Tilt right mirror Light settings p 96 Interior light Floor lights Ambient light Ambient light colours Door lock confirmation light paa On Off Unlock confirmation light On Off or p 46 and Off 97 30 sec Approach light duration 60 sec 90 sec Home safe light duration pet 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec Triple indicator p 35 On Off Temporary LH traffic pusi On Off Temporary RH traffic On Off 05 Comfort and dri
394. s stored in the mem reactivate Cruise Control the car must be made ory and the combined instrument panel s stopped and the engine restarted i marking 5 illuminates at the selected Press the steering wheel button D 04 speed Temporary deactivation standby mode gt The combined instrument panel s mark To temporarily disengage cruise control and ing 5 and symbol 6 change colour from D NOTE set it in standby mode GREY to WHITE and the speed is then Cruise Control cannot be enabled at Press Q set to the last speed stored speeds below 30 km h gt The combined instrument panel s mark A ing 5 and symbol 6 change colour from Changing the speed ae io pally A marked speed increase may occur once To change the stored speed the speed has been resumed by selecting Automatic standby mode Adjust with short presses on or every press gives 5 km h The last Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and presses made are stored in the memory set in standby mode if Deactivate To adjust 1 km h e wheels lose traction The cruise control is switched off with the e the foot brake is used steering wheel button 1 or by switching off e Hold down the button and release it at the engine the set speed is deleted from the the required speed e speed falls below approx 30 km h memory and cannot be resumed with the A temporary increase in speed with the accel e the clutch peda
395. safely Operation The steering wheel buttons and combined instru ment panel in cars without speed limiter 1 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market 143 Option accessory for more information see Introduction The steering wheel buttons and combined instru ment panel in cars with speed limiter 1 Cruise control On Off Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed Standby mode O Activate and adjust the speed O Selected speed GREY Standby mode Cruise control active WHITE symbol GREY Standby mode Activating and setting the speed To enable cruise control Press the steering wheel button 04 Driver support Cruise control gt The cruise control symbol 6 in the com affect the cruise control setting the car e the gear selector lever is moved to neu bined instrument panel changes from returns to the set speed when the accelerator tral position N automatic gearbox GREY to WHITE and shows that the pedal is released e the driver maintains a speed higher than cruise control is in standby mode the set speed for longer than 1 minute ee Nae CS entro The driver must then regulate the speed e At the required speed press the steering a eee ed pedo a i E p wheel i ne SV Inu esume set spee ven aS is blocked and deactivated To be able to To reactivate the cruise control from standby gt The current speed i
396. scription of the menu system see page 207 Dial a number The system understands the numbers 0 zero to 9 nine These numbers can be pro nounced individually in groups of several numbers at a time or the whole number all at once Numbers greater than 9 nine cannot be handled by the system e g 10 ten or 11 eleven are not possible The following is an example of a dialogue with voice commands The system s reply will vary depending on the situation The user starts the dialogue by saying Phone gt call number or Phone call number System reply Number User action Start saying the numbers as individual units i e six eight seven etc in the phone num ber If you say several numbers and pause the system will repeat them and then say Continue Continue to say the numbers When finished finish the command by saying Call iy Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system Voice recognition mobile phone 06 gt gt 287 06 Infotainment system Voice recognition mobile phone 06 288 e You can also change the number by say ing the commands Correct which dele tes the last spoken group of numbers or Delete which deletes the whole spoken phone number Dialling from the call register The following dialogue allows you to make a phone call from one of your mobile phone s call registers The user starts the dialogue by saying
397. se gear during normal forward travel e Follow the gearing pattern printed on the gear lever and start from neutral position N then depress the gear lever before moving it to R position e Engage reverse gear only when the car is stationary Gear shift indicator An essential detail in connection with environ mental driving is to drive in the right gear and to change gear in plenty of time An indicator is available as an aid on some variants GSI Gear Shift Indicator which notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consump tion However taking into consideration cha racteristics such as performance and vibra tion free running it may be advantageous to change gear at a higher engine speed The framed number indicates the current gear 03 Your driving environment EN Gearboxes Manual gearbox With Analogue combined Gear positions Gear shift indicator for man instrument panel the gear Automatic gear positions are ual gearbox Only one 3C km h positions and indicator indicated on the right of the marker is illuminated at a arrows are displayed in its combined instrument panel time it is illuminated in the centre Only one marker is illumi centre only during normal nated at a time the one driving showing the current gear 03 selector position Symbol S for Sport mode is ORANGE when the mode is active
398. sed Volvo workshop The function is only active in twilight or dark ness and only when the car is moving The function can be deactivated activated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings gt Car settings gt Light settings gt Active Bending Lights For a description of the menu system see page 208 3 Activated on delivery from the factory Rear fog lamp a G045897 Button for rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when key position Il is active or the engine is running and the headlamp control s knob is in position or BESA Press the button for On Off The rear fog lamp indicator symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on The rear fog lamp is switched off automati cally when the engine is switched off or when the headlamp control s knob is turned to position 0 or EH ORC Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on dur ing braking For information on the emer gency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers see page 131 Press the button to activate the hazard warn ing flashers Both direction indicator symbols a in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are used The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car has been braked so sudd
399. selected for constant display in the com 2 presses on RESET bined instrument panel Proceed as follows to 2 Turn the thumbwheel selectable head determine which ings for the trip computer are shown in a loop 05 T E Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel Trip meter T1 and total dist e Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1 Trip meter T2 and total dist e Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2 Distance to empty For more information see page 238 Distance to empty tank Fuel consumption Current consumption Average speed e Long press on RESET resets Average speed No trip computer information This option shows a blank display it also marks the beginning end of the loop The combined instrument panel s trip com any time during the journey Proceed as fol e Turn the thumbwheel stop on the puter can be changed to another option at lows desired heading 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Trip computer Combined instrument panel Digital Information displays and controls D OK Opens the loop with the trip com puter s functions Activates the selected option 2 Thumbwheel Opens the loop with the trip computer s headings Scrolls through the options RESET Undoes zeroes or backs out of a function after making a selection Functions Proceed as follows to open and check adjust functions 1 To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence Reset them first with 2 pr
400. selected setting is shown in the centre con sole display screen Electric heating Max defroster Used to quickly remove mist ing and ice from the wind Gy screen and side windows The light in the defroster but ton illuminates when the function is active Press the button repeatedly in order to acti vate the function For cars without heated windscreens e Air flows to the windows symbol 2 illu minates in the screen e Switch off the function no symbol illumi nates For cars with heated windscreens e Start the heating for the windscreen symbol 1 illuminates in the screen e Start the heating for the windscreen and air flow to the windows symbols 1 and 2 illuminate in the screen e Switch off the function no symbol illumi nates Electrically heated windscreen and IR win dow see page 104 can have an impact on the performance of transponders and other communication equipment A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated where de icing may take longer 2 The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active Electrically heated windscreen is not avail able when the engine is auto stopped see page 125 The following also takes place when the func tion is active in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compart ment e the air conditioning is automatically engaged
401. sible to have two Bluetooth devices connected simultaneously One phone and one media device which it is possible to switch between see page 278 or see page 274 It is also possible to use the phone while streaming audio files from a connected device Connecting an external device takes place in different ways depending on whether or not the device has been connected previously The connection options below presume that this is the first time the device is being con nected and that no other device is connected There are two possible ways of connecting devices either search for the external device from the car or search for the car from the external device If one option does not work then try with the other o D Foun o e vw Example of normal view for phone If you are not already in the normal view press TEL in the centre console Alternative 1 search for the external device via the car s menu system 1 Make the external device searchable visi ble via Bluetooth9 see the external devi ce s manual or www volvocars com 2 Press OK MENU and follow the instruc tions on the TV screen gt The external device is now connected to the car and can be controlled from the car If connection failed press EXIT twice and connect the device as described under Alter native 2 si Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system Bluetooth handsfree 06 21
402. sioned at the attachment point AAA s SN h Remote control key key Dlade 2 cccscescsecssseceeccensesersssneneceeserecccenes 44 A Battery replacement remote control key PCC oooccccccccccnccccncnonocannnnnnns 50 A A tach ss a E 52 FOOKING UMDCKIN a e a a 56 Child Safety GEKEN mn eevee eee EDO o epee Reg erie tee ee 63 42 Option accessory for more information see Introduction D LOCKS AND ALARM TIES 02 Locks and alarm 02 44 Remote control key key blade General The car is supplied with two remote control keys standard or with keyless function They are used to start switch off the car and for locking unlocking The remote control key contains a removable key blade made of metal The visible section is available in two versions so that it is possi ble to distinguish between the remote control keys Additional remote control keys can be ordered up to six can be programmed and used for the same car There are four remote control key variants e Remote control key standard e Remote control key with Keyless start e Remote control key with Keyless drive e PCC with Keyless drive For information on remote control key func tion buttons see page 46 PCC plus remote control key with keyless function has extended functionality compared with standard remote control key The rest of 1 5 button key 2 6 button key 3 Only in combination with power
403. skidding to one side Wear Indicator When the tyre s tread depth Nm resulting in possible complete loss of control is down to 1 6 mm the tread depth will be e Type 3 Lockable wheel bolt steel over the car This is why it is important for the level in height with the tread wear indicators aluminium rim 110 Nm rear wheels never to lose grip before the front Change to new tyres as soon as possible Only use rims that are tested and approved wheels Remember that tyres with little tread depth by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces Wheels should be stored lying down or hang provide very poor grip in rain and snow sories Check the torque with a torque ing up and not standing up wrench 08 08 Wheels and tyres 08 322 Locking wheel bolts Locking wheel bolts can be used on both aluminium and steel rims Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu lar dimensions Tyre dimensions are depend ent on engine variant When driving on winter tyres the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500 1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres This gives the tyre and espe cially the studs a longer service life NOTE Th
404. ssage can be cleared by pressing the send button 3 once Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx 2 minutes but then reappears each time the engine is started only recalibration at a workshop can clear the message permanently Cold or hot weather The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use Maximum heat ing time sec Temperature C onds 10 to 85 10 5 to 10 60 40 to 5 180 At temperatures below 20 C or above 60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply The combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard insert power cable In which case connect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp 6 is green In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors Emergency situation In the event of an emergency situation or the Alcolock is out of order it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory see page 8 in the section Recording data After the bypass function has been activated the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a work shop The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged in which Case carry out all the steps without starting the car The error message is cleared when the car is locked When the Alco
405. sures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traf fic outside The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter The incoming air is moni tored continuously and if there is an increase in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic queues and tunnels for example The entry of nitrous oxides ground level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter Interior The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea sant and comfortable even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally compatible materials Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consump tion for your car In this way you contribute to a Cleaner environment When Volvo s work shops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of our system Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment Our work shop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental impact here are a few tips e Avoid letting the engine idle switch off the engine when stationary for
406. t and driving pleasure 05 218 Climate control Electronic climate control ECC ED Fan Setting left right side for temperature regulation AUTO lo Electrically heated front seat right hand Electrically heated front seat left hand side side D Temperature control O Heated windscreen and max defroster 12 Recirculation Air distribution ventilation fl O ir distribution ventilation floor AG Air conditioning on off Air distribution air vent instrument panel 7 Air distribution defroster windscreen Rear window and door mirror defrost ers see page 107 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D Climate control Electronic Temperature Control ETC G046358 05 Fan Recirculation Operating the controls Electrically heated front seat left hand Electrically heated front seat right hand Heated seats side side AC Air conditioning on off Temperature control WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating Air distribution air vent instrument panel the controls for the heated seats Other wise they may suffer burn injuries Heated windscreen and max defroster Air distribution ventilation floor Air distribution defroster windscreen Rear window and door mirror defrost
407. t backrest Type approval E5 04216 UF Booster cushion with and without backrest Booster Cushion with and without backrest Type approval E5 04216 UF L Suitable for specific child seats These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model limited or semi universal categories U Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class UF Suitable for front facing universally approved child seats in this weight class B Built in child seats approved for this weight class A Only for rear facing child seat Set the seat s backrest in upright position Child safety locks rear doors The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked from opening from the inside For more information see page 62 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are located at the lower section of the rear seat backrest in the outer seats The location of the mounting points is indi cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery see preceding illustration Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points Size classes Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes This means that not all child ee 01 Safety 9 Child safety 01 Description Al WARNING Never place the child in the passenger Consequent
408. t of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the combined instru ment panel The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead An automatic deactivation can be due to e the driver opens the door e the driver takes off his seatbelt e engine speed is too low high e speed has fallen below 30 km h wheels lose traction brake temperature is high e the radar sensor is covered e g by wet snow or heavy rain radar waves blocked Resume set speed Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reactivated with one press on the steering wheel button U the speed is then set to the last stored speed A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting Ol Overtaking another vehicle When the car is following another vehicle and the driver indicates an impending overtaking manoeuvre with the direction indicator the adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accel erate the car towards the vehicle in front This function is active at speeds above 70 km h Be aware that this function can be acti vated in more situations other than during overtaking e g when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road the car will then acceler ate briefly Deactivate Keypad with Speed limiter The adaptive cruise control is disengaged with a short press of the steering
409. t panel Pro 1 To ensure that no control is in the middle Three trip computer headings can be dis ceed as follows to determine which of a sequence Reset them first with played simultaneously one in each win 2 presses on RESET dow see previous figure 2 Turn the thumbwheel selectable head One of the heading combinations in the fol ing combinations are shown in a loop lowing table can be selected for constant dis 3 Stop on desired heading combination Average Trip meter T1 Meter reading Average speed e Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1 Instantaneous Trip meter T2 Meter reading Distance to empty e Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2 tank Instantaneous Meter reading kmh lt gt mph kmh lt gt mph see Digital speed display page 238 a No trip computer information This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays it also marks the beginning end of the loop The combined instrument panel s heading Supplementary information Average speed combination for the trip computer can be The average speed is calculated for the driv changed to another option at any time during Average ing distance driven since the last reset to the journey Proceed as follows Average fuel consumption is calculated from zero the last resetting e Turn the thumbwheel stop on the desired heading Instantaneous NOTE The information for current fuel consumption is updated continuously approximately once per second When the
410. t the blind can be operated in key position I or Il with the con trol in the roof console For information on key positions see page 81 03 Your driving environment E Windows rearview and door mirrors 03 G046004 ED Automatic opening to end position Manual opening until the button is released Manual closing until the button is released ED Automatic closing to end position IMPORTANT e Avoid touching the blind because it may then be damaged e Only use the control in the roof con sole to operate the blind E 03 Your driving environment 03 Compass Operation G046193 Rearview mirror with compass The upper right hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations N north NE north east E east SE south east S south SW south west W west and NW north west The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or in key position Il see page 81 To deactivate activate the compass press in the button on the rear side of the mirror using a paper clip for example The compass is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated When the heated windscreen is deactivated the compass is reactivated Calibration The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones The compass is set for the geographic
411. takes place irrespective of what position the knob is in or Lighting what key position the car s electrical system is in Daytime running lights during the day DRL Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position With the knob for headlamp control in position the daytime running lights Daytime Running Lights DRL are activated automati cally when the car is driven during daytime A light sensor on the top of the instrument panel changes from daytime running lights to dipped beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too weak Changing to dipped beam also takes place if the windscreen wip ers or rear fog lamps are activated WARNING This system help to save energy it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong e g in mist and rain The driver is always responsible for ensur ing that the car is driven with its lights in a correct state and in accordance with appli cable traffic regulations Tunnel detection The function is available in cars with rain sen sor The sensor detects the entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam Approx 20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel the lighting returns to daytime running lights If the car is driven into another tunnel within this time period then dipped beam is kept switched on This prevents frequent changes to the car lighting Note that the headlamp control s knob m
412. tandby mode To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode Press the steering wheel button o K This symbol and stored speed mark ing then changes colour from GREEN to WHITE Keypad without Speed limiter To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode Press the steering wheel button Standby mode due to driver intervention The adaptive cruise control is temporarily dis engaged and set automatically in standby mode if e the foot brake is used e the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute e the gear selector lever is moved to neu tral position N automatic gearbox e the driver maintains a speed higher than the set speed for longer than 1 minute The driver must then regulate the speed A temporary increase in speed with the accel erator pedal e g during overtaking does not affect the cruise control setting the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released 4 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode 5 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant it manages right down to stationary 154 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems such as DSTC see page 140 If any of these systems stop working then cruise control is automatically deactivated In the even
413. te control key the direction indicators confirm that locking unlocking was correctly performed e Locking one flash and the door mirrors are folded in e Unlocking two flashes and the door mir rors are folded out NOTE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car When locking indication is given only if all locks have been locked and all doors are closed Indication is given when the last door has been closed Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking unlocking with light can be set in the car s menu system see page 207 Search in the menu system MY CAR for Settings gt Car settings gt Light settings and select Door lock confirmation light and or Unlock confirmation light A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that the car is locked 0 NOTE Cars that are not equipped with alarm also have this indicator Immobiliser Each remote control key has a unique code The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code The following error messages in the com bined instrument panel s information display are related to the electronic immobiliser Insert car key Car key not found Applicable only to cars with Key less Drive see page 54 Immobi liser Try to start again Error when reading the remote control key during starting Remove the key from the ignition switch press it in again an
414. the Do not use the space behind the front engine is running seat or the rear seat s centre seat when the front seat backrest is lowered 0 Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident Seat with memory function G021133 ap Front edge of seat cushion up down G021134 2 Seat forward backward and up down Backrest rak z Store setting The power front seats have overload protec 1 Memory button tion which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object If this happens go to key position I or Memory button 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the Memory button seat again Only one movement forward back up down O Button for storing settings can be made at a time 1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors Preparations 2 Hold the button depressed to store set The seats can be adjusted for a certain time tings while depressing one of the memory after unlocking the door with the remote con buttons trol key without the key in the ignition switch 84 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop All remote control keys can be used by differ ent drivers to store the settings for the
415. the brakes release See more information under the header below Cessation of automatic braking when stationary Change of target G044031 If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km h and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle the cruise control will slow down for the stationary vehicle 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction WARNING When the cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km h and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle the cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed e The driver must intervene him herself and brake Automatic standby mode with change of target The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode e when the speed is below 5 km h and cruise control is not sure whether the tar get object is a stationary vehicle or some other object e g a speed bump e when the speed is below 5 km h and the vehicle in front turns off so the cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow Termination of automatic braking at a standstill In the following situations Queue Assist stops automatic braking at a standstill e the driver opens the door e the driver takes off his seatbelt 04 Driver
416. the bulb and put back the parts Lighting Ia Type in reverse order Dipped beam 55 H7 LL Vanity mirror lighting Main beam 65 H9 Additional main 55 H7 LL 8 beam s Front direction 21 HY21W indicators Position parking 5 W5W LL lamps frontB Side marker lamps 5 WY5W LL front 3 Daytime running 19 PW19W 1 Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens lights and gently prize up the lug on the edge RE eae Insert approx 20 mm a blunt knife like Side direction indi 5 WY5W LL object e g a table knife at the triangle Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp cators door mir lens pore Carefully prise until the lug releases l l 3 Using needle nose pliers pull the bulb FF E straight out to the side Do not squeeze Direction indica 21 PY21W LL O IMPORTANT too hard with the pliers Otherwise the tors rear Take care not to damage any parts bulb glass could break Brake light 91 P21W LL 4 Repl th t k th rt ed Pall Reversing lamp 27 P21W LL P Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise in reverse order 09 Maintenance and service 09 Rear fog lamp 21 H21W ECE Vanity mirror light lez T5 Socket ing W2x4 6d A Watt B Cars with halogen headlights C Cars with xenon headlights D Certain variants Q 09 Maintenance and service Wiper blades and washer fluid 09 Wiper blades Service position Wiper blades in service position In order to change clean or lift the wiper blades for scraping off ice from
417. the car cannot be detected In turn this means that apart from Adaptive Cruise Control Distance Warning and Colli sion Warning with Auto Brake functions are not operating either The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action 04 Driver support 4 Adaptive cruise control CE aeon OOOO The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt ice and snow Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals No action Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the No action Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road radar signals surface The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains Wait It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked 04 Symbols and text messages The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed Standard cruise control is selected manually DSTC Normal to enable The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until DSTC has been set to Normal position see Cruise page 140 Cruise control Cancelled The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated the driver has to regulate the speed himself gt gt i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 1
418. the dipstick taken immediately after the engine is switched off The dipstick will indicate that 4 Pull it out and check the level the level is too low because the oil has not 5 If the level is close to MIN then 0 5 litres had time to flow down into the oil sump should be added If the level is signifi cantly below then an additional amount is required 2 Only applies to petrol and 4 cyl diesel 6 If required check the level again do it after driving a short distance Then repeat steps 1 4 Never fill above the MAX mark The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani fold due to the risk of fire Engine with electronic oil level sensor Filler pipe 3 Only applies to 5 cyl diesel You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the combined instrument panel s information display see the illustration below N N o Y o oO Message and graph in the display The left hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the right hand the analogue Message Engine oil level On certain cars the oil level can be checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off see page 342 09 Maintenance and service D Engine compartment 09
419. the list and select a station T Select the desired wavelength FM1 or FM2 Turn TUNE one step in either direction This displays the list of all stations in the area The currently tuned station is indi cated with enlarged text in the list Turn TUNE again in either direction to select a station from the list Confirm your choice by pressing OK MENU 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 06 259 06 Infotainment system The list only shows the frequencies of stations that are currently being received not a complete list of all radio frequencies on the selected wavelength If the signal from the currently received station is weak this may prevent the radio from updating the station list If this occurs press the info button while the station list is shown in the display screen in order to change to manual tuning and set a frequency If the station list is no longer shown turn TUNE one step in either direction to show the list again and press sigo to switch 06 The list disappears from the TV screen after a few seconds If the station list is no longer shown turn TUNE one step in either direction and press the info button in the centre console to change to manual tuning or to return from manual tuning to the function for Station list Manual tuning The preset from the factory is that the radio shows the station list of the strongest stations in the
420. the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot 3 Lightly press the key blade You should hear a click when the key blade is locked in 02 Locks and alarm Battery replacement remote control key PCC D IMPORTANT Make sure that exhausted batteries are 02 disposed of in a manner which is kind to the environment g Option accessory for more information see Introduction Dil 02 Locks and alarm 02 52 Keyless lock and ignition system General G045808 Below is a description of remote control keys with Keyless drive and Keyless start func tions For cars with a Keyless start function the car can be started without the remote control key being inserted in the ignition lock For cars with a Keyless drive function the car can be locked and unlocked without pressing a button on the remote control key and also be started without the key being inserted in the ignition lock The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car e g when your hands are full 1 Does not apply to cars with keyless start Both of the car s remote control keys have Keyless function It is possible to order more remote control keys see page 44 The car s electrical system can be set to 3 different levels key positions O I and Il with the remote control key see page 81 Remote control key range In order to open a door or the tailgate without pressing a button on the remote cont
421. the wind screen for example they must be in service position IMPORTANT Before placing the wiper blades in the service position make sure that they are not frozen down 1 Place the remote control key in the igni tion lock and briefly press the START 1 Not necessary in cars with Keyless function STOP ENGINE button to set the car s electrical system to key position I For detailed information on key positions see page 81 2 Briefly press the START STOP ENGINE button again to set the car s electrical system in key position 0 3 Within 3 seconds move the right stalk switch up and hold it in position for approx 1 second gt The wipers then move to standing straight up The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START STOP ENGINE button to set the car s electrical sys tem to key position I or when the car is started IMPORTANT If the wiper arms in the service position have been folded up from the windscreen they must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the wipers are allowed to return to their starting position This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet Replacing the wiper blades G021760 N o N p A o 0 09 Maintenance and service QD Fold up the wiper arm when it is in serv ice position Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm Slide in the new
422. the yellow indi cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated See also Trip computer page 232 and Refuelling page 299 2 Temperature gauge for engine coolant 4 When the display s message Distance to empty fuel tank starts to show the marking becomes red Instruments and controls O Speedometer Tachometer The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute rpm E Power guide See also page 74 O Gear shift indicator Gear position indi cator See also gearboxes page 118 Eco guide amp Power guide General The Eco guide and Power guide instruments help the driver to drive the car while maintain ing the best possible driving economy The car also stores statistics of journeys made which can be viewed in the form of a block diagram see page 238 Eco guide This meter provides an indication of how eco nomically the car is being driven To view this function select the theme Eco see page 73 2 p a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 gt gt 73 03 Your driving environment 03 ee Instruments and controls Instantaneous value Average value Instantaneous value The instantaneous value is shown here the higher the reading on the scale the better The instantaneous value is calculated based on speed engine speed engine power uti lised plus use of the foot brake Optimum speed 50 80 k
423. till illuminated the car can be driven with great care to a workshop to have the brake system checked Volvo recom mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir do not drive fur ther before topping up the brake fluid The loss of brake fluid must be investiga ted by a workshop Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop 03 Your driving environment EN 03 we 03 Your driving environment 03 78 Instruments and controls If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and or driveability of the car An explanatory text is shown on the information display at the same time The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button see page 205 The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols Action 1 Stop in a safe place Do not drive the car further 2 Read the information on the information display Implement the action in accord ance with the message in the display Clear the message using the OK button Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminate
424. to people and animals City Safety can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km h at a higher speed difference it is only possi ble to reduce collision speed In order to obtain full brake function the driver must depress the brake pedal Never wait for City Safety to engage The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the proper distance and speed Function Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the windscreen If there is an imminent risk of collision City Safety will automatically brake the car which may be experienced as sudden braking If the speed difference is 4 15 km h in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety can completely prevent a collision City Safety activates a short sharp braking and stops the car in normal circumstances just behind the vehicle in front For most dri vers this is well outside normal driving style and may be experienced as being uncomfort able If the difference in speed between the vehi cles is greater than 15 km h then City Safety may not prevent the collision on its own To obtain full brake force the driver must depress the brake pedal This could then make it possible to prevent a collision even at speed differences above 15 km h When the function is activated and brakes the combined instrume
425. to start 03 Engine in Auto Start Select P or N to start Press Start button A M Manual gearbox A Automatic gearbox If a message does not go out following com pletion of the action then a workshop should be contacted an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended Gear is engaged without declutching disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position The engine is ready to start automatically waiting for the brake pedal to be released A Start Stop has been deactivated move the gear selector to N or P position and start the A engine as normal with the START STOP ENGINE button The engine will not start automatically start the engine as normal with the START STOP A ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N 130 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Foot brake General The car is equipped with two brake circuits If one brake circuit is damaged then this will mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level and harder pressure on the pedal is nee ded to produce the normal braking effect The driver s brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo WARNING The brake servo only works when the engine is running If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force must be used to brake the car In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking Engine braking is most
426. traffic In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning The function must not be used to extend a period of driving Always plan breaks at regular intervals and make sure you are well rested Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warn ing despite driving ability not deteriorating for example e in strong side winds e onrutted road surfaces Collision Warning navailable Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable Driver Alert Unavailable Settings are made from the centre console s screen and its menu system For information on how the menu system is used see page 207 On Off To set Driver Alert in standby mode in MY CAR search for Car settings gt Driver support systems Driver Alert and check the box No check in the box Function disengaged Function Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds 65 km h and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km h y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support UN Driver Alert System DAC 04 179 Y 04 Driver support Driver Alert System DAC If the vehicle is being driven errati The warning symbol can go off caly inet eno WAAN e Press the
427. trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket com plies with the specified maximum towball load e Increase the tyre pressure to the recom mended pressure for a full load For tyre pressure label location see page 328 e The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer e Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km e The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed e For safety reasons the maximum permit ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights e Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long steep ascents e Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12 Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car s towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If any of the trailer s lamps for direction indi cators are broken then the symbol for direc tion indicators in the combined instrument panel flashes faster than normal and the information display shows the text Bulb fail Ind signal trailer If any of the trailer s lamps for the brake light are broken then t
428. trol e ei ee Ne an ee ee regulates the speed with acceleration and 30 UN Upto 200 kmh IT Wie speed Talle WARNING braking It is normal for the brakes to emit a below 30 km h or if the Sng speed low sound when they are being used by the becomes too low the cruise control is set in Cruise Control warns only of vehicles standby mode at which automatic braking which the radar sensor has detected adaptive cruise control i F E ceases the driver must then take over him Hence the warning may not be given or it self herself to maintain a safe distance to the may be given with a certain delay Do not WARNING wait for a warning without braking when so vehicle ahead ER a The brake pedal moves when Cruise Con q l trol brakes Do not rest your foot beneath the brake pedal as it may become trapped 2 Queue Assistant in cars with automatic gearbox can operate in the range of 0 200 km h see page 155 Option accessory for more information see Introduction LOM Y 04 Driver support Adaptive cruise control Steep roads and or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces It may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle WITH speed limiter Mr ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes SOS 40 60 x i i i j 80 Isq Va with a heavy load or with a trailer in which WA case be extra attentive and ready to sl
429. uid remains in the reservoir and the message that you should fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined instrument panel then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off This is in order to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it y Option accessory for more information see Introduction Wiping and washing the rear window Rear window wiper intermittent wiping Rear window wiper continuous speed Press the stalk switch forward see the arrow in the illustration above to initiate rear win dow washing and wiping The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats The rear window wiper works again after a cooling period 30 seconds or longer depending on the heat in the motor and the outside temperature 03 Your driving environment EN Wipers and washing Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear win dow wiping The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged If the rear window wiper is already on at con tinuous speed no change is made 03 On cars with rain sensors the rear wiper is activated during reversing if the sensor is activated and it is raining 2 This function intermittent wiping when reversing can be deactivated Visit a workshop Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo works
430. ument panel can show dif ferent combinations of symbols and text with varying content sometimes with a self explanatory piece of advice on appropriate action If a message says that PAP is disengaged contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support i Park Assist Pilot PAP 04 197 Y 04 Driver support BLIS and CTA General information on BLIS and CTA The BLIS function Blind Spot Information System is designed for driving in dense traf fic on roads with several lanes in the same direction BLIS is a driver s aid intended to provide a warning about e vehicles in the car s blind spot e quickly approaching vehicles in the left 04 and right lanes closest to the car The BLIS function CTA Cross Traffic Alert is a driver s aid intended to provide a warning about e crossing traffic when the car is reversed WARNING BLIS and CTA are supplementary aids and do not work in all situations BLIS and CTA are no substitutes for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors BLIS and CTA can never replace the driv er s responsibility and attention it is always the driver s responsibility to reverse and change lanes in a safe manner N For information on the menu system see page 207 Operation Position of the BLIS lamp 1 Indicator lamp 2 BLIS symbol The
431. unds 2 Insert the remote control key in the igni tion switch gt The alarm is deactivated Alarm signals When the alarm is triggered the following happens e lt A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery e The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off 2 5 Option accessory for more information see Introduction Reduced alarm level To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e g If a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry tempo rarily deactivate the movement and tilt detec tors The procedure is the same as with the tem porary disengaging of deadlocks see page 60 02 Locks and alarm PC Instruments and CONTTO lS oocococcococccccccncnnoconnnnoccnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnronnnnnnanannnnanas 68 VOVO COS UG acceda cares aioe nse E E Coticaawiaadsaaniaumianvenuimees 80 FREY DOS A tee E E 81 Pe O UE OO A 83 o a ERER 88 ES Pe A E A 89 G i eTEN ara TT o a T a a SOE 101 AS Windows rearview and door MITTOFS o occococcnncnnononcnnnncnnnononconcnnoncnnonos 104 Compass sites A REG ERENTS ss sss v oavasy dvadpscateavehennuwdayeasvsuneetoriveens 110 PMNS a A 111 Site INM A E 115 Starting the engine external battery oooccccconnnnncocononcconnnnonononanons lle A rites eta Meares ees cececcescsedes
432. uning page 259 Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few seconds the sound disappears dur ing this time and returns when the station is stored The preset button can now be used A list of pre selected channels can be shown in the TV screen The function is activated deactivated in FM AM mode under FM menu gt Show presets or AM menu gt Show presets RDS functions RDS Radio Data System links FM transmit ters into a network An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions e Automatically switches to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor e Searches for programme type such as traffic information or news e Receives text information on current radio programme NOTE Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use For example if the CD player is in use it is paused The interrupting transmission is played at a preset volume see page 263 The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broad cast The programme functions alarm ALARM traffic information TP news NEWS and programme types PTY interrupt one another in order of priority where alarm has the high est priority and programme types has the lowest F
433. until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected Alarm has been triggered Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button Deactivate the alarm Press the remote control key unlock but ton g Option accessory for more information see Introduction F 045796 02 Locks and alarm 8 02 63 02 Locks and alarm 02 64 Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock but ton or insert the remote control key in the ignition switch Other alarm functions Automatic re arming of the alarm This function prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally If the car is unlocked with the remote control key and the alarm is disarmed but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes then the alarm is automatically re armed The car is relocked at the same time Automatic alarm activation In certain countries the alarm is activated after a certain delay if the driver s door was opened and closed but the car was not re locked Remote control key not working If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the remote control key e g if the key s battery is discharged the car can be unlocked dis armed and the engine started as follows 1 Open the left hand front door with the detachable key blade see page 54 gt The alarm is triggered the direction indicators flash and the siren so
434. us oxides Petrol Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 and 98 RON Only in exceptional cases should 91 RON be used e 95 RON can be used for normal driving e 98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consump tion When driving in temperatures above 38 C fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy 07 During your journey 07 During your journey 07 IMPORTANT e Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter e Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo Diesel Only use diesel fuel from well known produc ers Never use diesel of dubious quality Die sel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for exam ple At low temperatures 6 C to 40 C a par affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel which may lead to ignition problems Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil companies This fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled When refuelling check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean Avoi
435. ust remain in ULA position for tunnel detection to work Main dipped beam i i Ema Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control ED Position for main beam flash b gt Position for main beam Dipped beam With the knob in position dipped beam is activated automatically at dusk or when daylight becomes too weak Dipped beam is also activated automatically if the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated With the knob in position dipped beam is always switched on when the engine is run ning or when key position Il is active Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam 2 a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 91 03 Your driving environment E 03 UY 03 Your driving environment Lighting flash Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released Main beam Main beam can be activated when the knob is in position EU or ESB Activate deacti 03 vate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end posi tion and then releasing Alternatively the main beam can be deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch toward the steering wheel When main beam has been activated the O symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel Active high beam AHB Active high beam Active High Beam AHB is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of
436. ut the lower floor models with a join ted luggage compartment floor only 1 If the car is equipped with a temporary tyre repair kit see page 330 for information 324 y Option accessory for more information see Introduction 4 Undo the attaching screw and lift out the foam block containing the jack and tools 5 Take hold of the far end of the spare wheel then lift Push the spare wheel for wards slightly and lift it out of the storage compartment 6 Remove the wheel wrench the jack and the towing eye from the foam block OLE The jack must be lifted out in order to access the towing eye Jack The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel The jack s thread must always be well greased Removing Set up the warning triangle see page 329 if a wheel must be replaced at a busy location The car and jack must be on a firm horizontal surface Changing wheels 1 Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox WARNING Check that the jack is not damaged that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question which is indicated on the jack s label The decal also indicates the jack s maxi mum lift capacity at a specified lifting height 2 Take out the spare wheel and tools see the description on page 324 Ther
437. uthorised Volvo workshop The remote control key functions may be is recommended disrupted by surrounding radio waves buildings topographical conditions etc The car can always be locked unlocked Remote control key with PCC Personal Car Indicator lamps display information in accord with the key blade see page 49 Communicator ance with the following illustration 1 Information button 2 Indicator lamps Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indicator lamps Using the information button Press the information button Fal gt All indicator lamps flash for approxi mately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC This indicates that information from the car has been read g Option accessory for more information see Introduction 47 02 Locks and alarm Remote control key key blade No A wo No e D Green continuous light the car is locked Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked O Red light flashing alternately in both indi cator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago Range PCC The PCC s range for locking unlocking and tailgate is about 20 m from the car for other functions up to about 100 m If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again The information butt
438. ving away on a slippery road surface if 2nd gear is engaged manually not 3rd gear 2 a a Option accessory for more information see Introduction 03 Your driving environment EN Gearboxes Overheating during slow driving in queues O IMPORTANT For important information regarding can be avoided by driving in stages i Powershift transmission and towing see o Use the foot brake to hold the car station page 315 e Stop the car and wait with your foot on ary on an uphill gradient do not hold the the brake pedal until there IS a moderate Car with the accelerator pedal The gear Text message and action distance to the traffic ahead drive for box could then overheat In some situations the combined instrument panel may show a text message at the same 03 time as a symbol is illuminated ward a short distance and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal Transm overheat Difficulty in maintaining even speed at Transmission overheated Keep the car stationary using the brake to hold constant engine speed foot brake Transm overheat park Significant pulling in the car s traction Transmission overheated Park the car immediately in a safe safely manner 4 ty Transm cooling let No drive due to overheated gearbox Transmission overheated For fastest cooling Run the engine engine run at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message Clears A For fastest cooling run th
439. ving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed D N o t t o 0 For information on decal location see page 376 Max gross vehicle weight 2 Max train weight car trailer Max front axle load Max rear axle load O Equipment level Max load See registration document Max roof load 75 kg 10 Specifications 01 10 00 111 10 Specifications 01 10 00 111 Dimensions and weights Towing capacity and towball load 10 CANE Gearbox Max weight braked trailer kg Max towball load kg T2 B4164T4 Manual B6 1300 15 T3 B4164T3 Manual B6 1300 a T4 B4164T Manual B6 1300 3 T4 B4164T Automatic MPS6 1500 15 T4 B5204T8 Automatic TF 80SD 1500 13 T5 B5204T9 Automatic TF 80SD 1500 a T5 B5254112 Automatic TF 80SD 1500 13 ES B5254114 Automatic TF 80SD 1500 TS D2 D4162T Manual B6 1300 15 D2 D4162T Automatic MPS6 1300 15 D3 D5204T6 Manual M66 1500 T3 D3 D5204T6 Automatic TF 80SD 1500 15 D4 D5204T4 Manual M66 1500 is D4 D5204T4 Automatic TF 80SD 1500 15 A Engine code component and serial number can be read on the engine see page 376 Dimensions and weights Max weight unbraked trailer kg EEES ee T3 T4 T4 T4 is iS TS D2 D2 D3 D3 D4 D4 A Engine code component and serial number can be read on the engine see page 376 B4164T4 B4164T3 B4164T B4164T B5204T8 B5204T9 B5254T12 B5254T14 D4162T
440. ving pleasure D Active bending lights p 93 Collision Warning a Lane Keeping Aid a On On On Off Off Off Warning distance On at start up Auxiliary lights p 91 Long On On Normal Off Off Short Increased sensitivity Warning sound On Steering wheel force p 24 On Off Low i Off Assistance alternatives Medium Vibration only 05 High Steering assist only Speed in infotainment display Full function On i Road Sign Information p Off 44 On Reset car settings Off All menus in Car settings are Speed alert given original factory settings On Driver support systems Off Option accessory for more information see Introduction 211 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure Menu source MY CAR DSTC p On 14 Off City Safety p On 16 Off BLIS p On 19 Off 05 Cross Traffic Alert On Off Distance Alert p On 16 Off Driver Alert p On 17 Off System options Time p 79 The combined instrument panel s clock is adjusted here Time format p 79 12h 24 h Screen saver p On 20 Off The screen s current content fades out after a period of inactivity and is replaced by a blank screen if this option is selected The current screen content returns if any of the screen s buttons or controls are actuated Language Selects language for menu texts Show help text On Off Explanatory text for the screen s current content is shown with this option selected Distance and fuel units p MPG UK
441. vo detachable towbar e Follow the installation instructions carefully e The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off e Check that the indicator window shows green Important checks e The towbar s towball must be cleaned and greased regularly The moving parts of the detachable towbar must not be lubricated oiled This may reduce safety 07 During your journey Driving with a trailer NOTE Specifications When a hitch with a vibration damper is used the towball must not be lubricated Storing the detachable towbar G045870 1 ic el A o 0 Dimensions mounting points mm A 887 B 79 The storage location for the removable towbar C 881 IMPORTANT D 441 Always remove the detachable towbar E 109 after use and store it in the designated location in the car F 306 07 l G Side member H Ball centre 07 During your journey Driving with a trailer Fitting of removable towbar G021488 G021490 G046594 Remove the protective cover by first pressing in the catch D gt and then pulling o e El S gt i N e o o 0 o El Insert the towball section until you hear a Gi Turn the key anticlockwise to locked click position Remove the key from the lock N Y a A o 0 07 T Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clockwise 07 During your journey Driving with a trailer G021494 G0214
442. wer Automatic gearbox Geartronic tion MPS6 means that it is Powershift 3 Keep the towline taut when the towing transmission otherwise it is Geartronic auto vehicle reduces speed by holding your matic transmission foot gently pressed on the brake pedal D Jule Ea thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward 4 Be prepared to brake to stop e Do not tow cars with automatic trans WARNING mission at speeds higher than 80 km h or for distances in excess of 80 km e Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing e The remote control key must be in key position Il in position I all airbags are deactivated e Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed Follow the speeds that are permitted in accordance with local traffic regula tions Prior to towing Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake 07 07 During your journey Towing and recovery IMPORTANT Avoid towing e However the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km h Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels roll ing forward e Inthe event of moving a longer dis tance than 10 km the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road professional recovery is recomm
443. wer gear is immediately engaged This is known as kick down If the accelerator is released from the kick down position the gearbox automatically changes up Kick down is used when maximum accelera tion is needed such as for overtaking Safety function To prevent overrevving the engine the gear box control program has a protective down 2 If the car has Sport mode then S is shown first shift inhibitor which prevents the kick down function Geartronic does not permit downshifting kick down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged When kick down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depend ing on engine speed The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine Mechanical gear selector inhibitor Gearboxes The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P R N and D Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety systems Parking position P Stationary car with engine running e Keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the
444. wheel but ton ef The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the D button Keypad without Speed limiter A short press on the steering wheel button f sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode With a further short press the cruise control is deactivated The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the D button Switch from ACC to CC A button press can be used to deactivate the adaptive element spacing system in the adaptive cruise control with the car then only following the set speed Hold down the steering wheel button cf the combined instrument panel s sym bol changes from sf to O gt This activates the standard cruise control CC Cruise Control see page 148 The car no longer brakes automatically after switching from ACC to CC it merely follows the set speed 6 On left flash only in left hand drive car or right flash in right hand drive car 04 Driver support Adaptive cruise control Switch from CC back to ACC Deactivate CC with 1 2 presses on Y as described under the heading Deactivate ACC will be activated the next time the sys tem is switched on Queue Assistant In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control is supplemented with the Queue Assist function also referred to as Queue Assist Queue Assistant has the following functions e Extended speed range
445. wiper blade until a click is heard Check that the blade is firmly installed 4 Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen The wipers return from service position to their starting position when you briefly press the START STOP ENGINE button to set the car s electrical system to key position I or when the car is started Wiper blades and washer fluid 09 3 Turn anticlockwise to use the blade s end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily The wiper blades are different lengths The blade on the driver s side is longer than on the passenger side 4 WARNING 5 Since the car is equipped with airbag Cleaning Pedestrian Airbag Volvo recommends that For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen genuine wiper arms are used and that you see page 368 and onwards only use genuine parts for them l Press the new wiper blade into position Check that it is firmly installed Lower the wiper arm D IMPORTANT Check the blades regularly Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades Replacing the wiper blades rear window Filling washer fluid G045581 1 Fold out the wiper arm 2 Grip the inner section of the blade by the arrow A Tal r j a i k N E pA 05917 a 353 09 Maintenance and service 09 Wiper blades and washer fluid The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir IMPORTANT Use w
446. ws To ensure that the air conditioning works optimally the side windows must be closed Misting windows Remove misting on the insides of the win dows by primarily using the defroster func tion To reduce the risk of misting keep the win dows clean and use window cleaner Temporary shut off of the air conditioning When the engine requires full power e g for full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off There may then be a temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment Condensation In warm weather condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car This is normal Ice and snow Remove ice and snow from the climate con trol system air intake the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen Total airing function The function opens closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather see page 57 Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car s passenger compart ment is cleaned with a filter This must be replaced at regular intervals Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment it may be necessary to replace the filter more often 05 Comfort and driving pleasure D 05 O 05 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 216 Climate control There are different typ
447. xternal device connected is in range it is connected automatically When the info tainment system searches for the last device connected its name is shown in the TV screen To connect to another device press EXIT Connect a new external device see Change to another external device below Change to another external device It is possible to change a connected device with another device if there are several devi ces in the car However the device must first have been paired see Connect an external Bluetooth device above To change to another device 1 Press MEDIA turn TUNE until Bluetooth is displayed press OK MENU 2 Check that the external device is search able visible via Bluetooth see the man ual for the external device Press OK MENU Turn TUNE to Change device and con firm with OK MENU gt After a while the external device s name is shown in the TV screen If sev eral external devices have been paired then these are also shown 5 Select the device to be connected by turning TUNE and confirm with OK MENU gt Connection of the external device takes place PAC Option accessory for more information see Introduction Change audio file by pressing ERI ES on the centre console or the steering wheel key pad Disconnecting the device Automatic disconnection takes place if the external device moves out of the infotainment system s range For more information on con nection
448. y a wirs S O Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS The whiplash protection system WHIPS con sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe cially designed head restraints in the front seats The system is actuated by a rear end collision where the angle and speed of the collision and the nature of the colliding vehi cle all have an influence The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts Always use a seatbelt Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger This reduces the risk of whiplash injury Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work shop WHIPS system and child seats booster cushions The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system Correct seating position For the best possible protection the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as pos sible between the head and the head restraint Do not obstruct the WHIPS system Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver s seat passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back rest Make sure y
449. y for more information see Introduction 06 Infotainment system General information on infotainment urna oj 10 My Favourite Game 06 AUTO CLIMATE G046530 The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back 1 Main source button 2 Normal view 3 Shortcut source menu 4 Quick menu 5 Source menu gt gt 06 Infotainment system 06 252 General information on infotainment Select main source by pressing a main source button 1 RADIO MEDIA TEL To navigate through the source menus use the controls TUNE OK MENU EXIT or the main source button 1 For Menu overview see page 254 If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad with a thumbwheel these can be used instead of the controls in the centre console TUNE OK MENU EXIT see page 249 Menus and views in the display screen The appearance depends on the source equipment in the car settings etc ay Main source button press to switch the main source or to show the Shortcut Source menu in the active source 2 Normal view normal mode for the source Shortcut Source menu shows com monly used menu options in the main sources e g TEL and MEDIA accessed by pressing the active source s main source but ton 1 Quick menu fast mode when TUNE is turned e g for changing disc tracks radio station etc 5 Source menu for menu navigation accessed
450. y for more information see Introduction Positioning of the emergency puncture repair kit and warning triangle Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location The warning triangle and emergency puncture repair kit are located under the floor in the cargo area 1 Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart ment floor or on models with a jointed luggage compartment floor take hold of the luggage compartment floor handle lift and move the rear part of the floor for wards 2 Lift out the storage compartment optional extra models with a jointed luggage compartment floor only 3 Lift out the lower floor models with a join ted luggage compartment floor only 4 Unhook the elastic part of the belt over the TMK compressor unit on the left side Lift the TMK compressor unit straight up 6 To access the bottle of sealant it must be pushed to the left until it can be lifted out of the foam block To access the towing eye wheel wrench in the foam block e Version 1 Lift the compressor unit for the emergency puncture repair kit point 5 to access the wheel wrench Lift out the bottle of sealant point 6 to access the towing eye Version 2 Lift the compressor unit for the emergency puncture repair kit point 5 to access the towing eye The wheel wrench is located underneath the jack After use hook the belt back onto the left side Version 1 The belt must be pulled
451. y use plastic ice scrapers There is natural wear of the water repellent coating Option accessory for more information see Introduction 369 Q 09 Maintenance and service 09 Car care Treatment with a special finishing agent avail able from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the water repellent proper ties This should be used first after three years and then each year Rustproofing inspection and maintenance The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal The underbody is protected by a wear resistant anti corrosion compound A thin penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members cavities closed sections and side doors Under normal conditions the rustproofing does not require treatment for approximately 12 years After this period it should be trea ted at three year intervals Volvo recom mends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance if the car needs fur ther treatment Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is important to keep the car clean The car s rustproofing needs to be checked regularly and touched up if necessary in order for it to be maintained Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care prod ucts recommended by Volvo Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product Vacuuming is important prior t
452. ystem see page 207 Set time interval Controls and symbol for time interval 1 Time interval Increase decrease 2 Time interval On 2 i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support ay 04 161 Y 04 Driver support 04 162 Distance Warning Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1 5 horizontal lines the more lines the longer the time interval One line corre sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front 5 lines approximately 3 seconds The same symbol is also shown when adap tive cruise control is activated The higher the speed the longer the calcu lated distance in metres for a given time interval The set time interval is also used by the Adaptive Cruise Control function see page 150 Only use the time interval permitted by the local traffic regulations Limitations The function uses the same radar sensor as adaptive cruise control and the collision warning system with auto brake For more information on the radar sensor and its limita tions see page 157 Strong sunlight reflections or strong varia tions in light intensity as well as wearing sunglasses could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor s capacity to detect vehicles in front Th
453. ystem does not engage in all driving situations or traffic weather or road conditions The collision warning system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to animals Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision This section Func tion and the section Limitations inform about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the Collision Warn ing system with Auto Brake Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians are switched off at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km h Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians do not work in darkness and tunnels not even when streetlights are lit The auto brake function can prevent a col lision or reduce collision speed To ensure full brake performance the driver should always depress the brake pedal even when the car auto brakes Never wait for a collision warning The driver is always responsible that the cor rect distance and speed are maintained even when the collision warning system with auto brake is used i Option accessory for more information see Introduction 04 Driver support 4 04 171 Y 04 Driver support 04 172 Collision Warning with Auto Brake amp Pedestrian Detection Detection of pedestrians G043978 Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function t

Owners Manual - ESD

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents